Cadillac 2011 Cadillac SRX Owners Manual

Cadillac SRX Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-26
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-42 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-48 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-34
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-40
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-62
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-37
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
2011 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-17
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . 10-105 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10
Introduction iii
This manual describes features Canadian Vehicle Owners

that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle either because Propritaires Canadiens
they are options that you did A French language copy of this
not purchase or due to changes manual can be obtained from your
subsequent to the printing of this dealer or from:
owner manual. Please refer to the
The names, logos, emblems, purchase documentation relating On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and to your specific vehicle to confirm ce guide en franais auprs du
vehicle body designs appearing in each of the features found on your concessionnaire ou l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited vehicle. For vehicles first sold in suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CADILLAC, Canada, substitute the name
the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath, Helm, Incorporated
General Motors of Canada Limited P.O. Box 07130
and SRX are trademarks and/or for Cadillac Motor Car Division
service marks of General Motors Detroit, MI 48207
wherever it appears in this manual.
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, 1-800-551-4123
or licensors. Numro de poste 6438
de langue franaise
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 20784402 B Second Printing 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information The vehicle has components and
about the vehicle, use the Index These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
in the back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number information relating to a specific
where it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result
Danger, Warnings, and in property or vehicle damage. M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions This would not be covered by you need to see your owner manual
the vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it
hazard that could result in injury or is a safety symbol which means
death. Do Not, Do not do this, or
Do not let this happen.
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart . : Fuel Gauge

Here are some additional symbols + : Fuses
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
information on the symbol, refer Changer
to the Index. j : LATCH System Child
0 : Adjustable Pedals Restraints
9 : Airbag Readiness Light * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
# : Air Conditioning : : Oil Pressure
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar }: Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light /: Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System >: Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control 7: Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature d: Traction Control/StabiliTrak
O : Exterior Lamps M: Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

In Brief Steering Wheel
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-22
Throttle and Brake Pedal Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-22
Instrument Panel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Universal Remote System . . . 1-23
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14 Performance and Maintenance
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Traction Control
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Vehicle Features Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-24
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Tire Sealant and
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-19 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-25
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-26
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-19 Driving for Better Fuel
Heated and Ventilated Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Head Restraint Driver Information OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 1-21
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 86. I. Safety Locks on page 213. P. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
B. Turn and LaneChange Lever. Power Door Locks on page 53.
See Turn and Lane-Change page 212. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
Signals on page 66. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 55.
Driver Information Center (DIC) page 65. Q. Heated Front Seats on
Controls. See Driver Information J. Exterior Lamp Controls on page 310 (If Equipped).
Center (DIC) on page 529. page 61. Heated and Ventilated
C. Cruise Control on page 938. Front Fog Lamps on page 66 Front Seats on page 311
D. Instrument Cluster on (If Equipped). (If Equipped).
page 511. Instrument Panel Illumination R. Parking Brake on page 931.
E. Steering Wheel Controls on Control on page 67. S. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
page 52. K. Data Link Connector (DLC) Park on page 923.
F. AM-FM Radio on page 711. (Out of View). See Malfunction T. StabiliTrak System on
Navigation System Indicator Lamp on page 519. page 936.
(If Equipped). See Navigation L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
System Manual. page 52. page 940 (If Equipped).
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) M. Horn on page 53. Economy Mode (If Equipped).
Display. See Driver Information N. Adjustable Pedal Control See Fuel Economy Mode on
Center (DIC) on page 529. (If Equipped). See Adjustable page 929.
H. Clock (Analog Clock) on Throttle and Brake Pedal on U. Dual Automatic Climate Control
page 57 or Clock (Digital page 918. System on page 81.
Clock) on page 57. O. Start/Stop Button. See Ignition V. Glove Box on page 41.
Positions on page 918.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Remote Keyless Q: Press to lock all doors.

Information Entry (RKE) System Lock and unlock feedback can
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) be personalized. See Vehicle
This section provides a brief Personalization on page 542.
overview about some of the transmitter is used to lock and
important features that may unlock the doors from up to 60 m & : Press and hold to open the
or may not be on your specific (195 ft) away from the vehicle. liftgate.
vehicle. L : Press and release to locate
For more detailed information, refer the vehicle.
to each of the features which can be Press and hold L for
found later in this owner manual. three seconds to sound the
panic alarm.
Press L again or start the vehicle
to cancel the panic alarm.
Press the key release button near
the bottom of the transmitter to
remove the key. The key can be
used for the driver door and the
glove box.
K : Press to unlock the driver See Keys on page 22 and Remote
door or all doors depending on the Keyless Entry (RKE) System
vehicle personalization settings. Operation on page 24.
In Brief 1-5
Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start

With this feature the engine can be To cancel a remote start:
started from outside of the vehicle. . Press and hold / until the
Starting the Vehicle parking lamps turn off.
1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
2. Within two seconds, press . Turn the vehicle on and then off.
and hold / until the turn
signal lamps flash, or for See Remote Vehicle Start on
about two seconds if the page 210.
vehicle is not in view.
Door Locks The power door lock switches are
When the vehicle starts, the parking on the instrument panel.
lamps will turn on and remain on To lock or unlock a door, use the
as long as the engine is running. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) K: Press to unlock the doors.
The doors will be locked and transmitter from the outside. Q: Press to lock the doors.
the climate control system may From inside the vehicle with the
come on. See Power Door Locks on
doors locked, pull once on the door page 212.
The engine will continue to run for handle to unlock it, and a second
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a time to open it or use the power
10-minute time extension. Remote door lock switch.
start can be extended only once.
1-6 In Brief
Liftgate Power Liftgate Operation Windows

Manual Liftgate Operation
For vehicles without keyless access,
unlock the vehicle before opening
the liftgate.
Press the touchpad located in the
handle of the liftgate, above the
license plate, and lift up to open.
Do not press the touchpad while
closing the liftgate. This will cause
the liftgate to be unlatched.
Driver Side Shown
On vehicles with a power liftgate the
switch is located on the driver door. The power window controls are on
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to each of the side doors.
use the power feature. The taillamps The driver door also has switches
flash when the power liftgate that control the passenger and rear
moves. windows.
Choose the power liftgate mode Operate the switch for the window
by turning the dial on the switch by pressing to open and pulling to
until the indicator lines up with the close.
desired position. Press the center
of the switch. Pushing or pulling the switch part
of the way will open or close the
See Liftgate on page 214 for more window as long as the switch is
information. operated.
In Brief 1-7
Seat Adjustment 3. Release the handle to stop the Power Seats

seat from moving.
Manual Seats 4. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
To raise or recline the seatback, use
the lever on the outboard side of
the seat.
See Seat Adjustment on page 34
and Reclining Seatbacks on
page 38 for more information.
A. Seat Position Control

B. Seatback Adjustment Control
To adjust a manual seat:
C. Lumbar Adjustment Control
1. Pull the handle at the front of the
seat cushion.
2. Move the seat forward or
rearward to adjust the seat
position.
1-8 In Brief
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: Memory Features seat are used to manually save
. Slide control (A) forward or and recall the positions of the
rearward, and up or down to driver seat, outside mirrors, and
adjust the power seat. adjustable throttle and brake pedals,
if available. These manually stored
See Power Seat Adjustment on positions are referred to as Button
page 34. Memory positions.
. Raise or recline the seatback The vehicle will also automatically
by tilting control (B) forward or save driver seat, outside mirror,
rearward. and adjustable throttle and brake
See Reclining Seatbacks on pedal positions to the current driver
page 38. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter when the ignition is
. Increase or decrease the lumbar turned off. These automatically
support by pressing and holding stored positions are referred to
the front or rear of control (C). On vehicles with the memory
as RKE Memory positions.
See Lumbar Adjustment on feature, the 1 and 2 buttons
page 37. on the outboard side of the driver
In Brief 1-9
Storing Button Memory Positions To automatically recall RKE Easy Exit Driver Seat
To save positions into Button Memory positions, unlock This feature moves the seat
Memory: the driver door with the RKE rearward allowing the driver more
transmitter, and open the driver room to exit the vehicle.
1. Adjust the driver seat, door. On vehicles with Keyless
seatback recliner, both Access, opening the driver door To activate, place the ignition in
outside mirrors, and adjustable when an RKE transmitter is present OFF and open the driver door. If the
pedals, if available, to the will activate the RKE Memory recall. driver door is already open, placing
desired driving positions. If the driver door is already open, the ignition in OFF will activate the
2. Press and release the pressing the RKE transmitter K easy exit driver seat.
MEM (Memory) button. button will also activate the RKE This feature is turned on or off using
Memory recall. The driver seat, the vehicle personalization menu.
3. Press 1 until a beep sounds. outside mirrors, and pedals, See Easy Exit Driver Seat under
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for a if available, will move to the Vehicle Personalization on
second driver using 2. previously saved RKE Memory page 542 for more information.
positions.
To recall the manually saved
Button Memory positions, press See Memory Seats under Power
and hold 1 or 2. The driver seat, Seat Adjustment on page 34 for
outside mirrors, and adjustable more information.
pedals, if available, move to the
positions stored to those buttons
when pressed. Releasing 1 or 2
before the stored positions are
reached stops the recall.
1-10 In Brief
Heated and Ventilated Press C or {, if available, Safety Belts

Seats to ventilate the driver or
passenger seat.
For more information, see Heated
Front Seats on page 310 or Heated
and Ventilated Front Seats on
page 311.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Heated and Ventilated To achieve a comfortable seating Refer to the following sections for
position, change the seatback important information on how to use
Seat Buttons Shown,
recline angle as little as necessary safety belts properly.
Heated Seat Buttons Similar
while keeping the seat and the . Safety Belts on page 315.
If available, the buttons are near the head restraint height in the proper
climate controls on the instrument position.
. How to Wear Safety Belts
panel. To operate, the ignition must Properly on page 319.
be in ON/RUN/START. For more information see Head
Restraints on page 32 and Seat
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 324.
Press M or L to heat the driver or Adjustment on page 34. . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
passenger seat. Children (LATCH System) on
page 355.
In Brief 1-11
Sensing System for The passenger airbag status To adjust the mirror:
indicator will be visible on the
Passenger Airbag overhead console when the vehicle
1. Move the selector switch to
L (left) or R (right) to choose
is started. See Passenger Sensing the driver or passenger mirror.
System on page 339 for more
information. 2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move each mirror to the
Mirror Adjustment desired position.
3. Return the selector switch to the
United States
Exterior center position.
See Power Mirrors on page 221.
Manual Folding Mirrors
Vehicles with manual fold mirrors
are folded inward toward the vehicle
to prevent damage when going
Canada and Mexico through an automatic car wash.
Push the mirror outward to return
The passenger sensing system will it to the original position.
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags and
roofrail airbags are not affected by Controls for the outside power
the passenger sensing system. mirrors are on the driver door.
1-12 In Brief
Power Folding Mirrors To fold the mirrors: Steering Wheel

1. With the selector switch in Adjustment
the ) position, push the down
arrow on the control pad. Both
mirrors will automatically fold.
2. Push the down arrow on the
control pad again to return the
mirrors to their original position.
See Folding Mirrors on page 221.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If the vehicle has the automatic
dimming mirror, the driver outside
Vehicles with power folding mirrors mirror and the inside rearview
have controls on the driver door. mirror automatically adjust for the
glare of headlamps behind you. To adjust the steering wheel:
See Automatic Dimming Mirror on 1. Pull the lever down.
page 222 or Automatic Dimming 2. Move the steering wheel up
Rearview Mirror on page 223. or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
In Brief 1-13
Throttle and Brake Pedal Interior Lighting Reading Lamps

Adjustment Dome Lamps There are reading lamps located on
the overhead console and over the
If the vehicle has this feature, the The dome lamp controls are located rear passenger doors. These lamps
position of the throttle and brake in the overhead console. come on automatically when any
pedals can be adjusted. door is opened.
To change the dome lamp settings,
The switch used to adjust the press the following: To manually turn the reading lamps
pedals is located on the right side on or off:
of the steering column, below the * : Turns the lamp off, even when
wiper stalk. Pull the switch toward a door is open. . For the overhead console
you to move the pedals further from 1: The lamp comes on reading lamps, press the button
the floor, or push the switch away automatically when a door is next to each lamp.
from you to move the pedals closer opened. . For the rear passenger reading
to the floor. lamps, press the lamp lens.
+: Turns the dome lamp on.
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake For more information on interior
Pedal on page 918. lighting, see Instrument Panel
Illumination Control on page 67.
1-14 In Brief
Exterior Lighting AUTO: Turns the headlamps on Windshield Wiper/Washer

automatically at normal brightness,
together with the parking lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps,
and instrument panel lights.
; : Turns the parking lamps on
together with the taillamps, license
plate lamps, and instrument panel
lights.
The windshield wiper/washer
5: Turns the headlamps on lever is located on the right side
together with the parking lamps, of the steering column. With the
taillamps, license plate lamps, ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY
and instrument panel lights. or ON/RUN/START, move the
# : For vehicles with fog lamps, windshield wiper lever to select
The exterior lamps control is located press to turn the lamps on or off. the wiper speed.
on the instrument panel to the left of
For more information, see: 2: Use for fast wipes.
the steering column.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on 1: Use for slow wipes.
The exterior lamps control has four
positions: page 61.
O: Briefly turn to this position to . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
turn the automatic light control off or on page 63.
on again.
In Brief 1-15
G: Turn the 3 band up for Rainsense

more frequent wipes or down for For vehicles with Rainsense:
less frequent wipes. If the vehicle
has Rainsense, see following G : Move the windshield wiper
Rainsense information. lever to G. Turn the 3 band
on the wiper lever to adjust the
sensitivity.
Turn the band up for more
sensitivity to moisture.
Turn the band down for less
sensitivity to moisture.
( : Use to turn the wipers off. To deactivate Rainsense, move Press the upper or lower portion of
the windshield wiper lever out of the button to control the rear wiper
8 : For a single wipe, briefly move
the wiper lever down. For several the G position. and rear wiper delay.
wipes, hold the wiper lever down. The system turns off when the
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
button is returned to the middle
Windshield Washer The rear wiper controls are on the position.
Pull the lever toward you to spray end of the windshield wiper lever.
Z : Use for continuous rear
washer fluid on the windshield. window wipes.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on 5 : Use to set a delay between
page 53 and Rear Window Wiper/ wipes.
Washer on page 55, if equipped.
= : Push the windshield wiper
lever forward to spray washer fluid
on the rear window.
1-16 In Brief
Climate Controls See Dual Automatic Climate

Control System on page 81 and
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with Rear Climate Control System on
this system. page 85, if equipped.
Transmission
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
at a high rpm without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when
necessary while using DSC.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
allows you to shift an automatic
transmission similar to a manual
A. Fan Control H. Driver and Passenger Heated transmission. To use the DSC
and Ventilated Seats feature:
B. Power
I. Air Conditioning 1. Move the shift lever to
C. AUTO (Automatic Operation) the left from D (Drive) to
D. ZONE J. Recirculation M (Manual Mode).
E. Defrost K. Outside Air 2. To enter M (Manual Mode),
L. Rear Window Defogger press the shift lever forward (+)
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
to upshift or rearward () to
G. Driver and Passenger downshift.
Temperature Control
See Manual Mode on page 928.
In Brief 1-17
Vehicle Features Buttons 1 6: Press to save and Setting the Clock

select favorite stations
The vehicle has a digital and an
Radio(s) For more information about analog clock.
these and other radio features,
VOL/ O : Press to turn the system For detailed instructions on setting
see Operation on page 77.
either clock, see Clock (Analog
on and off. Turn to increase or
Storing a Favorite Station Clock) on page 57 or Clock (Digital
decrease the volume.
Clock) on page 57.
RADIO/BAND: Press to choose Stations from all bands can be
between FM, AM, or XM, stored in the favorite lists in any Turning the Digital Clock On or Off
if equipped. order. Up to six stations can be 1. Press the CONFIG button.
stored in each favorite page and
TUNE k : Turn to select radio the number of available favorite 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
stations. pages can be set. 3. Select Clock Displayed.
Press to show play or pause track. To store the station to a position 4. Press the MENU/SELECT
in the list, press the corresponding button to turn the clock on or off.
SEEK r t : Press to seek the numeric button 1-6 until the station
previous station or track. can be heard again.
SEEK [ u : Press to seek the For more information, see Storing
next station or track. a Station as a Favorite in AM-FM
Radio on page 711.
/ BACK or BACK / (depending
on system): Press to exit or move
backwards in a menu.
1-18 In Brief
Setting the Time and Date Setting the Month & Day Format Satellite Radio
1. Press the CONFIG button. 1. Press the CONFIG button. Vehicles with an XM Satellite
2. Select Time and Date Settings. 2. Select Time and Date Settings. Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
3. Select Set Time or Set Date. 3. Highlight Month & Day Format.
programming.
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to 4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
adjust the highlighted value. to select MM/DD (month/day) or XM Satellite Radio Service
5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob DD/MM (day/month). XM is a satellite radio service based
to select the next value. Setting the Auto Time Adjust in the 48 contiguous United States
(If Equipped) and 10 Canadian provinces.
6. To save the time or date and XM Satellite Radio has a wide
return to the Time and Date 1. Press the CONFIG button. variety of programming and
Settings menu, press the BACK commercial-free music, coast to
button at any time or press the 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
MENU/SELECT knob after 3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust. A fee is required to receive the
adjusting the minutes or year. 4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob XM service.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format to turn Auto Time Adjust on For more information refer to:
or off.
1. Press the CONFIG button. . www.xmradio.com or call
2. Select Time and Date Settings. 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
. www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
4. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to select the 12 hour For more information, see Satellite
or 24 hour display format. Radio on page 714.
In Brief 1-19
Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth Steering Wheel Controls

Some vehicles have a 3.5 mm The Bluetooth system allows
(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB users with a Bluetooth-enabled
port located in the center console. cell phone to make and receive
External devices such as iPods, hands-free calls using the vehicle
laptop computers, MP3 players, audio system, microphone, and
CD changers, and USB storage controls.
devices may be connected, The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
depending on the audio system. must be paired with the in-vehicle
For more information, see Bluetooth system before it can be
Auxiliary Devices (Radio with CD) used in the vehicle. Not all phones
on page 729 or Auxiliary Devices will support all functions.
(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) on See Bluetooth (Overview) on
page 735. page 750 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls) on If available, some audio controls
page 752 or Bluetooth (Voice can be adjusted at the steering
Recognition) on page 756. wheel.
yz: Press y to select the next
favorite radio station or next CD,
DVD, if equipped, or MP3 track.
1-20 In Brief
Press z to select the previous Cruise Control Navigation System

favorite radio station or previous If the vehicle has a navigation
CD, DVD, if equipped, or MP3 track. system, there is a separate
+ x : Press + to increase the Navigation System Manual that
volume, press to decrease the includes information on the radio,
volume. audio players, and navigation
system.
b g : Press to interact with
the available Bluetooth, OnStar, The navigation system provides
or Navigation system. detailed maps of most major
freeways and roads. After a
0c: Press to silence the destination has been set, the
vehicle speakers only. Press again system provides turn-by-turn
to turn the sound on. For vehicles instructions for reaching the
with OnStar or Bluetooth systems, T : Press to turn cruise control on destination. In addition, the system
press to reject an incoming call, and off. can help locate a variety of points
or end a current call. of interest (POIs), such as banks,
+ RES: Press briefly to make the
SRCE: Press to select an audio vehicle resume to a previously airports, restaurants, and more.
source. set speed or press and hold to See the navigation system manual
For more information, see Steering accelerate. for more information.
Wheel Controls on page 52. SET: Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or make the
vehicle decelerate.
[ : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
See Cruise Control on page 938.
In Brief 1-21
Driver Information B. w x: Use the thumbwheel Vehicle Personalization

Center (DIC) to scroll through the items in Some vehicle features can be
each menu. programmed by using the audio
The DIC display is located in the
center of the instrument panel C. MENU: Press to get to the system controls. These features
cluster. It shows the status of many Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle include:
vehicle systems. The controls for Information Menu. This button . Climate and Air Quality
the DIC are located on the turn is also used to return to or exit
. Comfort and Convenience
signal lever. the last screen displayed on
the DIC. . Language
For more information, see Driver . Lighting
Information Center (DIC) on
page 529.
. Power Door Locks
. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
. Return to Factory Settings
See Vehicle Personalization on
A. SET/CLR: Press to set or page 542.
clear the menu item when
it is displayed.
1-22 In Brief
Rear Vision Ultrasonic Parking Assist The system can be disabled by

pressing the park assist button
Camera (RVC) If available, this feature uses located next to the shift lever.
If available, the rear vision sensors on the front and rear
bumpers to detect objects while See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
camera displays a view of the page 940 for more information.
area behind the vehicle when the parking the vehicle. Ultrasonic Front
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)
The display will appear on either the comes on automatically when the Storage Compartments
inside rearview mirror or navigation shift lever is moved into R (Reverse) The glove box is air conditioned
screen, if equipped. and operates at speeds less than and can be used to store items at a
8 km/h (5 mph). UFRPA uses lower temperature. Slide the control
To clean the camera lens, located audible beeps and a display in the
above the license plate, rinse it with across the small hole to adjust the
instrument panel to provide distance air flow. See Glove Box on page 41
water and wipe it with a soft cloth. and system information. for more information.
See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
page 943. front and rear bumpers clean to
ensure proper operation.
In Brief 1-23
Power Outlets Universal Remote System Performance and

The accessory power outlets can be Maintenance
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Traction Control
The vehicle has four accessory System (TCS)
power outlets. The power outlets
located below the climate control The traction control system limits
system inside the front storage wheel spin. The system is on when
bin, inside the center floor console, This system provides a way the vehicle is started.
and on the rear of the center floor to replace up to three remote . To turn off traction control, press
console are powered while the control transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage and release g located on the
vehicle is in ON/RUN/START or
ACC/ACCESSORY mode, or until door openers, security systems, console. i illuminates and
the driver door is opened within and home automation devices. the appropriate DIC message
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle. Read the instructions completely displays. See Vehicle Messages
before attempting to program on page 534.
The power outlet located in the rear
cargo area is powered at all times. the Universal Home Remote. . Press and release g again to
Because of the steps involved, turn traction control back on.
Open the protective cap to use the it may be helpful to have another
accessory power outlet. person available to assist you with For more information, see Traction
See Power Outlets on page 58. programming the Universal Home Control System (TCS) on
Remote. page 934.
See Universal Remote System on
page 548.
1-24 In Brief
StabiliTrak System Tire Pressure Monitor During cooler conditions, the low tire
pressure warning light may appear
The StabiliTrak system assists This vehicle may have a Tire when the vehicle is first started and
with directional control of the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). then turn off. This may be an early
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. indicator that the tire pressures are
The system is on when the vehicle getting low and the tires need to be
is started. inflated to the proper pressure.
. To turn off both Traction Control The TPMS does not replace normal
and StabiliTrak, press and monthly tire maintenance. It is the
hold g until g and i illuminate drivers responsibility to maintain
and the appropriate DIC correct tire pressures.
message displays. See Vehicle The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure See Tire Pressure Monitor System
Messages on page 534. on page 1065.
of one of the vehicle's tires. If the
. Press g again to turn on both warning light comes on, stop as
systems. soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
For more information, see
shown on the Tire and Loading
StabiliTrak System on page 936.
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 912. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
In Brief 1-25
Tire Sealant and Resetting the Oil Life System The oil life system can also be reset
as follows:
Compressor Kit 1. Using the DIC MENU button and
thumbwheel on the turn signal 1. Turn the ignition on with the
This vehicle may come with a jack lever, display REMAINING OIL engine off.
and spare tire or a tire sealant and LIFE on the DIC. See Driver
compressor kit. The kit can be used 2. Fully press and release the
Information Center (DIC) on accelerator pedal three times
to temporarily seal small punctures page 529 and Engine Oil
in the tread area of the tire. within five seconds.
Messages on page 537.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
2. Press the SET/CLR button to SOON message is not on, the
Kit on page 1081 for complete reset the oil life at 100%.
operating information. system is reset.
Be careful not to reset the oil See Engine Oil Life System on
If the vehicle came with a jack and life display accidentally at any
spare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 1014.
time other than after the oil is
page 1079. changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil
Engine Oil Life System change.
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message when it is time
to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil
change.
1-26 In Brief
. Avoid idling the engine for long
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) periods of time.
Roadside Service
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge . U.S. or Canada: 1-800-882-1112
When road and weather
and a yellow fuel cap can use either TTY Users (U.S. or Canada):
conditions are appropriate,
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel 1-888-889-2438
use cruise control.
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on . Always follow posted speed Mexico: 01-800-466-0805
page 950. For all other vehicles, limits or drive more slowly when As the owner of a new Cadillac,
use only the unleaded gasoline conditions require. you are automatically enrolled in
described under Recommended . Keep vehicle tires properly the Roadside Service program.
Fuel on page 948. inflated. See Roadside Service (U.S. and
Driving for Better Fuel
. Combine several trips into a Canada) on page 138 or Roadside
single trip. Service (Mexico) on page 1311 for
Economy more information.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
Driving habits can affect fuel the same TPC Spec number Roadside Service and OnStar
mileage. Here are some driving molded into the tire's sidewall (U.S. and Canada)
tips to get the best fuel economy near the size.
possible. If you have an active OnStar
. Follow recommended scheduled subscription, press the Q button
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate maintenance.
smoothly. and the current GPS location will
be sent to an OnStar advisor who
. Brake gradually and avoid will assess your problem, contact
abrupt stops. Roadside Service, and relay your
exact location to get the help
you need.
In Brief 1-27
Online Owner Center Automatic Crash Response Navigation, and HandsFree Calling
(U.S. and Canada) In a crash, builtin sensors can are available on most vehicles.
The Online Owner Center is a automatically alert an OnStar Not all OnStar services are
complimentary service that includes Advisor who is immediately available on all vehicles. For more
online service reminders, vehicle connected to the vehicle to information, see the OnStar Owner's
maintenance tips, online owner see if you need help. Guide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
manual, special privileges, or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
and more. How OnStar Service Works contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(18884667827) or TTY
Sign up today at: Q : Push this blue button to
connect to a specially trained 18772482080; or push the Q
www.cadillacownercenter.com
OnStar Advisor to verify your button to speak with an OnStar
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
account information and to Advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
OnStar answer questions.
] : Push this red emergency For a full description of OnStar
button to get priority help from services and system limitations,
specially trained OnStar Emergency see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
Advisors. the glove box.
X : Push this button for handsfree, OnStar service is subject to the
voiceactivated calling and to give OnStar Terms and Conditions
voice commands for HandsFree included in the OnStar Glove
Calling and TurnbyTurn Box Kit.
For vehicles with an active OnStar
subscription, OnStar uses several Navigation. OnStar service requires wireless
innovative technologies and live Automatic Crash Response, communication networks and the
Advisors to provide a wide range Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, Global Positioning System (GPS)
of safety, security, navigation, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle satellite network. Not all OnStar
diagnostics, and calling services. Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, services are available everywhere
Roadside Assistance, TurnbyTurn or on all vehicles at all times.
1-28 In Brief
OnStar service cant work unless control may prevent service to you, Your Responsibility
the vehicle is in a place where such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
Increase the volume of the radio
OnStar has an agreement with weather, electrical system design
if the OnStar Advisor cannot be
a wireless service provider for and architecture of the vehicle,
heard.
service in that area, and the damage to important parts of the
wireless service provider has vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone If the light next to the OnStar
coverage, network capacity, network congestion or jamming. buttons is red, the system may
reception, and technology not be functioning properly.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
compatible with OnStar service. page 1320 for information Push the Q button and request
Service involving location regarding Part 15 of the Federal a vehicle diagnostic check.
information about the vehicle Communications Commission If the light appears clear (no light
cant work unless GPS signals (FCC) rules and Industry Canada appears), your OnStar subscription
are available, unobstructed, Standards RSS-210/220/310. has expired and all services have
and compatible with the OnStar
been deactivated. Push the Q
hardware. The vehicle has to have OnStar Steering Wheel button to confirm that the OnStar
a working electrical system and Controls
adequate battery power for the equipment is active.
OnStar equipment to operate. This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
OnStar service may not work if the button that can be used to interact
OnStar equipment isnt properly with OnStar Hands-Free calling.
installed or you havent maintained See Steering Wheel Controls on
it and the vehicle is in good working page 52 for more information.
order and in compliance with all On some vehicles, the Talk button
government regulations. If you try can be used to dial numbers into
to add, connect, or modify any voice mail systems, or to dial phone
equipment or software in the extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
vehicle, OnStar service may not Guide for more information.
work. Other problems OnStar cant
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Doors

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-22
Windows Vehicle Security
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-18 Windows
Keys and Locks Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-19 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Exterior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Roof
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . 2-10 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-22
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks

Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons; children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
This key, located inside the Remote
windows or other controls or
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
even make the vehicle move. is used for the driver door and
The windows will function glove box.
with the RKE transmitter in
the vehicle and they could be
seriously injured or killed if
caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the RKE
transmitter in a vehicle with
children.
Notice: If the keys get locked If there is a decrease in the RKE

in the vehicle, it may have to be operating range:
damaged to get them out. Always . Check the distance.
carry a spare key. The transmitter may be
Contact Roadside Service if too far from the vehicle.
you are locked out of the vehicle. . Check the location. Other
See Roadside Service (U.S. and vehicles or objects may be
Canada) on page 138 or Roadside blocking the signal.
Service (Mexico) on page 1311.
. Check the transmitter's battery.
Remote Keyless Entry See Battery Replacement later
in this section.
(RKE) System
To remove the key, press the button . If the transmitter is still not
near the bottom of the transmitter, See Radio Frequency working correctly, see your
and pull the key out. Never pull the Statement on page 1320 for dealer or a qualified technician
key out without pressing the button. information regarding Part 15 for service.
of the Federal Communications
See your dealer if a new key is Commission (FCC) rules and
needed. Industry Canada Standards
RSS-210/220/310.
Remote Keyless Entry Q (Lock): Press to lock all light your approach to the vehicle.
doors. The turn signal indicators The turn signal indicators may
(RKE) System Operation flash and/or the horn may sound
may flash and/or the horn may
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) sound to indicate locking, see to indicate unlocking. See Unlock
transmitter functions will work up to Locking Feedback under Vehicle Feedback under Vehicle
60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle. Personalization on page 542. Personalization on page 542.
Keep in mind that other conditions, Memory seat positions may be
If the driver door is open when Q is
such as those previously stated, recalled when unlocking the vehicle.
pressed, all doors lock except the
can impact the performance of the See Memory Remote Recall
driver door, if enabled through
transmitter. under Vehicle Personalization on
the vehicle personalization. If the
passenger door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock. Pressing K will disarm
the theft-deterrent system.
Pressing Q may also arm See Anti-Theft Alarm System on
the theft-deterrent system. page 218.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 218. / (Remote Start): For vehicles
with this feature, press Q and
K (Unlock): Press to unlock
the driver door or all doors, see then press and hold / within
Door Unlock Options under two seconds to start the engine
Vehicle Personalization on from outside the vehicle using
page 542. When remotely the RKE transmitter. See Remote
With Remote Start and Power unlocking the vehicle at night the Vehicle Start on page 210 for
Liftgate Shown, Without Similar fog lamps and reverse lamps will additional information.
come on for about 20 seconds to
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Keyless Unlocking removed from the interior of the

Alarm): Press and release With the transmitter within 1 m (3 ft), vehicle, the doors will lock after
one time to locate the vehicle. approach the front door and pull eight seconds.
The exterior lamps flash and the the handle. If the transmitter is If there are two keyless access
horn chirps. Press and hold L for recognized, the door will unlock transmitters in the vehicle and
three seconds to sound the panic and open. one is removed, the other will be
alarm. The horn sounds and Entering any door other than the locked in. A person approaching
the turn signal lamps flash for driver door will always cause all the outside of the locked vehicle
30 seconds, or until L is pressed of the doors to unlock. This is not without an authorized keyless
again or the vehicle is started. customizable. access transmitter will not be able
to open the door, even with the
& (Remote Liftgate Release): To customize which doors unlock transmitter in the vehicle.
Press until the liftgate begins to when the drivers door is opened,
move to open or close the power see Passive Unlock under Vehicle You may temporarily disable the
liftgate. Personalization on page 542. keyless locking feature by pressing
and holding the power door unlock
Keyless Access Operation Keyless Locking button on the instrument panel for
If the vehicle has the keyless several seconds with a door open.
Some vehicles have the keyless
access system, this feature allows Keyless locking will then remain
access system that lets you lock
you to select whether the doors disabled until the door lock switch
and unlock the doors and access
automatically lock during normal is pressed, or until the vehicle is
the liftgate without removing the
vehicle exit. When the vehicle is turned on.
remote transmitter from your pocket,
purse, briefcase, etc. The keyless turned off and all doors become To customize whether the doors
entry transmitter must be within closed, the vehicle will determine automatically lock when you exit
1 m (3 ft) of the door being opened. how many keyless access the vehicle, see Passive Locking
If the vehicle has this feature, there transmitters remain in the vehicle under Vehicle Personalization on
will be a body colored touch pad interior. If at least one keyless page 542.
on the outside front door handles. access transmitter has been
Lock Sensor Keyless Liftgate Opening Programming with a Recognized

Press the touch pad on the liftgate Transmitter (Keyless Access
handle to open the liftgate if the Vehicles Only)
keyless entry transmitter is within A new transmitter can be
range. programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle To program, the vehicle must be
off and all of the transmitters, both
Only keyless entry transmitters currently recognized and new, must
programmed to the vehicle will work. be with you.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and 1. Place the recognized
programmed through your dealer. transmitter(s) in the cupholder.
The vehicle can be reprogrammed 2. Insert the vehicle key of the
When all doors are closed and the so that lost or stolen transmitters no new transmitter into the key lock
ignition is off, the vehicle can be longer work. Each vehicle can have cylinder located on the outside
locked by pressing this area on the up to eight transmitters matched of the driver door and turn the
door handle. This feature will be to it. key to the unlock position five
available for several minutes after times within ten seconds.
the vehicle has been turned off.
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) displays READY
TO LEARN ELECTRONIC
KEY #2, 3, 4, ETC.
4. Press the ignition. When the Programming without a

transmitter is learned the DIC Recognized Transmitter
display will show that it is ready (Keyless Access Vehicles Only)
to program the next transmitter. If there are no currently recognized
5. Remove the transmitter from transmitters available, follow this
the transmitter pocket and procedure to program up to eight
press K on the transmitter. transmitters. This feature is not
available in Canada. This procedure
To program additional will take approximately 30 minutes
transmitters, repeat Steps 3 to complete. The vehicle must be
through 5. off and all of the transmitters you
When all additional transmitters wish to program must be with you.
3. Place the new transmitter are programmed, press and hold 1. Insert the vehicle key of the
into the transmitter pocket. the ignition for 10 seconds to transmitter into the key lock
The transmitter pocket is inside exit programming mode. cylinder located on the outside
the center console storage of the driver door and turn the
area located between the driver key to the unlock position five
and front passenger seats. times within ten seconds.
The storage area will need
to be opened and the storage The Driver Information
tray lifted up to access the Center (DIC) displays
transmitter pocket. REMOTE LEARN PENDING,
PLEASE WAIT.
2. Wait for ten minutes until the 5. Press the ignition. When the
DIC displays PRESS ENGINE transmitter is learned the DIC
START BUTTON TO LEARN display will show that it is ready
and then press the ignition. to program the next transmitter.
The DIC displays will again 6. Remove the transmitter from
show REMOTE LEARN the transmitter pocket and
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT. press K on the transmitter.
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional To program additional
times. After the third time all transmitters, repeat Steps 4
previously known transmitters through 6.
will no longer work with the
vehicle. Remaining transmitters When all additional transmitters
can be relearned during the next 4. Place the new transmitter are programmed, press and hold
steps. into the transmitter pocket. the ignition for 10 seconds to
The transmitter pocket is inside exit programming mode.
The DIC display should the center console storage
now show READY FOR area located between the driver
REMOTE # 1. and front passenger seats.
The storage area will need
to be opened and the storage
tray lifted up to access the
transmitter pocket.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low 3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or

Transmitter Battery N (Neutral), press the brake
pedal and the START button.
If the transmitter battery is weak,
the DIC may display NO REMOTE Replace the transmitter battery
DETECTED when you try to as soon as possible.
start the vehicle. The REPLACE Battery Replacement
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message may also be displayed Notice: When replacing the
at this time. battery, do not touch any of
the circuitry on the transmitter.
To start the vehicle:
Static from your body could
1. Open the center console storage damage the transmitter.
area and the storage tray. 2. Use the key blade to separate
Replace the battery if the
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE the two halves of the transmitter.
KEY message displays in the DIC. 3. Remove the old battery. Do not
1. Press the button near the bottom use a metal object.
of the transmitter and pull the 4. Insert the new battery, positive
key out. side facing down. Replace with
a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
5. Snap the transmitter back
together.
2. Place the transmitter in the

transmitter pocket.
Remote Vehicle Start Laws in some local communities If the vehicle' s lamps are not
may restrict the use of remote visible, press and hold / for at
If available, this feature allows you starters. For example, some laws
to start the engine from outside the least two seconds.
may require a person using remote
vehicle. start to have the vehicle in view. During the remote start the
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Check local regulations for any doors will be locked and the
This button will be on the RKE requirements. parking lamps will remain on as
transmitter if the vehicle has long as the engine is running.
There are other conditions which
remote start. can affect the performance of the The engine will shut off after
Vehicles with an automatic climate transmitter See Remote Keyless 10 minutes unless a time
control system will automatically Entry (RKE) System on page 23 extension is done or the ignition
change to a heating or cooling for additional information. is put in ON/RUN/START.
mode depending on the outside Starting the Engine Using Remote 3. Press the brake pedal and select
temperature during a remote start. Start the ON/RUN/START ignition
When the ON/RUN/START ignition mode to drive the vehicle.
mode is selected , the climate To start the engine using the remote
control system will return to its start feature use the following
setting from when the vehicle procedure.
was last turned off.
1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.
2. Within two seconds, press and
hold / until the turn signal
lamps flash. This confirms
the request to remote start
the vehicle has been received.
Extending Engine Run Time Shutting the Engine Off After a

. The hood is not closed.
For a 10-minute extension, repeat Remote Start . The hazard warning flashers
Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is To cancel a remote start, do any of are on.
still running. The remote start can the following. . There is an emission control
only be extended once. system malfunction.
. Press / until the parking lamps
When the remote start is extended, turn off. . The engine coolant temperature
the second 10-minute period will is too high.
start immediately.
flashers. . The oil pressure is low.
For example, if the vehicle has
been running for five minutes, and
. Turn the vehicle on and then . Two remote vehicle starts have
10 minutes are added, the engine back off. already been used.
will run for a total of 15 minutes. Conditions in Which Remote Start
. The vehicle is not in P (Park).
A maximum of two remote starts, Will Not Work
or a remote start with an extension, The remote start will not operate if
are allowed between ignition cycles. any of the following occur.
The vehicle's ignition must be . The ignition is in any mode other
changed to ON/RUN/START and than OFF.
then back to OFF before the remote
start procedure can be used again.
. The transmitter is in the vehicle.
Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Power Door Locks
{ WARNING . Young children who get into

unlocked vehicles may be
Unlocked doors can be unable to get out. A child can
dangerous. be overcome by extreme heat
. Passengers, especially and can suffer permanent
children, can easily open injuries or even death from
the doors and fall out heat stroke. Always lock the
of a moving vehicle. vehicle whenever leaving it.
The chance of being thrown . Outsiders can easily enter
out of the vehicle in a crash
through an unlocked door
is increased if the doors
when slowing or stopping
are not locked. So, all
the vehicle. Lock the doors
passengers should wear The power door lock switches are
to help prevent this from
safety belts properly and on the instrument panel.
happening.
the doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
driven. To lock or unlock a door, use the
(Continued) Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
transmitter from the outside.
From inside the vehicle with the
doors locked, pull once on the door
handle to unlock it, and a second
time to open it.
Lockout Deterrent Delayed Locking Safety Locks

Lockout deterrent decreases the When this feature is enabled and
chances that the keys may be the doors are locked with the power
accidentally locked in the vehicle. lock switch on the instrument panel,
When door locking is requested three chimes sound to signal that
the delayed locking feature is in
by pressing Q on the instrument use. All doors lock five seconds
panel or Q on the RKE transmitter after the last door is closed.
and the driver door is open, all When the delayed locking
doors will lock and the driver door
will immediately unlock. The driver feature is in use, pressing Q on
door must be closed when Q is the instrument panel or Q on
pressed for all doors to remain the RKE transmitter will override
locked. the feature and lock all doors
immediately. Rear door security locks prevent
This feature can be programmed
to provide the lockout deterrent This feature can be programmed passengers from opening the rear
feature only when the ignition by using the Driver Information doors from the inside.
mode is ACC/ACCESSORY, or Center (DIC). See Delayed Door
Lock in Vehicle Personalization on Press { to activate the safety locks.
ON/RUN/START. See Power Door Once activated, the LED light in the
Locks in Vehicle Personalization on page 542. The delayed locking
feature is only available if Unlocked switch illuminates.
page 542.
Door Anti-Lockout is disabled. Pressing the button again
deactivates the safety locks.
Doors Manual Liftgate

WARNING (Continued)
For vehicles without keyless access,
Liftgate . Adjust the Climate Control unlock the vehicle before opening
system to a setting that the liftgate.
{ WARNING brings in only outside air
and set the fan speed to the
Press the touchpad located in the
handle of the liftgate, above the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See Climate license plate, and lift up to open.
vehicle if it is driven with the Control Systems in the Index.
Do not press the touchpad while
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, . If the vehicle is equipped with closing the liftgate. This will cause
or with any objects that pass a power liftgate, disable the the liftgate to be unlatched.
through the seal between the power liftgate function.
body and the trunk/hatch or Always close the liftgate before
For more information about driving.
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, see Engine
carbon monoxide (CO) which Exhaust on page 924.
cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
If the vehicle must be driven with obstructions such as a garage
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: door, you could damage the
. Close all of the windows. liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure
. Fully open the air outlets the area above and behind the
on or under the instrument liftgate is clear before opening it.
panel.
(Continued)
Power Liftgate OFF: The liftgate only operates

{ WARNING manually in this position.
You or others could be injured if Manual operation of a liftgate that
caught in the path of the power also has power operation requires
liftgate. Make sure there is no one more effort than with a standard
in the way of the liftgate as it is manual liftgate.
opening and closing. In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,
the liftgate can be power opened
and closed by.
Choose the power liftgate mode
by turning the dial on the switch . Pressing & on the Remote
until the indicator lines up with Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
the desired position. until the liftgate starts moving.
The three modes are. See Remote Keyless Entry
On vehicles with a power liftgate, (RKE) System Operation on
MAX : The liftgate opens to the full page 24.
the switch is on the driver door. open height.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to
3/4 : The liftgate opens to a
. Pressing & on the center of
use the power feature. The taillamps
flash when the power liftgate reduced open height that can be the mode switch on the driver
moves. set by the vehicle operator in a door, with the driver door
range of approximately 3/4 open unlocked.
to full open. Use this setting to . Pressing the touchpad switch on
prevent the liftgate from opening the liftgate outside handle, with
into overhead obstructions such all doors unlocked, to open the
as a garage door or roof mounted liftgate.
cargo during power operation.
The liftgate can still be opened
fully manually.
Do not force the liftgate open or Obstacle Detection Features

closed during a power cycle.
If the liftgate encounters an
The power liftgate may be obstacle during a power open
temporarily disabled under or close cycle, a warning chime
extreme temperatures or low will sound and the liftgate will
battery conditions. If this occurs, automatically reverse direction
the liftgate can still be operated to the full closed or open position.
manually. After removing the obstruction,
If you shift the transmission out of the power liftgate operation can be
P (Park) while the power function used again. If the liftgate encounters
is in progress, the liftgate power multiple obstacles on the same
function will continue to completion. power cycle, the power function
Press and release & on the If you shift the transmission out of will deactivate. The Power Liftgate
liftgate adjacent to the latch to P (Park) and accelerate before the Unavailable warning message in
close the liftgate. power liftgate latch is closed, the the Driver Information Center (DIC)
liftgate may reverse to the open will display. After removing the
Pressing any liftgate button, or obstructions, the liftgate will resume
position. Cargo could fall out of
the touchpad switch while the normal power operation.
the vehicle. Always make sure
liftgate is moving, stops it. Pressing
the power liftgate is closed and The vehicle has pinch sensors
the button or RKE switch again
latched before you drive away. located on the side edges of the
reverses the direction. There is a
minimum distance that the power If you power open the liftgate and liftgate. If an object is caught
liftgate must already be open for the the liftgate support struts have lost between the liftgate and the body
system to hold it open. If movement pressure, the turn signals flash and presses against this sensor,
is stopped below that minimum, the and a chime sounds. The liftgate the liftgate will reverse direction and
liftgate closes. stays open temporarily, then slowly open fully. The liftgate will remain
closes. See your dealer for service open until it is activated again or
before using the liftgate. closed manually.
Setting the Power When power opened with the To open the liftgate, press the
Liftgate 3/4 Mode 3/4 mode selected, the liftgate touchpad on the handle on the
stops at the new set position. outside of the liftgate, and lift the
To change the liftgate stop position. gate open. To close the liftgate,
If you do not hear the audible and
1. Turn the liftgate switch to visual feedback when setting the use the pull cup to lower the liftgate
either the MAX, or the 3/4 mode intermediate stop position, you and close. With the power liftgate
position and power open the are attempting to set the height disabled, the liftgate electric latch
liftgate. below the 3/4 open height minimum will still power latch once contact is
(approximately 16.4 m or 5 ft). made with the striker. Always close
2. Stop the liftgate movement at
The liftgate cannot be set below the liftgate before driving.
the desired height by pressing
any liftgate switch. Manually that minimum and the new setting If the RKE button is pressed while
adjust the liftgate position if will not be recorded. power operation is disabled, the turn
required. signals flash and the liftgate will
Manual Operation of Power not move.
3. Press and hold the button on the Liftgate
liftgate adjacent to the latch until The liftgate has an electric latch.
the turn signals flash and a beep To change the liftgate to manual If the battery is disconnected or
sounds to indicate that the new operation, turn the mode switch to has low voltage, the liftgate will
setting is recorded. the OFF position. not open. The liftgate will resume
With the power liftgate disabled operation when the battery is
and all of the doors unlocked, the reconnected and charged.
liftgate can be manually opened
and closed. Manual efforts of a
vehicle equipped with a power
liftgate will be higher than a
standard non-power liftgate.
Vehicle Security 3. After 30 seconds, the alarm Disarming the System

system will arm, and the
This vehicle has theft-deterrent To disarm the system, either
LED will begin to slowly flash
features; however, they do not unlock the doors using the
indicating the alarm is operating.
make it impossible to steal. transmitter, or start the vehicle
If a door, the hood, or liftgate is with a recognized transmitter
opened without first unlocking with in the vehicle.
Anti-Theft Alarm System the transmitter, the turn signals
To avoid setting off the alarm by
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm will flash and the horn will sound
accident:
system. for about 30 seconds. The alarm
system will then re-arm to monitor . Lock the vehicle with the
The LED light, located on for the next unauthorized event. transmitter after all occupants
the instrument panel near the have left the vehicle and all
windshield, indicates the status The theft-deterrent alarm system
doors are closed.
of the system. will not activate if the doors are
locked with the vehicle's key. . Always unlock a door with the
Arming the System You can start the vehicle with transmitter. Unlocking a door
To arm the system, a recognized transmitter in the any other way will not disarm
vehicle if the alarm has been the alarm.
1. Close all doors, liftgate, set off.
and hood. If you set off the alarm by accident,
turn off the alarm by pressing K on
2. Lock the vehicle using the
transmitter or the power door the transmitter. The alarm will not
lock button. The LED on stop if you try to unlock a door any
the instrument panel should other way.
come on and stay on for
about 30 seconds.
How to Detect a Tamper Immobilizer Operation

Condition
This vehicle has a passive
If K is pressed and the horn chirps theft-deterrent system.
three times, an attempted break-in The system does not have to be
has occurred while the system was manually armed or disarmed.
armed. The security light, located in the
The vehicle is automatically
If the alarm has been activated, the immobilized when the vehicle instrument panel cluster, comes
THEFT ATTEMPTED message will is turned off. on if there is a problem with arming
appear on the DIC. See Key and or disarming the theft-deterrent
Lock Messages on page 538 for The immobilization system is system.
additional information. disarmed when the pushbutton
start is activated to enter the The system has one or more
ACC/ACCESSORY mode or the RKE transmitters matched to an
Immobilizer ON/RUN/START mode and a valid immobilizer control unit in your
See Radio Frequency transmitter is present in the vehicle. vehicle. Only a correctly matched
Statement on page 1320 for RKE transmitter will start the
information regarding Part 15 vehicle. If the transmitter is ever
of the Federal Communications damaged, you may not be able
Commission (FCC) rules and to start your vehicle.
Industry Canada Standards
RSS-210/220/310.
When trying to start the vehicle, the If the ignition modes will not Exterior Mirrors
security light comes on briefly when change with the other transmitter,
the ignition is turned on. your vehicle needs service. If the
ignition does change modes, Convex Mirrors
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on, there is a the first transmitter may be faulty.
problem with the system. Turn the See your dealer who can service { WARNING
ignition off and try again. the theft-deterrent system and have
a new RKE transmitter programmed A convex mirror can make things,
If the vehicle will not change to the vehicle. like other vehicles, look farther
ignition modes (ACC/ACCESSORY, away than they really are. If you
ON/RUN/START, OFF), and It is possible for the immobilizer
cut too sharply into the right lane,
the RKE transmitter appears system to learn new or replacement
RKE transmitters. Up to eight you could hit a vehicle on the
to be undamaged, try another right. Check the inside mirror or
transmitter. Or, you may try transmitters can be programmed for
the vehicle. To program additional glance over your shoulder before
placing the transmitter in the changing lanes.
transmitter pocket located in the transmitters, see Programming
center console. See NO REMOTE Transmitters to the Vehicle under
DETECTED under Key and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The passenger side mirror is convex
Lock Messages on page 538. System Operation on page 24. shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
Do not leave the key or device curved so more can be seen from
that disarms or deactivates the the driver seat.
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors Resetting the Power Foldaway

Mirrors
Power Foldaway Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
. The mirrors are accidentally
obstructed while folding.
. They are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
. The mirrors do not stay in the
unfolded position.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one
Controls for the outside power time using the mirror controls to
mirrors are located on the reset them to their normal position.
driver door. The power folding mirrors have A noise may be heard during the
controls on the driver door. resetting of the power foldaway
To adjust the mirror: mirrors. This sound is normal after
To fold the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch to a manual folding operation.
L (left) or R (right) to choose 1. With the selector switch in
the driver or passenger mirror. the ) position, press the down
arrow on the control pad. Both
2. Press the arrows on the control
mirrors will automatically fold.
pad to move each mirror in the
desired direction. 2. Press the down arrow again to
return the mirrors to their original
3. Return the selector switch to the
position.
center position.
Heated Mirrors Reverse Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors

< (Rear Window Defogger): If the vehicle is equipped with
Press to heat the mirrors. memory mirrors, there is an option Manual Rearview Mirror
See Rear Window Defogger under to have the mirrors tilt down, when Adjust the inside rearview mirror
Dual Automatic Climate Control in R (Reverse), to more easily see for a clear view of the area behind
System on page 81 for more the ground near the vehicle. your vehicle. To avoid glare of the
information. When the vehicle is shifted to headlamps from behind, push the
R (Reverse), both the driver and tab forward for daytime and pull it
Automatic Dimming passenger mirrors will tilt downward. for nighttime use.
They will return to their previous
Mirror position when the vehicle is shifted
Vehicles with OnStar have three
control buttons at the bottom of the
If the vehicle has the automatic out of R (Reverse), the ignition is mirror. See your dealer for more
dimming mirror, the driver outside turned to OFF, or the vehicle is left information about OnStar and how
mirror automatically adjusts for the in R (Reverse) for an extended to subscribe to it. See the OnStar
glare of headlamps behind you. period of time. Owner's Guide for more information
This feature can be turned on or off. about the services OnStar provides.
page 542.
Automatic Dimming Windows

Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic { WARNING
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the Leaving children, helpless
glare from the headlamps of the adults, or pets in a vehicle
vehicle behind you. The dimming with the windows closed is
feature and the indicator light come dangerous. They can be
on each time the vehicle is started. overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries
Vehicles with OnStar have three or even death from heat stroke.
control buttons located at the
Never leave a child, a helpless
bottom of the mirror. See your The vehicle aerodynamics are
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
dealer for more information about designed to improve fuel economy
OnStar and how to subscribe to it. especially with the windows
performance. This may result in
See the OnStar Owner's Guide for closed in warm or hot weather.
a pulsing sound when either rear
more information about the services window is down and the front
OnStar provides. windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
Cleaning the Mirror or the sunroof (if equipped).
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Power Windows The power windows:

. Can be operated with the
{ WARNING ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN/START.
Leaving children in a vehicle . Can be operated within
with the RKE transmitter is 10 minutes of switching the
dangerous for many reasons; ignition off. See Retained
children or others could be badly Accessory Power (RAP) on
injured or even killed. They could page 922.
operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the
. Will stop operation when any
door is opened.
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the RKE transmitter Driver Side Shown Operate the switch for the desired
in the vehicle and they could be The power window controls are on window by pressing to open and
seriously injured or killed if caught each of the side doors. pulling to close.
in the path of a closing window. The driver door also has switches Pushing or pulling the switch part
Do not leave the RKE transmitter that control the passenger and rear of the way will open or close the
in a vehicle with children. windows. window as long as the switch is
When there are children in the operated.
rear seat, use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
ExpressDown/Up Windows Programming the Power Obstacle Detection Feature

Windows that have the Windows The Obstacle Detection Feature is
expressdown/up feature allow Programming the power windows part of the express-up feature and is
the windows to be lowered and may be necessary if the vehicle's active:
raised fully without holding the battery has been disconnected or 1. In the middle and upper portions
window switch. Press the window discharged. of the window opening.
switch fully and release it to activate
If the window will not express up 2. During window up movements.
the expressdown feature. Pull the
after power has been restored and
window switch fully up and release 3. In ignition OFF during all window
a message is displayed in the
it to activate the expressup feature. up movements and during
Driver Information Center:
The express mode can be canceled express-up window movements
at any time by briefly pressing, 1. Close all doors . in ignition ON/RUN/START.
or pulling the switch. 2. Place the ignition in If there is something blocking the
ACC/ACCESSORY or window during automatic closing,
ON/RUN/START. the window will reverse direction
3. From any partial open position, for a short distance. Weather
close the window and continue conditions such as extreme cold
to pull the switch briefly after and/or ice may cause the window
the window has fully closed. to auto-reverse. The window will
return to normal operation once
the object or condition is removed.
If conditions prevent the window Window Lockout Sun Visors

from closing and the window
continues to auto-reverse, it is
possible to close the window with
the ignition in ON/RUN/START by
holding the window switch in the
partially or fully pulled up position.
Release of the switch from the
partially pulled up position will
cause the window to stop. Release
of the switch from the fully pulled up
position will activate the express-up
and related obstacle detection
features.
Overload Pull the sun visor down to block
o (Window Lockout): The window
If the windows are repeatedly glare. Detach the sun visor from
lockout switch is on the driver door.
operated within a short time, the the center mount to pivot to the side
This feature prevents the rear
window operation is disabled for window, or to extend along the rod,
passenger windows from operating,
a short time. if available.
except from the driver position.
Press the switch to turn the lockout
feature on or off. An indicator light
shows the feature is on.
Roof Press the back of the sunroof switch

to the first detent and hold, to open
the sunroof to a desired position at
Sunroof a normal speed. Press the rear of
On vehicles with a sunroof, the the switch to the second detent
switches are on the overhead and release, to express open the
console. sunroof to an automatically adjusted
comfort position. Press the rear of
The sunroof only operates when the switch to the second detent and
the ignition is in ON/RUN/START release again, to open the sunroof
or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in to the full open position. Press the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP). front of the switch to second detent
See Ignition Positions on page 918 and release, to express close the
and Retained Accessory Power A. Sunroof Switch
sunroof.
(RAP) on page 922. B. Sunshade Switch
Press the front of the sunroof switch
To open the sunroof, press the back to the first detent and hold, to close
of the sunroof switch (A) to the first the sunroof to a desired position
detent and release, the sunroof will at a normal speed. Press the front
open to the vent position. of the switch to the second detent
and release, to express close the
sunroof.
To open or close the sunshade, Anti-Pinch Feature sunroof operation, noise,

press the open or close sunroof or plugging the water drainage
If an object is in the path of the
switch (B). system. Periodically open the
sunroof when it is closing, the
Press the front or back of the sunroof and remove any obstacles
anti-pinch feature detects the
sunshade switch to the first detent or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof
object and stops the sunroof
and hold, to open or close the seal and roof sealing area using a
from closing at the point of the
sunshade to a desired position at clean cloth, mild soap, and water.
obstruction. The sunroof then
a normal speed. Press the switch Do not remove grease from the
returns to the full-open position.
to the second detent and release, sunroof.
to express open or close the
sunshade.
Fully close the glass before fully
closing the sunshade.
Dirt and debris may collect on

the sunroof seal or in the track.
This could cause an issue with
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Rear Seats

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Restraints Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Rear Seat
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-33
When Should an Airbag
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . 3-14 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Head Restraints What Makes an Airbag
Safety Belts Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 How Does an Airbag
Front Seats How to Wear Safety Belts Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 What Will You See After an
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Safety Belt Use During Passenger Sensing
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 3-7 Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Heated and Ventilated Front Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Adding Equipment to the
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Replacing Safety Belt System Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-44
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-45
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Child Restraints Head Restraints

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Infants and Young Front Seats
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
The vehicle's front seats have
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-51
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-53 adjustable head restraints in all
Lower Anchors and outboard seating positions.
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 { WARNING
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-63 With head restraints that are
Securing Child Restraints not installed and adjusted
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63 properly, there is a greater
Securing Child Restraints chance that occupants will suffer Adjust the head restraint so that the
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-66 a neck/spinal injury in a crash. top of the restraint is at the same
Do not drive until the head height as the top of the occupant's
restraints for all occupants are head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
installed and adjusted properly.
Rear Seats
The rear seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.
1. To raise or lower the head The center seating position has

restraint, press the release an integrated headrest that can be
button while pulling up or adjusted the same way as the head
pushing down on the head restraints.
restraint. If you are installing a child restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up to in the rear seat, see Securing a
2. Release the button then pull raise it.
up or push down on the head Child Restraint Designed for the
restraint to make sure it is 2. To lower the head restraint, LATCH System under Lower
locked in place. press the release button while Anchors and Tethers for Children
pushing the head restraint down. (LATCH System) on page 355.
The front head restraints are
designed not to be removed. 3. Release the button.
4. Push down on the head restraint
to make sure it is locked in
place.
Front Seats Power Seat Adjustment
Seat Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
To adjust a manual seat: To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
a pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Pull the handle at the front of the . Move the seat forward or
the vehicle is not moving. seat cushion. rearward by sliding the control
2. Move the seat forward or forward or rearward.
rearward to adjust the seat . Raise or lower the front or
position. rear part of the seat cushion
3. Release the handle to stop the by moving the front or rear
seat from moving. of the control up or down.
4. Try to move the seat back and
. Raise or lower the seat by
forth to be sure it is locked in moving the control up or down.
place. To adjust the seatback, see
Reclining Seatbacks on page 38.
To adjust the lumbar support, see
Lumbar Adjustment on page 37.
Memory Seats The vehicle will also automatically Recalling Button Memory
save driver seat, outside mirror, Positions
and adjustable throttle and brake To recall the manually saved
pedal positions to the current driver Button Memory positions, press
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and hold 1 or 2. The driver seat,
transmitter when the ignition is outside mirrors, and adjustable
turned off. These automatically pedals, if available, move to the
stored positions are referred positions stored to those buttons
to as RKE Memory positions. when pressed. Releasing 1 or 2
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) before the stored positions are
System Operation on page 24 reached stops the recall.
for more information.
If something has blocked the
Storing Button Memory Positions driver seat and/or the adjustable
To save positions into Button pedals, if available, while recalling
On vehicles with the memory Memory: a memory position, the recall may
feature, the 1 and 2 buttons stop. Remove the obstruction; then
on the outboard side of the driver 1. Adjust the driver seat, press and hold the appropriate
seat are used to manually save seatback recliner, both manual control for the memory item
and recall the positions of the driver outside mirrors, and adjustable that is not recalling for two seconds.
seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable pedals, if available, to the Try recalling the memory position
throttle and brake pedal positions, desired driving positions. again by pressing the appropriate
if available. These manually stored 2. Press and release the memory button. If the memory
positions are referred to as Button MEM (Memory) button. position is still not recalling, see
Memory positions. your dealer for service.
3. Press 1 until a beep sounds.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for a
second driver using 2.
Recalling RKE Memory Positions To automatically recall RKE Memory To stop recall movement, press
(Memory Remote Recall) positions, unlock the driver door one of the memory, power mirror,
The Memory Remote Recall feature with the RKE transmitter, and open or power seat controls, or the
can recall the driver seat, outside the driver door. On vehicles with adjustable pedal switch, if available.
mirrors, and adjustable pedals, Keyless Access, opening the driver If something has blocked the
if available, to previously stored door when an RKE transmitter driver seat and/or the adjustable
RKE Memory positions when is present will activate the RKE pedals, if available, while recalling
entering the vehicle. Memory recall. If the driver door a memory position, the recall may
is already open, pressing the stop. Remove the obstruction; then
Every time the ignition is placed RKE transmitter K button will also
in OFF, the positions of the press and hold the appropriate
activate the RKE Memory recall. manual control for the memory item
driver seat, outside mirrors, and The driver seat, outside mirrors,
adjustable pedals, if available, are that is not recalling for two seconds.
and pedals, if available, will move Try recalling the memory position
automatically stored to the RKE to the previously saved RKE
transmitter that was used to start again by opening the driver door
Memory positions. and pressing the RKE transmitter K
the vehicle. These positions are
called RKE Memory positions and This feature is turned on or off using button. If the memory position is still
may be different than the previously the vehicle personalization menu. not recalling, see your dealer for
mentioned Button Memory positions See Memory Remote Recall service.
saved to the 1 or 2 buttons. under Vehicle Personalization on
Easy Exit Driver Seat Lumbar Adjustment Thigh Support

This feature moves the seat Adjustment
rearward allowing the driver more Power Lumbar
room to exit the vehicle.
To activate, place the ignition in
OFF and open the driver door. If the
driver door is already open, placing
the ignition in OFF will activate the
easy exit driver seat.
This feature is turned on or off
using the vehicle personalization
menu. See Easy Exit Driver Seat
under Vehicle Personalization on
To stop recall movement, press one
of the memory, power seat controls, If available, press and hold the front If available, adjust the manual leg
or the adjustable pedal switch, or rear of the control to increase or extension by pulling up on the lever,
if available. decrease lumbar support. Release and then pulling or pushing on the
the control when the seatback support to lengthen or shorten it.
If something has blocked the driver Release the lever to lock it in place.
seat while recalling the exit position, reaches the desired level of lumbar
the recall may stop. Remove the support.
obstruction; then press and hold
the power seat control rearward for
two seconds. Try recalling the exit
position again. If the exit position is
still not recalling, see your dealer for
service.
Reclining Seatbacks WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt
Sitting in a reclined position when could go up over your abdomen.
the vehicle is in motion can be The belt forces would be there,
dangerous. Even when buckled not at your pelvic bones. This
up, the safety belts cannot do could cause serious internal
their job when reclined like this. injuries.
The shoulder belt cannot do its For proper protection when the
job because it will not be against vehicle is in motion, have the
your body. Instead, it will be in seatback upright. Then sit well Do not have a seatback reclined if
front of you. In a crash, you could back in the seat and wear the the vehicle is moving.
go into it, receiving neck or other safety belt properly.
injuries.
(Continued)
Manual Reclining Seatbacks Power Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
a pedal when you do not want to. To recline a manual seatback:
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. 1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then To adjust a power seatback,
release the lever to lock the if available:
{ WARNING seatback in place. . Tilt the top of the control
If either seatback is not locked, it 3. Push and pull on the seatback rearward to recline.
could move forward in a sudden to make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright
. Tilt the top of the control forward
stop or crash. That could cause to raise.
position:
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the 1. Lift the lever fully without
seatbacks to be sure they are applying pressure to the
locked. seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Heated Front Seats Press L or M to heat the driver

or passenger seat cushion and
{ WARNING seatback.
Press the button once for the
If you cannot feel temperature highest setting. With each press
change or pain to the skin, of the button, the heated seat
the seat heater may cause will change to the next lower
burns even at low temperatures. setting, and then to the off setting.
To reduce the risk of burns, The lights indicate three for the
people with such a condition highest setting and one for the
should use care when using lowest.
the seat heater, especially for The passenger seat may take
long periods of time. Do not If available, the buttons are near the
climate controls on the instrument longer to heat up.
place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such panel. To operate, the ignition must
as a blanket, cushion, cover, be in ON/RUN/START.
or similar item. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat.
An overheated seat heater may
cause a burn or may damage
the seat.
Remote Start Heated Seats See Remote Vehicle Start on

When it is cold outside, the page 210 and Remote Start
heated seats can be turned on Auto Heated Seats under Vehicle
automatically during a remote Personalization on page 542 for
vehicle start. The heated seats more information.
will be canceled when the ignition
is turned on. Press the button to Heated and Ventilated
use the heated seats after the Front Seats
vehicle is started.
The heated seat indicator lights on { WARNING
the button do not turn on during a
remote start. If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, If available, the buttons are near the
The temperature performance of an climate controls on the instrument
the seat heater may cause
unoccupied seat may be reduced. panel. To operate, the ignition must
burns even at low temperatures.
This is normal. be in ON/RUN/START.
See the Warning under Heated
The heated seats will not turn on Front Seats on page 310. Press M to heat the seat or { to
during a remote start unless the
ventilate the seat.
heated seat feature is enabled in
the vehicle personalization menu. Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press
of the button, the seat will change
to the next lower setting, and then
to the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and
one for the lowest.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Remote Start Heated and Rear Seats

Ventilated Seats
During a remote start, the heated or Split Folding Seatbacks
ventilated seats can be turned on With this feature, either side of the
automatically. They are canceled rear seatback can be folded down
when the ignition is turned on. for more cargo space.
Press the button to use the heated
or ventilated seats after the vehicle Folding the Seatbacks
is started. Notice: Folding a rear seat with
The heated or ventilated seat the safety belts still fastened may
indicator lights on the button do cause damage to the seat or the
not turn on during a remote start. safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them A. Seatback Lock Indicator
The temperature performance of an to their normal stowed position 3. Lift the lever on the top of the
unoccupied seat may be reduced. before folding a rear seat. seatback. The rear seatback
This is normal.
To fold the seatback: lock indicator (A) extends when
The heated or ventilated seats the seatback is unlocked.
will not turn on during a remote 1. Unbuckle the rear safety
belts and move the front 4. Fold the seatback forward.
start unless they are enabled in
seatbacks to the upright The rear seatback lock
the vehicle personalization menu.
position. See Reclining indicator (A) retracts when
See Remote Vehicle Start on
Seatbacks on page 38 the seatback is locked.
page 210 and Remote Start Auto
Heated Seats or Remote Start for more information. Keep the seatback in the upright,
Auto Seat Cool under Vehicle 2. Make sure that there is nothing locked position when not in use.
Personalization on page 542 under, in front of, or on the seat.
Raising the Seatbacks To raise the seatback: Reclining the Seatbacks

1. Lift the lever on top of the To recline the seatback:
{ WARNING seatback. Raise the seatback
1. Lift and hold the lever on top of
and release the lever. The rear
If either seatback is not locked, it the seatback. The rear seatback
seatback lock indicator (A)
could move forward in a sudden lock indicator (A) extends when
extends when the seatback
stop or crash. That could cause the seatback is unlocked.
is unlocked.
injury to the person sitting there. 2. Tilt the seatback rearward, and
2. Push the seatback rearward
Always push and pull on the then release the lever when
until it locks in the upright
seatbacks to be sure they are the seatback is in the desired
position. The rear seatback lock
locked. position. The rear seatback lock
indicator (A) retracts when the
indicator (A) retracts when the
seatback is locked in place.
seatback is locked in place.
3. Make sure the rear safety
{ WARNING belts are not twisted or caught
between the seat cushion and
A safety belt that is improperly the seatback.
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts
are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
Heated Rear Seats With the ignition in ON/RUN/START, Rear Seat

press L or M to heat the left or Pass-Through Door
{ WARNING right outboard seat cushion and
seatback. An indicator on the RSA
If you cannot feel temperature display appears when this feature
change or pain to the skin, the is on.
seat heater may cause burns Press the button once for the
even at low temperatures. highest setting. With each press of
See the Warning under Heated the button, the heated seat changes
Front Seats on page 310. to the next lower setting, and then
the off setting. Three lights indicate
the highest setting, and one light
indicates the lowest.
Some vehicles have a rear seat

pass-through door in the center of
the rear seatback. Fold down the
center armrest and push down on
the latch to open the door.
If available, the buttons are on the

Rear Sear Audio (RSA) panel on the
rear of the center console.
Safety Belts { WARNING

In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
This section of the manual safety belts. Here is why:
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside You never know if you will be in
properly. It also describes some
of a vehicle. In a collision, people a crash. If you do have a crash,
things not to do with safety belts.
riding in these areas are more you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
{ WARNING likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some
Do not let anyone ride where in any area of your vehicle that crashes can be so serious that
a safety belt cannot be worn is not equipped with seats and even buckled up, a person would
properly. In a crash, if you or safety belts. Be sure everyone not survive. But most crashes
your passenger(s) are not in the vehicle is in a seat and are in between. In many of them,
wearing safety belts, the injuries using a safety belt properly. people who buckle up can survive
can be much worse. You can hit and sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
things inside the vehicle harder This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed.
or be ejected from the vehicle. reminder to buckle the safety belts.
You and your passenger(s) can See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety
be seriously injured or killed. page 515 for additional information. belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In the same crash, you might In most crashes buckling up does
not be, if you are buckled up. matter ... a lot!
Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the

vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

it is just a seat on wheels.
The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
stopped by something. In a real With safety belts, you slow down
vehicle, it could be the windshield... as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Q: If I am a good driver, and I
Safety Belts should I have to wear safety never drive far from home,
belts? why should I wear safety
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts?
after a crash if I am wearing a A: Airbags are supplemental
safety belt? systems only; so they work A: You may be an excellent driver,
with safety belts not instead but if you are in a crash even
A: You could be whether you of them. Whether or not an one that is not your fault you
are wearing a safety belt or airbag is provided, all occupants and your passenger(s) can be
not. But your chance of being still have to buckle up to get hurt. Being a good driver does
conscious during and after an the most protection. That is not protect you from things
accident, so you can unbuckle true not only in frontal collisions, beyond your control, such as
and get out, is much greater if but especially in side and other bad drivers.
you are belted. And you can collisions.
unbuckle a safety belt, even if Most accidents occur within
you are upside down. 40 km (25 mi) of home.
And the greatest number
of serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less
than 65 km/h (40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your worn low and snug on the hips,
passenger(s) wear a safety belt, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
Properly there is important information you this applies force to the strong
This section is only for people of should know. pelvic bones and you would be
adult size. less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
Be aware that there are special
would apply force on your abdomen.
things to know about safety belts
This could cause serious or even
and children. And there are different
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
rules for smaller children and
should go over the shoulder and
infants. If a child will be riding in
across the chest. These parts of
the vehicle, see Older Children on
the body are best able to take belt
page 346 or Infants and Young
restraining forces.
Children on page 348. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection. The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more
often in crashes than those who Sit up straight and always keep
are wearing safety belts. your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should
fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. A: The lap belt is too loose.
It will not give as much It will not give nearly as
protection this way. much protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the You can be seriously injured
lap belt is too loose. In a crash, if the belt is buckled in the
you could slide under the lap wrong place like this. In a crash,
belt and apply force on your the belt would go up over your
abdomen. This could cause abdomen. The belt forces would
serious or even fatal injuries. be there, not on the pelvic bones.
The lap belt should be worn This could cause serious internal
low and snug on the hips, injuries. Always buckle the belt
just touching the thighs. into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong

buckle.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
the belt goes over an armrest like
this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest. A: The shoulder belt is worn under

the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured You can be seriously injured
if you wear the shoulder belt by not wearing the lap-shoulder
under your arm. In a crash, belt properly. In a crash, you
your body would move too far would not be restrained by the
forward, which would increase the shoulder belt. Your body could
chance of head and neck injury. move too far forward increasing
Also, the belt would apply too the chance of head and neck
much force to the ribs, which are injury. You might also slide
not as strong as shoulder bones. under the lap belt. The belt
You could also severely injure force would then be applied
internal organs like your liver or right on the abdomen. That could
spleen. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is behind the body. cause serious or fatal injuries.
go over the shoulder and across The shoulder belt should go
the chest. over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Q: What is wrong with this? 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
{ WARNING the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
not have the full width of the belt you pull the belt across you very
to spread impact forces. If a belt quickly. If this happens, let the
is twisted, make it straight so it belt go back slightly to unlock it.
can work properly, or ask your Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
dealer to fix it.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out
Lap-Shoulder Belt all the way, the child restraint
All seating positions in the vehicle locking feature may be engaged.
have a lap-shoulder belt. If this happens, let the belt go
A: The belt is twisted across
back all the way and start again.
the body. The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see Seats
in the Index.
4. If equipped with a shoulder

belt height adjuster, move it
to the height that is right for
you. See Shoulder Belt Height
Adjuster later in this section
for instructions on use and
important safety information.
3. Push the latch plate into the To unlatch the belt, just push the
buckle until it clicks. button on the buckle.
Pull up on the latch plate to Before a door is closed, be sure
make sure it is secure. If the belt the safety belt is out of the way. If a
is not long enough, see Safety door is slammed against a safety
Belt Extender on page 329. belt, damage can occur to both the
Position the release button on safety belt and the vehicle.
the buckle so that the safety belt 5. To make the lap part tight, pull
could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt.
necessary.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Safety Belt Pretensioners

The vehicle has a shoulder belt This vehicle has safety belt
height adjuster for the driver and pretensioners for front outboard
right front passenger seating occupants. Although the safety
positions. belt pretensioners cannot be seen,
Adjust the height so that the they are part of the safety belt
shoulder portion of the belt is on assembly. They can help tighten the
the shoulder and not falling off of it. safety belts during the early stages
The belt should be close to, but of a moderate to severe frontal and
not contacting, the neck. Improper near frontal crash and will deploy in
shoulder belt height adjustment side, rear and rollover events if the
could reduce the effectiveness of threshold conditions for pretensioner
the safety belt in a crash. See How Move the height adjuster up to the activation are met.
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on desired position by pushing up on Pretensioners work only once.
page 319. the height adjuster. If the pretensioners activate in a
After the height adjuster is set to crash, they will need to be replaced,
the desired position, try to move it and probably other new parts for
up or down without pressing the the vehicle's safety belt system.
release button (A) to make sure it See Replacing Safety Belt System
has locked into position. Press the Parts After a Crash on page 330.
release button to lower the height
adjuster.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort

Guides
This vehicle may have rear
shoulder belt comfort guides
for the outboard passenger
positions in the rear seat. If not,
they are available through your
dealer. The guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for
older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults.
When installed on a shoulder belt,
and properly adjusted, the comfort 2. Place the guide over the belt, 3. Be sure that the belt is
guide positions the belt away from and insert the two edges of the not twisted and it lies flat.
the neck and head. belt into the slots of the guide. The elastic cord must be under
the belt and the guide on top.
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its
storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
Safety Belt Use During

{ WARNING Pregnancy
A safety belt that is not properly Safety belts work for everyone,
worn may not provide the including pregnant women. Like all
protection needed in a crash. occupants, they are more likely to
The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured if they do not
be seriously injured. The shoulder wear safety belts.
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges A pregnant woman should wear
together so that the safety belt a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
can be removed from the guide. portion should be worn as low
Slide the guide back into its storage as possible, below the rounding,
pocket located on the side of throughout the pregnancy.
the seat.
The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check Safety Belt Care
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry.
that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts,
crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors,
and anchorages are working
{ WARNING
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them properly. Look for any other loose Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
properly. or damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them.
that might keep a safety belt system In a crash, they might not be able
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer to provide adequate protection.
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed Clean safety belts only with mild
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in soap and lukewarm water.
around you, you should use it. a crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 515 for more
long enough for you. To help avoid information.
personal injury, do not let someone
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
else use it, and use it only for the
See Safety Belt Care on page 329.
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System

safety belts may not be necessary.
System Parts After a But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following
Crash were used during any crash may airbags:
have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the right front
A crash can damage the safety replaced. passenger.
belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be . A seat-mounted side impact
A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt airbag for the driver.
may not properly protect the system was not being used at the . A seat-mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in time of the crash. airbag for the right front
serious injury or even death in passenger.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
a crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a . A roof-rail airbag for the driver
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light and the passenger seated
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary directly behind the driver.
or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 517.
. A roof-rail airbag for the
possible. right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will Here are the most important things
have the word AIRBAG embossed { WARNING to know about the airbag system:
in the trim or on an attached label
Be sure that cargo is not near an
near the deployment opening.
airbag. In a crash, an inflating { WARNING
For frontal airbags, the word airbag might force that object
AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or
toward a person. This could killed in a crash if you are not
part of the steering wheel for the cause severe injury or even
driver and on the instrument panel wearing a safety belt even if
death. Secure objects away the vehicle has airbags. Airbags
for the right front passenger.
from the area in which an are designed to work with safety
With seat-mounted side impact airbag would inflate. For more belts, but do not replace them.
airbags, the word AIRBAG will information, see Where Are Also, airbags are not designed to
appear on the side of the seatback the Airbags? on page 333 and
closest to the door. deploy in every crash. In some
Vehicle Load Limits on page 912. crashes safety belts are the only
With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an
AIRBAG will appear along the trim. Airbags are designed to supplement Airbag Inflate? on page 334.
Even if you do not have a right front the protection provided by safety
Wearing a safety belt during a
passenger seat in the vehicle there belts. Even though today's airbags
crash helps reduce your chance
is still an active frontal airbag in the are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of of hitting things inside the vehicle
right side of the instrument panel.
an inflating bag, all airbags must or being ejected from it. Airbags
Do not place cargo in front of this
airbag. inflate very quickly to do their job. are supplemental restraints to
the safety belts. Everyone in the
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag
Anyone who is up against, or when it inflates can be seriously
very close to, any airbag when injured or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
it inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel cluster,
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children,
which shows the airbag symbol.
close to any airbag, as you would but not for young children and
be if you were sitting on the edge infants. Neither the vehicle's The system checks the airbag
of the seat or leaning forward. safety belt system nor its airbag electrical system for malfunctions.
Safety belts help keep you in system is designed for them. The light tells you if there is an
position before and during a Young children and infants electrical problem. See Airbag
crash. Always wear a safety belt, need the protection that a child Readiness Light on page 517
even with airbags. The driver restraint system can provide. for more information.
should sit as far back as possible Always secure children properly
while still maintaining control of in the vehicle. To read how, see
the vehicle. Older Children on page 346 or
Occupants should not lean on Infants and Young Children on
or sleep against the door or side page 348.
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger frontal Driver Side Shown,

airbag is in the instrument panel on Passenger Side Similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact
middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
WARNING (Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
that person causing severe injury Frontal airbags are designed
or even death. The path of an to inflate in moderate to severe
inflating airbag must be kept frontal or near-frontal crashes
clear. Do not put anything to help reduce the potential for
between an occupant and an severe injuries mainly to the
airbag, and do not attach or driver's or right front passenger's
put anything on the steering head and chest. However, they
wheel hub or on or near any are only designed to inflate if the
other airbag covering. impact exceeds a predetermined
Driver Side Shown, Passenger deployment threshold. Deployment
Do not use seat accessories thresholds are used to predict how
Side Similar that block the inflation path of a severe a crash is likely to be in time
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, seat-mounted side impact airbag. for the airbags to inflate and help
right front passenger, and second restrain the occupants.
Never secure anything to the roof
row outboard passengers are in the
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags Whether the frontal airbags will
ceiling above the side windows.
by routing a rope or tie down or should deploy is not based on
through any door or window how fast your vehicle is traveling.
{ WARNING opening. If you do, the path of It depends largely on what you hit,
an inflating roof-rail airbag will the direction of the impact, and how
If something is between an
be blocked. quickly your vehicle slows down.
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
Frontal airbags may inflate Frontal airbags are not intended to crashes. In addition, these roof-rail
at different crash speeds. inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear airbags are intended to inflate
For example: impacts, or in many side impacts. during a rollover. Seat-mounted
. If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has side impact and roof-rail airbags
object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags. will inflate if the crash severity
at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the is above the system's designed
the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity. threshold level. The threshold
The vehicle has electronic frontal level can vary with specific
. If the vehicle hits an object vehicle design.
that deforms, the airbags could sensors, which help the sensing
inflate at a different crash speed system distinguish between a Seat-mounted side impact airbags
than if the vehicle hits an object moderate frontal impact and are not intended to inflate in frontal
that does not deform. a more severe frontal impact. impacts, near-frontal impacts,
For moderate frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object dual-stage airbags inflate at a airbags are not intended to inflate in
(like a pole), the airbags could level less than full deployment. rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
inflate at a different crash speed For more severe frontal impacts, impact airbag is intended to deploy
than if the vehicle hits a wide full deployment occurs. on the side of the vehicle that is
object (like a wall). struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
The vehicle has seat-mounted
. If the vehicle goes into an object side impact and roof-rail airbags. deploy when either side of the
at an angle, the airbags could See Airbag System on page 330. vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
inflate at a different crash speed Seat-mounted side impact and system predicts that the vehicle is
than if the vehicle goes straight roof-rail airbags are intended to about to roll over, or in a severe
into the object. inflate in moderate to severe side frontal impact.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
If the vehicle does not have a right What Makes an Airbag How Does an Airbag
front passenger seat and a rear
seat, only the driver frontal airbag
Inflate? Restrain?
will deploy in a frontal impact. In a deployment event, the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or
In any particular crash, no one system sends an electrical signal near frontal collisions, even belted
can say whether an airbag should triggering a release of gas from the occupants can contact the steering
have inflated simply because of inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the wheel or the instrument panel. In
the damage to a vehicle or because airbag causing the bag to break out moderate to severe side collisions,
of what the repair costs were. of the cover and deploy. The inflator, even belted occupants can contact
For frontal airbags, inflation is the airbag, and related hardware are the inside of the vehicle.
determined by what the vehicle all part of the airbag module. Airbags supplement the protection
hits, the angle of the impact, and Frontal airbag modules are located provided by safety belts. Frontal
how quickly the vehicle slows down. inside the steering wheel and airbags distribute the force of
For seat-mounted side impact and instrument panel. For vehicles with the impact more evenly over the
roof-rail airbags, deployment is seat-mounted side impact airbags, occupant's upper body, stopping
determined by the location and there are airbag modules in the side the occupant more gradually.
severity of the side impact. In a of the front seatbacks closest to Seatmounted side impact and
rollover event, roof-rail airbag the door. For vehicles with roof-rail roof-rail airbags distribute the force
deployment is determined by the airbags, there are airbag modules of the impact more evenly over
direction of the roll. in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the the occupant's upper body.
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags What Will You See After

are designed to help contain the
an Airbag Inflates?
{ WARNING
head and chest of occupants in
the outboard seating positions After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates,
in the first and second rows. seat-mounted side impact airbags there may be dust in the air.
The rollover capable roof-rail inflate, they quickly deflate, so This dust could cause breathing
airbags are designed to help quickly that some people may not problems for people with a history
reduce the risk of full or partial even realize an airbag inflated. of asthma or other breathing
ejection in rollover events, although Roof-rail airbags may still be at least trouble. To avoid this, everyone
no system can prevent all such partially inflated for some time after in the vehicle should get out as
ejections. they deploy. Some components of soon as it is safe to do so. If you
But airbags would not help in the airbag module may be hot for have breathing problems but
many types of collisions, primarily several minutes. For location of the cannot get out of the vehicle after
because the occupant's motion airbag modules, see What Makes an airbag inflates, then get fresh
is not toward those airbags. See an Airbag Inflate? on page 336. air by opening a window or a
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on The parts of the airbag that come door. If you experience breathing
page 334 for more information. into contact with you may be problems following an airbag
warm, but not too hot to touch. deployment, you should seek
Airbags should never be regarded
There may be some smoke and medical attention.
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts. dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation The vehicle has a feature that may
does not prevent the driver from automatically unlock the doors, turn
seeing out of the windshield or on the interior lamps and hazard
being able to steer the vehicle, warning flashers, and shut off the
nor does it prevent people from fuel system after the airbags inflate.
leaving the vehicle.
You can lock the doors, turn off the In many crashes severe enough
. The vehicle has a crash
interior lamps and hazard warning to inflate the airbag, windshields sensing and diagnostic module
flashers by using the controls for are broken by vehicle deformation. which records information
those features. Additional windshield breakage after a crash. See Vehicle Data
may also occur from the right Recording and Privacy on
page 1318 and Event Data
{ WARNING front passenger airbag.
Recorders on page 1318.
. Airbags are designed to inflate
A crash severe enough to inflate only once. After an airbag
. Let only qualified technicians
the airbags may have also inflates, you will need some work on the airbag systems.
damaged important functions new parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean that
in the vehicle, such as the fuel If you do not get them, the an airbag system will not work
system, brake and steering airbag system will not be there properly. See your dealer for
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to help protect you in another service.
appears to be drivable after a crash. A new system will include
moderate crash, there may be airbag modules and possibly
concealed damage that could other parts. The service manual
make it difficult to safely operate for your vehicle covers the need
the vehicle. to replace other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
Passenger Sensing The words ON and OFF, or the The sensors are designed to detect
symbol for on and off, are visible the presence of a properly-seated
System during the system check. If you occupant and determine if the right
The vehicle has a passenger are using remote start, if equipped, front passenger frontal airbag and
sensing system for the right front to start the vehicle from a distance, seatmounted side impact airbag
passenger position. The passenger you may not see the system should be enabled (may inflate)
airbag status indicator will be visible check. When the system check is or not.
on the overhead console when the complete, either the word ON or According to accident statistics,
vehicle is started. OFF, or the symbol for on or off, children are safer when properly
will be visible. See Passenger secured in a rear seat in the correct
Airbag Status Indicator on child restraint for their weight
page 517. and size.
The passenger sensing system We recommend that children be
turns off the right front passenger secured in a rear seat, including:
frontal airbag and seat-mounted an infant or a child riding in a
United States side impact airbag under certain rear-facing child restraint; a child
conditions. The driver airbags and riding in a forward-facing child seat;
the roof-rail airbags are not affected an older child riding in a booster
by the passenger sensing system. seat; and children, who are large
The passenger sensing system enough, using safety belts.
works with sensors that are part
of the right front passenger seat.
Canada and Mexico
A label on the sun visor says, The passenger sensing system is

Never put a rear-facing child seat WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the right front
in the front. This is because the risk passenger airbag and seatmounted
to the rear-facing child is so great, airbag (if equipped), no side impact airbag if:
if the airbag deploys. system is fail-safe. No one can . The right front passenger seat is
guarantee that an airbag will unoccupied.
{ WARNING not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
. The system determines that an
A child in a rear-facing child airbag(s) are off. infant is present in a rear-facing
restraint can be seriously infant seat.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
injured or killed if the right . The system determines that a
in a rear seat, even if the
front passenger airbag inflates. small child is present in a child
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
This is because the back of the restraint.
forward-facing child restraint in
rear-facing child restraint would . The system determines that
the right front seat, always move
be very close to the inflating a small child is present in a
the front passenger seat as far
airbag. A child in a forward-facing booster seat.
back as it will go. It is better to
child restraint can be seriously
secure the child restraint in a . A right front passenger takes
injured or killed if the right front
rear seat. his/her weight off of the seat for
passenger airbag inflates and the
a period of time.
passenger seat is in a forward
position. If the vehicle does not have a . The right front passenger seat is
rear seat that will accommodate occupied by a smaller person,
Even if the passenger sensing a rearfacing child restraint, a such as a child who has
system has turned off the right rearfacing child restraint should outgrown child restraints.
front passenger frontal airbag not be installed in the vehicle,
and seat-mounted side impact
. Or, if there is a critical problem
even if the airbag is off. with the airbag system or the
(Continued) passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing sensing system may or may not If the On Indicator is Lit for a
system has turned off the right turn off the right front passenger Child Restraint
front passenger frontal airbag and frontal airbag and seat-mounted
seatmounted side impact airbag, side impact airbag, depending If a child restraint has been installed
the off indicator will light and stay lit upon the persons seating posture and the on indicator is lit:
to remind you that the airbags are and body build. Everyone in the 1. Turn the vehicle off.
off. See Passenger Airbag Status vehicle who has outgrown child
2. Remove the child restraint from
Indicator on page 517. restraints should wear a safety
the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system is belt properly whether or not
there is an airbag for that person. 3. Remove any additional items
designed to turn on (may inflate)
from the seat such as blankets,
the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seatmounted side { WARNING cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size If the airbag readiness light ever 4. Reinstall the child restraint
is sitting properly in the right front comes on and stays on, it means following the directions
passenger seat. that something may be wrong provided by the child restraint
with the airbag system. To help manufacturer and refer to
When the passenger sensing avoid injury to yourself or others, Securing a Child Restraint in
system has allowed the airbags
have the vehicle serviced right the Right Front Seat Position
to be enabled, the on indicator will
away. See Airbag Readiness under Securing Child Restraints
light and stay lit to remind you that
Light on page 517 for more (Rear Seat) on page 363 or
the airbags are active.
information, including important Securing Child Restraints (Front
For some children who have safety information. Passenger Seat) on page 366.
outgrown child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an system to detect that person and
restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant enable the right front passenger
vehicle, the on indicator is frontal airbag and seat-mounted
still lit, turn the vehicle off. side impact airbag:
Then slightly recline the vehicle 1. Turn the vehicle off.
seatback and adjust the seat
cushion, if adjustable, to make 2. Remove any additional material
sure that the vehicle seatback from the seat, such as blankets,
is not pushing the child restraint cushions, seat covers, seat
into the seat cushion. heaters, or seat massagers.
Also make sure the child 3. Place the seatback in the fully
restraint is not trapped under upright position.
the vehicle head restraint. 4. Have the person sit upright in
If this happens, adjust the head the seat, centered on the seat
restraint. See Head Restraints cushion, with legs comfortably
on page 32. If a person of adult-size is sitting extended.
6. Restart the vehicle. in the right front passenger seat, 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
but the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for
If the on indicator is still lit,
because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the on
secure the child restraint in a
properly in the seat. If this happens, indicator is lit.
rear seat position in the vehicle,
use the following steps to allow the
and check with your dealer.
If no rear seat is available, do not
install a child restraint in this
vehicle.
Additional Factors Affecting

System Operation { WARNING { WARNING
Safety belts help keep the Stowing of articles under the For up to 10 seconds after the
passenger in position on the passenger seat or between the ignition is turned off and the
seat during vehicle maneuvers passenger seat cushion and battery is disconnected, an airbag
and braking, which helps the seatback may interfere with the can still inflate during improper
passenger sensing system proper operation of the passenger service. You can be injured if you
maintain the passenger airbag sensing system. are close to an airbag when it
status. See Safety Belts and inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
Child Restraints in the Index for They are probably part of the
additional information about the Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow
importance of proper restraint use. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and
A thick layer of additional material, Airbags affect how the vehicle make sure the person performing
such as a blanket or cushion, should be serviced. There are work for you is qualified to do so.
or aftermarket equipment such parts of the airbag system in
as seat covers, seat heaters, several places around the vehicle.
and seat massagers can affect Your dealer and the service manual
how well the passenger sensing have information about servicing
system operates. We recommend the vehicle and the airbag system.
that you not use seat covers or To purchase a service manual,
other aftermarket equipment except see Service Publications Ordering
when approved by GM for your Information on page 1316.
specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 344 for more
information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
Adding Equipment to the In addition, the vehicle has If you have questions,
a passenger sensing system call Customer Assistance.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle for the right front passenger The phone numbers and
Q: Is there anything I might add position, which includes sensors addresses for Customer
to or change about the vehicle that are part of the passenger Assistance are in Step Two
that could keep the airbags seat. The passenger sensing of the Customer Satisfaction
from working properly? system may not operate Procedure in this manual.
properly if the original seat See Customer Satisfaction
A: Yes. If you add things that
trim is replaced with non-GM Procedure (U.S. and Canada) on
change the vehicle's frame,
covers, upholstery or trim, page 131 or Customer
bumper system, height, front
or with GM covers, upholstery Satisfaction Procedure (Mexico)
end or side sheet metal, they
or trim designed for a different on page 133.
may keep the airbag system
vehicle. Any object, such as If the vehicle has rollover
from working properly. Changing
an aftermarket seat heater or roof-rail airbags, see Different
or moving any parts of the front
a comfort enhancing pad or Size Tires and Wheels on
seats, safety belts, the airbag
device, installed under or on page 1075 for additional
sensing and diagnostic module,
top of the seat fabric, could also important information.
steering wheel, instrument
interfere with the operation of
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
the passenger sensing system.
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
This could either prevent proper
trim, overhead console, front
deployment of the passenger
sensors, side impact sensors,
airbag(s) or prevent the
rollover sensor module, airbag
passenger sensing system
wiring, or cargo restraint system
from properly turning off
and convenience net can affect
the passenger airbag(s).
the operation of the airbag
See Passenger Sensing
system.
System on page 339.
Q: Because I have a disability, Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System

I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out The airbag system does not need Parts After a Crash
whether this will affect my regularly scheduled maintenance
airbag system? or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
{ WARNING
A: If you have questions, See Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the
call Customer Assistance. page 517 for more information. airbag systems in the vehicle.
The phone numbers and A damaged airbag system
addresses for Customer Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, may not work properly and
Assistance are in Step Two
the airbag may not work properly. may not protect you and your
of the Customer Satisfaction
Do not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death.
Procedure (U.S. and Canada) on opened or broken airbag covers, To help make sure the airbag
page 131 or Customer have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly
Satisfaction Procedure (Mexico) airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them
on page 133. location of the airbag modules, inspected and any necessary
see What Makes an Airbag replacements made as soon
In addition, your dealer and the Inflate? on page 336. See your as possible.
service manual have information dealer for service.
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic If an airbag inflates, you will need
module and airbag wiring. to replace airbag system parts.
See your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
on after the vehicle is started or come with the booster seat state the
comes on when you are driving, weight and height limitations for that
the airbag system may not work Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with
properly. Have the vehicle serviced a lap-shoulder belt until the child
right away. See Airbag Readiness passes the fit test below:
Light on page 517 for more . Sit all the way back on the seat.
information. Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
If the shoulder belt still does not
vehicle safety belts.
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low and Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort
snug on the hips, touching the Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt on WARNING (Continued)
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, page 324.
return to the booster seat. children can be crushed together
According to accident statistics,
. Can proper safety belt fit be and seriously injured. A safety
children and infants are safer
maintained for the length of when properly restrained in a child belt must be used by only one
the trip? If yes, continue. If no, restraint system or infant restraint person at a time.
return to the booster seat. system secured in a rear seating
Q: What is the proper way to position.
wear safety belts? In a crash, children who are not
A: An older child should wear a buckled up can strike other people
lap-shoulder belt and get the who are buckled up, or can be
additional restraint a shoulder thrown out of the vehicle. Older
belt can provide. The shoulder children need to use safety belts
belt should not cross the face properly.
or neck. The lap belt should
fit snugly below the hips, just { WARNING
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the Never do this.
child's pelvic bones in a crash. Never allow two children to wear
It should never be worn over the the same safety belt. The safety
abdomen, which could cause
belt cannot properly spread the
severe or even fatal internal
impact forces. In a crash, the two
injuries in a crash.
(Continued)
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this. Children can be seriously injured
Never allow a child to wear the or strangled if a shoulder belt
safety belt with the shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
behind their back. A child can be and the safety belt continues
seriously injured by not wearing to tighten. Never leave children
the lap-shoulder belt properly. unattended in a vehicle and
In a crash, the child would not be never allow children to play
restrained by the shoulder belt. with the safety belts.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of Airbags plus lapshoulder belts
head and neck injury. The child
Infants and Young offer protection for adults and older
might also slide under the lap Children children, but not for young children
belt. The belt force would then Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's
be applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag
That could cause serious or fatal and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Never do this. better to secure a forward-facing
Never hold an infant or a child restraint in a rear seat. If you
child while riding in a vehicle. must secure a forward-facing
Due to crash forces, an infant child restraint in the right front
or a child will become so heavy seat, always move the front
it is not possible to hold it during passenger seat as far back
a crash. For example, in a crash as it will go.
at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a
5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly
become a 110 kg (240 lb) force
on a person's arms. An infant { WARNING
should be secured in an Never do this.
appropriate restraint.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
(Continued)
Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular

add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there { WARNING
A: Add-on child restraints, which are many kinds of restraints
available for children with A young child's hip bones are
are purchased by the vehicle still so small that the vehicle's
owner, are available in four special needs.
regular safety belt may not remain
basic types. Selection of a low on the hip bones, as it should.
particular restraint should take { WARNING Instead, it may settle up around
into consideration not only the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the child's weight, height, and To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants the belt would apply force on a
age but also whether or not the
need complete support. This is body area that is unprotected by
restraint will be compatible with
the motor vehicle in which it will because an infant's neck is not any bony structure. This alone
be used. fully developed and its head could cause serious or fatal
weighs so much compared with injuries. To reduce the risk of
For most basic types of child serious or fatal injuries during
restraints, there are many the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child a crash, young children should
different models available.
restraint settles into the restraint, always be secured in appropriate
When purchasing a child
restraint, be sure it is designed so the crash forces can be child restraints.
to be used in a motor vehicle. distributed across the strongest
If it is, the restraint will have a part of an infant's body, the back
label saying that it meets federal and shoulders. Infants should
motor vehicle safety standards. always be secured in rear-facing
The restraint manufacturer's child restraints.
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
Child Restraint Systems
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats

(A) RearFacing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child
provides restraint for the child's restraint designed to improve
A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness. the fit of the vehicle's safety belt
provides restraint with the seating system. A booster seat can also
surface against the back of the help a child to see out the window.
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child See Lower Anchors and Tethers In some areas of the United States
Restraint in the Vehicle for Children (LATCH System) on and Canada, Certified Child
page 355 for more information. Passenger Safety Technicians
Children can be endangered in a (CPSTs) are available to inspect
{ WARNING crash if the child restraint is not and demonstrate how to correctly
A child can be seriously injured properly secured in the vehicle. use and install child restraints.
or killed in a crash if the child When securing an add-on child In the U.S., refer to the National
restraint is not properly secured restraint, refer to the instructions Highway Traffic Safety
that come with the restraint which Administration (NHTSA) website
in the vehicle. Secure the child
may be on the restraint itself or in a to locate the nearest child safety
restraint properly in the vehicle
booklet, or both, and to this manual. seat inspection station. For CPST
using the vehicle safety belt or
The child restraint instructions availability in Canada, check with
LATCH system, following the Transport Canada or the Provincial
instructions that came with that are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement Ministry of Transportation office.
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual. copy from the manufacturer. Securing the Child Within the
Keep in mind that an unsecured Child Restraint
To help reduce the chance of child restraint can move around in a
injury, the child restraint must collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
{ WARNING
be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured properly secure any child restraint A child can be seriously injured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the in the vehicle even when no child or killed in a crash if the child
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder is in it. is not properly secured in the
belt, or by the LATCH system. child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the

Restraint
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
According to accident statistics, A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child

children and infants are safer restraint can be seriously restraints in a rear seat, even if
when properly restrained in a child injured or killed if the right the airbag is off. If you secure a
restraint system or infant restraint front passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in
system secured in a rear seating This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move
position. rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
We recommend that children and
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
child restraints be secured in a rear
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System
a child riding in a forward-facing passenger airbag inflates and the on page 339 for additional
child seat; an older child riding in a passenger seat is in a forward information.
booster seat; and children, who are position.
large enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing When securing a child restraint in
A label on your sun visor says, system has turned off the right a rear seating position, study the
Never put a rear-facing child seat front passenger frontal airbag, instructions that came with your
in the front. This is because the risk no system is fail-safe. No one child restraint to make sure it is
to the rear-facing child is so great, can guarantee that an airbag will compatible with this vehicle.
if the airbag deploys. not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
(Continued)
If the vehicle does not have a child restraints. Adjacent seating Configurations for Use of Child
rear seat that will accommodate positions should not be used if the Restraints
a rear-facing child restraint, we child restraint prevents access to
recommend that rear-facing child or interferes with the routing of the
restraints not be transported in the safety belt.
vehicle, even if the airbag is off. Wherever you install a child
Child restraints and booster seats restraint, be sure to secure the
vary considerably in size, and some child restraint properly.
may fit in certain seating positions Keep in mind that an unsecured
better than others. Always make child restraint can move around in a A. Child restraint using LATCH
sure the child restraint is properly collision or sudden stop and injure
secured. B. Occupant prohibited
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
Depending on where you place properly secure any child restraint
the child restraint and the size of in your vehicle even when no
the child restraint, you may not child is in it.
be able to access adjacent safety If you need to secure more than
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors one child restraint in the rear seat,
for additional passengers or review the following illustrations.
A. Child restraint using LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
C. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint

with a top tether, you must also
Tethers for Children use either the lower anchors or the
(LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top
A. Child restraint or occupant This system is designed to make tether and anchor.
using safety belt installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system
The LATCH system uses anchors in in your vehicle, you need a
the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that has LATCH
child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint
with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible with instructions on how to use the
child restraint is properly installed child restraint and its attachments.
using the anchors, or use the The following explains how to
A. Child restraint or occupant vehicle's safety belts to secure the attach a child restraint with these
using safety belt restraint, following the instructions attachments in your vehicle.
B. Child restraint using LATCH that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have
a top tether are designed for use
with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
Lower anchors (A) are metal A top tether (A, C) anchors the forward-facing child restraints have
bars built into the vehicle. top of the child restraint to the a top tether, and that the tether
There are two lower anchors for vehicle. A top tether anchor is be attached. Be sure to read and
each LATCH seating position that built into the vehicle. The top tether follow the instructions for your
will accommodate a child restraint attachment (B) on the child restraint child restraint.
with lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor
in the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or
in a crash.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations
To assist you in locating the lower

anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
Top Tether Anchors

The top tether anchors for each
Rear Seat rear seating position are located
under the covers, on the back of
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating the rear seatback. Be sure to use an
positions with top tether anchors. anchor located on the same side of
j (Lower Anchor): Seating To assist you in locating the top the vehicle as the seating position
positions with two lower anchors. tether anchors, the top tether anchor where the child restraint will be
symbol is located on the cover. placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a Securing a Child Restraint

position without a top tether anchor Designed for the LATCH { WARNING
if a national or local law requires System
that the top tether be attached, or if Do not attach more than one
the instructions that come with the child restraint to a single anchor.
child restraint say that the top tether { WARNING Attaching more than one child
must be attached. restraint to a single anchor could
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment
According to accident statistics, not attached to anchors, the child to come loose or even break
children and infants are safer restraint will not be able to protect during a crash. A child or others
when properly restrained in a child the child correctly. In a crash, the could be injured. To reduce the
restraint system or infant restraint child could be seriously injured
system secured in a rear seating risk of serious or fatal injuries
or killed. Install a LATCH-type during a crash, attach only one
position. See Where to Put the child restraint properly using the
Restraint on page 353 for child restraint per anchor.
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
additional information. belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.
Make sure to attach the child 1.2. Put the child restraint on
{ WARNING restraint at the proper anchor the seat.
location. For the outboard rear
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt This system is designed to make seating positions, if the
is wrapped around their neck installation of child restraints easier. head restraint interferes
and the safety belt continues to When using lower anchors, do with the proper installation
tighten. Buckle any unused safety not use the vehicle's safety belts. of the child restraint,
belts behind the child restraint so Instead use the vehicle's anchors the head restraint may
and child restraint attachments be removed. See Head
children cannot reach them. Pull
to secure the restraints. Some Restraint Removal and
the shoulder belt all the way out
restraints also use another vehicle Reinstallation at the end
of the retractor to set the lock, anchor to secure a top tether. of this section.
if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed. 1. Attach and tighten the 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
lower attachments to the attachments on the child
lower anchors. If the child restraint to the lower
Notice: Do not let the LATCH restraint does not have lower anchors.
attachments rub against the attachments or the desired
vehicles safety belts. This may 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
seating position does not have recommends that the top tether
damage these parts. If necessary, lower anchors, secure the child
move buckled safety belts to be attached, attach and tighten
restraint with the top tether and the top tether to the top tether
avoid rubbing the LATCH the safety belts. Refer to your
attachments. anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint manufacturer child restraint instructions and
Do not fold the empty rear seat instructions and the instructions the following steps:
with a safety belt buckled. This in this manual.
could damage the safety belt or 2.1. Find the top tether anchor
1.1. Find the lower anchors and open its cover to
the seat. Unbuckle and return the for the desired seating
safety belt to its stowed position, expose the anchor.
position.
before folding the seat.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten

the top tether according
to your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
. If you are using a dual . If you are using a single

tether in the rear outboard tether in the rear outboard
seating position and the seating position with an
head restraint has been adjustable head restraint,
removed, route the dual route the single tether
tether over the seatback. under the head restraint
. If you are using a dual and in between the head
tether in the rear outboard restraint posts.
seating position with an
adjustable head restraint,
route the dual tether around
the head restraint.
. If you are using a single

tether in the rear outboard
seating position and the
head restraint has been . If you are using a dual . If you are using a single
removed, route the single tether in the rear center tether in the rear center
tether over the seatback. seating position, lower the seating position, lower the
adjustable headrest down adjustable headrest down
to its stowed position and to its stowed position and
route the dual tether over route the single tether over
the headrest. the headrest.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt
to move it sidetoside and
backandforth. There should
be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
Head Restraint Removal and 4. When the child restraint is

Reinstallation removed, reinstall the head
restraint before the seating
The rear outboard head restraints position is used.
can be removed if they interfere
with the proper installation of the
child restraint. The headrest in the { WARNING
rear center seating position is not
With head restraints that are
removable and should be lowered
not installed and adjusted
to the stowed position for child
restraint installation. properly, there is a greater
chance that occupants will suffer
To remove the head restraint: a neck/spinal injury in a crash.
1. Partially fold the seatback 2. Press both buttons on the head Do not drive until the head
forward. See Rear Seats on restraint posts at the same restraints for all occupants are
page 312 for additional time, and pull up on the head installed and adjusted properly.
information. restraint.
3. Store the head restraint in the
cargo area of the vehicle.
To reinstall the head restraint: Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in
{ WARNING a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
A crash can damage the child restraint to make sure it is
LATCH system in the vehicle. compatible with this vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
not properly secure the child If the child restraint has the LATCH
restraint, resulting in serious system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
injury or even death in a crash.
System) on page 355 for how and
To help make sure the LATCH
where to install the child restraint
1. Insert the head restraint posts system is working properly after using LATCH. If a child restraint
into the holes in the top of the a crash, see your dealer to have is secured in the vehicle using a
seatback. The notches (A) on the system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether,
the posts must face the driver necessary replacements made see Lower Anchors and Tethers
side of the vehicle. as soon as possible. for Children (LATCH System) on
2. Push the head restraint down. page 355 for top tether anchor
If the vehicle has the LATCH system locations.
If necessary, press the height and it was being used during a
adjustment release button to crash, new LATCH system parts
further lower the head restraint. may be needed.
See Head Restraints on
page 32. New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
3. Try to move the head restraint system was not being used at
to make sure that it is locked in the time of the crash.
place.
Do not secure a child seat in a If more than one child restraint

position without a top tether anchor needs to be installed in the rear
if a national or local law requires seat, be sure to read Where to Put
that the top tether be anchored, or if the Restraint on page 353.
the instructions that come with the 1. Put the child restraint on
child restraint say that the top strap the seat.
must be anchored.
If the head restraint interferes
In Canada, the law requires that with the proper installation of
forward-facing child restraints have the child restraint, the head
a top tether, and that the tether be restraint may be removed.
attached. See Head Restraint Removal
If the child restraint does not have and Reinstallation under
the LATCH system, you will be Lower Anchors and Tethers for 3. Push the latch plate into the
using the safety belt to secure Children (LATCH System) on buckle until it clicks.
the child restraint in this position. page 355. Position the release button on
Be sure to follow the instructions 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the buckle so that the safety belt
that came with the child restraint. the lap and shoulder portions of could be quickly unbuckled if
Secure the child in the child restraint the vehicle's safety belt through necessary.
when and as the instructions say. or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 355 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of
the retractor to make sure
the retractor is locked.
If the retractor is not locked,
repeat Steps 4 and 5.
To remove the child restraint, Securing Child Restraints

unbuckle the vehicle safety
(Front Passenger Seat)
{ WARNING
belt and let it return to the
stowed position. If the top tether This vehicle has airbags. A rear A child in a rear-facing child
is attached to a top tether anchor, seat is a safer place to secure restraint can be seriously
disconnect it. If the head restraint a forward-facing child restraint. injured or killed if the right
was removed, reinstall it before See Where to Put the Restraint on front passenger airbag inflates.
the seating position is used. page 353. This is because the back of the
See Head Restraint Removal rear-facing child restraint would
In addition, the vehicle has a be very close to the inflating
and Reinstallation under Lower
passenger sensing system which
Anchors and Tethers for Children airbag. A child in a forward-facing
is designed to turn off the right
(LATCH System) on page 355 for child restraint can be seriously
front passenger frontal airbag under
additional information on installing injured or killed if the right front
certain conditions. See Passenger
the head restraint properly. passenger airbag inflates and the
Sensing System on page 339 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator passenger seat is in a forward
on page 517 for more information, position.
including important safety Even if the passenger sensing
information. system has turned off the right
A label on the sun visor says, front passenger frontal airbag,
Never put a rear-facing child seat no system is fail-safe. No one
in the front. This is because the risk can guarantee that an airbag will
to the rear-facing child is so great, not deploy under some unusual
if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
(Continued)
If the child restraint has the LATCH You will be using the lap-shoulder
WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and belt to secure the child restraint in
Tethers for Children (LATCH this position. Follow the instructions
Secure rear-facing child System) on page 355 for how and that came with the child restraint.
restraints in a rear seat, even if where to install the child restraint
the airbag is off. If you secure a 1. Move the seat as far back as
using LATCH. If a child restraint it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint in is secured using a safety belt and
the right front seat, always move forward-facing child restraint.
it uses a top tether, see Lower
the front passenger seat as far Anchors and Tethers for Children When the passenger sensing
back as it will go. It is better to (LATCH System) on page 355 system has turned off the right
secure the child restraint in a for top tether anchor locations. front passenger frontal airbag
rear seat. and seatmounted side impact
Do not secure a child seat in a airbag, the off indicator on
See Passenger Sensing System position without a top tether anchor the passenger airbag status
on page 339 for additional if a national or local law requires indicator should light and stay
information. that the top tether be anchored, or if lit when you start the vehicle.
the instructions that come with the See Passenger Airbag Status
child restraint say that the top strap Indicator on page 517.
If the vehicle does not have a must be anchored.
rear seat that will accommodate 2. Put the child restraint on
a rearfacing child restraint, a In Canada, the law requires that the seat.
rearfacing child restraint should forward-facing child restraints have
not be installed in the vehicle, a top tether, and that the tether be 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
even if the airbag is off. attached. the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle, so that the safety set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
belt could be quickly unbuckled not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
if necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked,
repeat Steps 5 and 6.
If the vehicle does not have If the airbags are off, the off
a rear seat and the child indicator in the passenger airbag
restraint has a top tether, follow status indicator will come on and
the child restraint manufacturer's stay on when the vehicle is started.
instructions regarding the use If a child restraint has been
of the top tether. See Lower installed and the on indicator is lit,
Anchors and Tethers for see If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Children (LATCH System) on Child Restraint under Passenger
page 355 for more information. Sensing System on page 339 for
7. Before placing a child in the more information.
child restraint, make sure it is To remove the child restraint,
securely held in place. To check, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
grasp the child restraint at the let it return to the stowed position.
safety belt path and attempt
to move it side to side and
back and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage the maximum cool air to enter the

glove box. Move the slide control
Compartments to allow cool air into the glove box.
After opening the air flow, close the
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box glove box door to keep the cold air
from entering the vehicle.
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Lift the glove box handle up to open
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 it. Use the key to lock and unlock
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 the glove box.
Cupholders
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Cargo Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
This vehicle has a cupholder

The glove box is air conditioned
equipped with a divider that can
and can be used to store items at a
be adjusted to accommodate large
lower temperature. The vehicle air
containers or small containers.
conditioning must be turned on for
4-2 Storage
For large containers, push the Armrest Storage There is an accessory power
button to move aside the divider outlet inside the center console.
and make the cupholder deeper. For vehicles with a rear seat See Power Outlets on page 58
For small containers, push down on armrest, pull the rear seat armrest for more information.
the top edge of the divider to lock it forward to access cupholders with
back in place to make the cupholder removable liners. For vehicles with
shorter. a rear storage area, pull the lever
to access.
Front Storage
Center Console Storage
The center console has an armrest,
upper storage tray, and a lower
storage area.
The armrest can be adjusted to
a rearward, middle, and forward
position. Slide the top of the armrest
to adjust to the desired position.
Push the button to open the storage
To access the storage, move the area located at the rear of the
armrest to the full rearward position center console.
to access the storage compartment
A storage area is located in front buttons.
of the shift lever. Push upward on
the top of the door and release; Push the driver side button to
the door automatically opens. access the upper storage tray.
Push the passenger side button
There is an accessory power outlet to access the lower storage area.
inside. See Power Outlets on
page 58.
Storage 4-3
Additional Storage Install the Cargo Cover

1. Hold the cartridge so that the
Features pullout shade faces the rear of
the vehicle.
Cargo Cover
For vehicles with the dual position
cargo cover, it can be used to cover
items in the cargo area of the
vehicle.
5. Insert the shade pins in the

channels (C) on both sides.
6. Slide the shade to the lower (B)
position, or the halfway open (A)
position.
2. Align the cartridge over the pins
on the trim panels of the vehicle.
3. Push down on the cartridge to
snap it into place.
The shade can be set in two 4. Unroll the shade toward the rear
positions. It can be set in a halfway of the vehicle.
open (A) position for loading objects
into the rear compartment, or the
lower (B) position to conceal objects
in the rear compartment.
4-4 Storage
Remove the Cargo Cover Cargo Management

1. Remove the cover from the
{ WARNING System
channels and carefully roll it An improperly stored cargo
back up. cover could be thrown about
the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. Someone
could be injured. If the cover is
removed, always store it in the
proper storage location. When it
is replaced, always be sure that
it is securely reattached.
Cargo Tie-Downs
For vehicles equipped with cargo
tiedowns, the four tie-downs are To open the cargo management
located in the rear compartment of system, press the handle to unlatch
2. Slide the button on the top to the vehicle. Use the tie-downs to and then lift up.
release the cartridge. secure small loads.
3. Pull up to remove the cartridge
from the pins.
Storage 4-5
There may be additional storage Rear Storage Area

compartments on each side of the
cargo management system. Lift the
panel up to open.
{ WARNING
An improperly latched and closed
cargo cover, or cargo cover left
in the open position, could be
thrown about the vehicle during
a crash or sudden maneuver.
Someone could be injured.
Be sure to return the cover to
the closed position and latch
A prop rod locks to hold the cover before driving. If the cover is
up when opened. removed, always store it outside
Four hooks are located on the of the vehicle. When it is
inside cover and can be used for replaced, always be sure that
storing items. it is securely reattached.
Press the red button on the prop rod
to close the cover.
To access the rear storage areas of
the cargo management system, and
the tire sealant and compressor kit:
1. Remove the cargo cover,
if equipped.
2. Open the cargo management
system cover.
4-6 Storage
U-Rail
3. Release the prop rod from the 4. Store the cargo management
inside cover by sliding the red system cover by hooking it onto
clip down. the weatherstrip. For vehicles with a u-rail system,
Unhook the prop rod from the the fence can be moved to different
pin on the inside cover. Store the positions on the u-rail track to
unhooked prop rod by folding it secure cargo.
into the cargo management
compartment.
Storage 4-7
3. Reinstall the fence and lock Installing the Fence

both latches (A) by turning to
align Q with the arrow on the
adapter (B).
Push both adapter buttons to move

the adapters (B) on the straight part
of the u-rail. Insert the fence into the adapters
and lock both latches (A) by turning
To move the fence around the u-rail,
to align Q with the arrow on the
disconnect one side:
Use the fence to secure items in adapter (B).
1. Unlock by turning the latch (A)
place.
to align K with the arrow on the
adapter (B). Removing the Fence
2. Push the adapter button to move Unlock by turning both latches (A)
the adapters (B) to the desired to align K with the arrow on the
position. adapter (B). Lift and remove the
fence.
4-8 Storage
Storing the Fence D-Ring Sliders

1. Lift the cargo management For vehicles with a D-ring system,
system cover. there are four D-ring sliders that
2. Release the cover from the prop move along rails. These can be
rod as described in the previous used as tie-downs when storing
steps. cargo.
The loop of the D-ring slider must

be facing inward toward the storage
area and the ring must be in the up
position for proper usage.
3. Insert the top of the fence into Insert the D-ring sliders (A) into the
the lower two clips (A). channel (B) located in the middle of
the rail. Push the button to move the
4. Turn the bottom of the fence up D-ring slider along the rail.
and insert it into the upper two
clips (B).
Storage 4-9
Cargo Net There are four openings in the

headliner: two located behind the
front seats and two behind the rear
{ WARNING seats.
Do not stack items higher than
the upper end of the cargo net
or hang anything from the net.
Avoid items that have sharp
edges or that apply excessive
force to the net. If items are not
properly stored, damage to the
net could occur and items can be
thrown about the vehicle. You or 3. Mount the cargo net to the rear
others could be injured. Always seat tethers located on the back
store items behind the net. of the folded down rear seats
and pull on the straps to tighten
the net.
For vehicles equipped with a cargo 1. Insert the top corners of the
net, it can be used to store light 4. When the net is installed in
cargo net into the large opening the headliner opening located
loads, keeping them from falling in the headliner and secure
over or being thrown into the cabin behind the rear seats, the rear
by sliding them into the small seatbacks should be upright.
during heavy braking. opening.
The net should not be overloaded or 2. The rear seatbacks should
used to store heavy loads. be folded down when the net
is installed in the headliner
opening located behind the
front seats.
4-10 Storage
3. Roll up the cargo net, storing it

into the attached vinyl bag.
4. Open the cargo management
system cover.
5. For vehicles with an inflator
kit, store the cargo net in the
available space next to the kit.
Convenience Net
This vehicle may have a
convenience net located in the rear
5. Mount the cargo net to the cargo 6. Pull on the straps to tighten of the vehicle. Attach it to the cargo
tie-downs located on the lower the net. tiedowns for storing small loads.
side panels. Do not use the net to store heavy
Cargo Net Storage
loads.
The cargo net can be removed from
the vehicle and stored in the cargo
management system.
1. Disconnect the net from the roof
openings and the tethers.
2. Press the red button on the
center of the net to fold it in half.
Storage 4-11
Roof Rack System Notice: Loading cargo on the

roof rack that weighs more than
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicles center
100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over the of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
{ WARNING rear or sides of the vehicle may sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
damage the vehicle. Load cargo braking, or abrupt maneuvers;
If something is carried on top of so that it rests evenly between otherwise it may result in loss of
the vehicle that is longer or wider the crossrails, making sure to control. If driving for a long distance,
than the roof rack like paneling, fasten cargo securely. on rough roads, or at high speeds,
plywood, or a mattress the occasionally stop the vehicle to
wind can catch it while the vehicle make sure the cargo remains in its
is being driven. The item being place. Do not exceed the maximum
carried could be violently torn off, vehicle capacity when loading the
and this could cause a collision vehicle. For more information on
and damage the vehicle. Never vehicle capacity and loading, see
carry something longer or wider Vehicle Load Limits on page 912.
than the roof rack on top of the
vehicle unless using a GM
certified accessory carrier.
For vehicles with a roof rack, the

rack can be used to load items.
For roof racks that do not have To prevent damage or loss of cargo
crossrails included, GM Certified when driving, check to make sure
crossrails can be purchased as crossrails and cargo are securely
an accessory. See your dealer
for additional information.
4-12 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Fuel Economy Gauge

(3.0L Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Controls Turbo Gauge (2.8L Only) . . . . 5-14
Engine Coolant Temperature
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . .
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .
5-28
5-29
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Controls Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17 Information Displays
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Driver Information
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-18 Vehicle Messages
Rear Window Wiper/ Malfunction Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Battery Voltage and Charging
Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Brake System Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-34
Clock (Analog Clock) . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Electric Parking Brake Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Clock (Digital Clock) . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-35
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Engine Cooling System
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-24 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-37
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Control System Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-37
Indicators (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . 5-25 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-38
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-38
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-26 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Object Detection System
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-27 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Ride Control System
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-40 Controls Steering Wheel Controls

Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-40
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Steering Wheel
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-40 Adjustment
Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-41
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-42
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-42
Universal Remote System Use these controls, if equipped,
Universal Remote System . . . 5-48 to make audio adjustments at the
To adjust the steering wheel: steering wheel.
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48 1. Pull the lever down. yz: Press y to select the next
Universal Remote System 2. Move the steering wheel up favorite radio station or next CD,
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 or down. DVD, if equipped, or MP3 track.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel Press z to select the previous
closer or away from you. favorite radio station or previous
4. Pull the lever up to lock the CD, DVD, if equipped, or MP3 track.
steering wheel in place.
+ x (Volume): Press + to
Do not adjust the steering wheel increase the volume; press to
while driving. decrease the volume.
b g (Push to Talk): For vehicles Windshield Wiper/Washer

with an OnStar, Bluetooth,
or navigation system, press
to interact with those systems.
See Bluetooth (Overview) on
page 750 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls) on ( (Off): Use to turn the wipers off.
page 752 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 756, the
8 (Mist): For a single wipe,
The windshield wiper/washer briefly move the wiper lever down.
OnStar Owner's guide, or the
lever is located on the right side For several wipes, hold the wiper
separate navigation manual
of the steering column. With the lever down.
ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY Clear snow and ice from the wiper
0 c (End Call/Mute): Press or ON/RUN/START, move the blades before using them. If frozen
to silence the vehicle speakers windshield wiper lever to select to the windshield, carefully loosen
only. Press again to turn the the wiper speed. or thaw them. Damaged blades
sound on. For vehicles with OnStar
2: Use for fast wipes. should be replaced. See Wiper
or Bluetooth systems, press to
Blade Replacement on page 1033.
reject an incoming call, or end 1: Use for slow wipes.
a current call. Heavy snow or ice can overload the
G (Adjustable Interval Wipes): wiper motor.
SRCE: Press to select an audio Turn the 3 band up for more
source. frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes. If the vehicle
Horn has Rainsense, see following
Press near the horn symbols or Rainsense information.
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Wipe Parking Rainsense Turn the band up for more

If the ignition is turned to sensitivity to moisture.
For vehicles with Rainsense,
LOCK/OFF while the wipers a sensor located near the top Turn the band down for less
are on 1, 2, or G, they will center of the windshield detects sensitivity to moisture.
immediately stop. the amount of water on the To deactivate Rainsense, move
windshield and automatically the windshield wiper lever out
If the windshield wiper lever is then controls the frequency of the
moved to OFF before the driver windshield wiper. of G position.
door is opened or within 10 minutes,
the wipers will restart and move to Keep this area of the windshield Wiper Arm Assembly Protection
the base of the windshield. clear of debris to allow for best When using an automatic car wash,
system performance. move the windshield wiper lever to
If the ignition is turned to
LOCK/OFF while the wipers the off position. This disables the
are performing wipes due to automatic Rainsense windshield
windshield washing, the wipers wipers and/or rear wiper.
continue to run until they reach With Rainsense, if the transmission
the base of the windshield. is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle
speed is very slow, the wipers will
automatically stop at the base of
the windshield.
G (Rainsense Wipe Sensitivity
Control): Move the windshield The wiper operations return to
normal when the transmission is
wiper lever to G. Turn the 3
no longer in N (Neutral) or the
band on the wiper lever to adjust vehicle speed has increased.
the sensitivity.
Windshield Washer Rear Window The system turns off when the
button is returned to the middle
Pull the lever toward you to spray Wiper/Washer position.
washer fluid on the windshield.
The rear wiper controls are on the Z (Rear Wiper): Use for
The spray continues until the lever
end of the windshield wiper lever. continuous rear window wipes.
is released. The wipers will run a
few times. See Washer Fluid on 5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Use to set
page 1026 for information on a delay between wipes.
filling the windshield washer fluid
reservoir. = (Rear Washer): Push the
windshield wiper lever forward
to spray washer fluid on the rear
{ WARNING window. The lever automatically
In freezing weather, do not use returns to its original position when
the washer until the windshield released.
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Press the upper or lower portion of

the button to control the rear wiper
and rear wiper delay.
Reverse Gear Wipes Pull the wiper lever toward

If the rear wiper control is off,
{ WARNING you and hold briefly to activate.
the rear wiper will automatically The headlamp washers will spray
In freezing weather, do not use once, pause, and spray again.
operate continuously when the the washer until the windshield
shift lever is in R (Reverse), and the The headlamp washer will spray
is warmed. Otherwise the again after five windshield wash
front windshield wiper is performing washer fluid can form ice on the
low or high speed wipes. If the rear cycles.
windshield, blocking your vision.
wiper control is off, the shift lever See Washer Fluid on page 1026 for
is in R (Reverse) and the front information on filling the windshield
windshield wiper is performing Headlamp Washer washer fluid.
interval wipes, then the rear wiper
For vehicles with headlamp
automatically performs interval
wipes. washers, they are located to { WARNING
the side of the headlamps.
The windshield washer reservoir In freezing weather, do not use
is used for the windshield and the The headlamps must be on in the washer until the windshield
rear window. Check the fluid level order to use the headlamp washers. is warmed. Otherwise the
in the reservoir if either washer is If the headlamps are not on, only washer fluid can form ice on the
not working. See Washer Fluid on the windshield will be washed. windshield, blocking your vision.
page 1026.
Compass again. See Compass Messages on Clock (Digital Clock)

page 535 for more information
The vehicle may have a compass on the messages that may be The infotainment system controls
display on the Driver Information displayed for the compass. are used to access the time and
Center (DIC). The compass receives date settings through the menu
its heading and other information Clock (Analog Clock) system. See Operation on page 77
from the Global Positioning for information about how to use
System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak, The analog clock is located on the the menu system. See the separate
and vehicle speed information. instrument panel above the radio. navigation manual for instructions
The clock is not connected with any on how to operate the digital clock
Avoid covering the GPS antenna
other vehicle system and runs by for the navigation system.
for long periods of time with objects
itself. To adjust the clock:
that may interfere with the antenna's To turn the digital clock on or off:
ability to receive a satellite signal. 1. Locate the adjustment buttons
1. Press the CONFIG button.
See Multi-Band Antenna on directly below the clock face.
page 719 for the location of the 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
2. Push and hold either adjustment
vehicle's antenna. The compass button to advance or reverse the 3. Select Clock Displayed.
system is designed to operate clock hands. Holding the buttons
for a certain number of miles or 4. Press MENU/SELECT to turn
down will cause the clock to the clock on or off.
degrees of turn before needing advance faster. Release the
a signal from the GPS satellites. buttons before reaching the
When the compass display shows desired time.
CAL, drive the vehicle for a short
distance in an open area where 3. Push and release the buttons to
it can receive a GPS signal. The increase the time by one minute
compass system will automatically increments until the desired time
determine when a GPS signal is is reached.
restored and provide a heading
Setting the Time and Date Setting the Month & Day Power Outlets
1. Press the CONFIG button. Format
The accessory power outlets can be
2. Select Time and Date Settings. 1. Press the CONFIG button. used to plug in electrical equipment,
2. Select Time and Date Settings. such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
3. Select Set Time or Set Date.
3. Highlight Month & Day Format. The vehicle has four accessory
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to power outlets. The power outlets
adjust the highlighted value. 4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob located below the climate control
5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to select MM/DD (month/day) or system inside the front storage
to select the next value. DD/MM (day/month). bin, inside the center floor console,
Setting the Auto Time Adjust and on the rear of the center floor
6. To save the time or date and
console are powered while the
return to the Time and Date 1. Press the CONFIG button. vehicle is in ON/RUN/START or
Settings menu, press the BACK
2. Select Time and Date Settings. ACC/ACCESSORY mode, or until
button at any time or press the
the driver door is opened within
MENU/SELECT knob after 3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust. 10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
adjusting the minutes or year.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format to turn Auto Time Adjust on
or off.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
to select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.
The power outlet located in the rear Certain accessory power plugs Cigarette Lighter
cargo area is powered at all times. may not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could There may be a cigarette lighter
There is a small cap that must be located under the climate control
removed to access the accessory overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see system, inside the front storage bin.
power outlet. When not using the
outlet be sure to cover it with the your dealer. To activate the cigarette lighter,
protective cap. When adding electrical equipment, push it into the heating element and
be sure to follow the proper let go. The lighter pops out when it
Notice: Leaving electrical is ready to be used.
equipment plugged in for an installation instructions included
extended period of time while with the equipment. See Add-On Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
the vehicle is off will drain the Electrical Equipment on page 962. in while it is heating does not let
battery. Power is always supplied Notice: Hanging heavy the lighter back away from the
to the rear cargo outlet. Always equipment from the power heating element when it is hot.
unplug electrical equipment when outlet can cause damage not Damage from overheating can
not in use and do not plug in covered by the vehicle warranty. occur to the lighter or heating
equipment that exceeds the The power outlets are designed element, or a fuse could be
maximum 20 ampere rating. for accessory power plugs only, blown. Do not hold a cigarette
such as cell phone charge cords. lighter in while it is heating.
Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
There may be an ashtray located Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
under the climate control system lights work together to indicate a
on the instrument panel. Press the Indicators problem with the vehicle.
door to release the ashtray. Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
To empty the ashtray, remove it signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
from the instrument panel by holding before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
the edges and pulling straight out. to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
To reinstall, push the tray back into replacement. Paying attention to check the section that explains what
place. the warning lights and gauges to do. Follow this manual's advice.
could prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
There may also be ashtrays located
on the center floor console behind Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
the shift lever and in the rear doors. could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
Notice: If papers, pins, or other on briefly when the engine is started
flammable items are put in the to indicate they are working.
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar

Speedometer Tachometer Fuel Gauge

The speedometer shows the The tachometer displays the
vehicle's speed in either kilometers engine speed in revolutions per
per hour (km/h) or miles per minute (rpm).
hour (mph). Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
Odometer warning area, the vehicle could
The odometer shows how far the be damaged, and the damages
vehicle has been driven, in either would not be covered by the
kilometers or miles. vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant in the shaded warning area.
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new odometer installed, the new Metric
one is set to the mileage of the old
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver door to show the old mileage
reading.
Here are four things that some Fuel Economy Gauge

owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
(3.0L Only)
. At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
. It takes a little more or less
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
English
half the tank's capacity to fill
When the ignition is on, the fuel the tank.
gauge indicates about how much . The gauge moves a little while Metric
fuel is left in the tank.
turning a corner or speeding up.
An arrow on the fuel gauge . The gauge takes a few seconds
indicates the side of the vehicle
to stabilize after the ignition is
the fuel door is on.
turned on, and goes back to
When the indicator nears empty, empty when the ignition is
the low fuel light comes on. There turned off.
still is a little fuel left, but the vehicle
should be refueled soon.
Turbo Gauge (2.8L Only) As the accelerator peddle is

pressed the needle may move
to the right. This is normal and
means that the vehicle is using
turbo power. Under normal
conditions the needle will not
display a reading in the red.
Once the driver eases off
the accelerator pedal or the
transmission shifts, the needle
moves back into the left area
of the gauge.
English
The gauge shows the fuel usage
that the vehicle is currently For vehicles with a turbo gauge, it
achieving in MPG and in liters indicates when the vehicle is using
per 100 kilometers (/100 km). turbo power.
MIN/20: Is when the least efficient When the needle is at rest at the
fuel economy usually occurs during left of the gauge, turbo is not
acceleration or when idling. being used.
MAX//100: Is when the best fuel
economy is being achieved.
This gauge moves often as it is an
instantaneous calculation based on
current driving conditions.
Engine Coolant Safety Belt Reminders

Temperature Gauge Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
English
This gauge measures the
temperature of the vehicle's engine. When the vehicle is started this light
Metric
If the indicator needle moves into flashes and a chime comes on to
the shaded area, the engine is remind drivers to fasten their safety
too hot. belt. Then the light stays on solid
until the belt is buckled.
While driving under normal
operating conditions, if the needle This cycle may continue several
moves into the shaded area, the times if the driver remains or
engine is too hot. Pull off the road, becomes unbuckled during driving
stop the vehicle and turn off the while the vehicle is moving.
engine as soon as possible. If the driver safety belt is already
buckled, neither the light nor chime
comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt If the Vehicle Information is
Reminder Light warning light and chime may turn selected, a full page screen displays
on if an object is put on the seat at start-up the three safety belt
such as a briefcase, handbag, symbols.
grocery bag, laptop, or other Once the passenger safety belt is
electronic device. To turn off the buckled, the corresponding safety
warning light and/or chime, remove belt symbol in the DIC turns green.
the object from the seat or buckle There are no seat position sensors
the safety belt. in the seat, nor safety belt reminder
When the vehicle is started this light Second Row Passenger Belt sensor pad. If a safety belt is
flashes and a chime may come on Reminder Light not initially buckled, the cluster
to remind the front passenger to continues to show the gray safety
fasten their safety belt. Then the belt icon.
light stays on solid until the belt While the vehicle is moving, if a
is buckled. second row passenger who was
This cycle may continue several previously buckled becomes
times if the passenger remains unbuckled, a full screen warning
or becomes unbuckled while the displays with the corresponding
vehicle is moving. When the engine is started and the safety belt indicator flashing red.
Trip/Fuel display is chosen, three A chime may sound.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor gray safety belt symbols come on Acknowledge warning messages by
the light comes on. and stay on for several seconds pressing any of the DIC buttons.
on the top of the Driver information
Center (DIC) to remind passengers
to fasten their safety belts.
Airbag Readiness Light

{ WARNING
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system If the airbag readiness light stays
check includes the airbag sensor, on after the vehicle is started or
the pretensioners, the airbag comes on while driving, it means
modules, the wiring, and the crash the airbag system might not be
sensing and diagnostic module. working properly. The airbags in United States
For more information on the airbag the vehicle might not inflate in a
system, see Airbag System on crash, or they could even inflate
page 330. without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Canada and Mexico

Passenger Airbag Status
When the vehicle is started, the
Indicator passenger airbag status indicator
The vehicle has a passenger will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
The airbag readiness light comes
sensing system. See Passenger for on and off, for several seconds
on and stays on for several seconds
Sensing System on page 339 as a system check. If you are using
when the vehicle is started.
for important safety information. remote start, if equipped, to start
Then the light goes out.
The overhead console has a the vehicle from a distance you
passenger airbag status indicator. may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, If, after several seconds, both Charging System Light
the status indicator will light either status indicator lights remain on,
ON or OFF, or either the on or off or if there are no lights at all, there
symbol to let you know the status of may be a problem with the lights
the right front passenger frontal and or the passenger sensing system.
seatmounted side impact airbag. See your dealer for service.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status { WARNING
indicator, it means that the right The charging system light comes
front passenger frontal airbag and If the airbag readiness light ever
on briefly when the ignition is turned
seatmounted side impact airbag comes on and stays on, it means
on, but the engine is not running, as
are enabled (may inflate). that something may be wrong
a check to show the light is working.
with the airbag system. To help The light turns off when the engine
If the word OFF or the off symbol
avoid injury to yourself or others, is started. If it does not, have the
is lit on the passenger airbag
have the vehicle serviced right vehicle serviced by your dealer.
status indicator, it means that the
away. See Airbag Readiness
passenger sensing system has If the light stays on, or comes
turned off the right front passenger Light on page 517 for more
information, including important on while driving, there may be a
frontal and seatmounted side problem with the electrical charging
impact airbag. safety information.
system. Have it checked by your
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
When this light comes on, the Notice: If the vehicle is

Driver Information Center (DIC) continually driven with this
also displays a message. light on the emission controls
See Battery Voltage and Charging might not work as well, the
Messages on page 534. vehicle fuel economy might not
be as good, and the engine might
If a short distance must be driven not run as smoothly. This could
This light should come on when the
with the light on, be sure to turn off lead to costly repairs that might
ignition is on, but the engine is not
all accessories, such as the radio not be covered by the vehicle
running, as a check to show it is
and air conditioner. warranty.
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer. Notice: Modifications made
Malfunction to the engine, transmission,
If the malfunction indicator lamp
Indicator Lamp comes on and stays on while the exhaust, intake, or fuel system
A computer system called OBD II engine is running, this indicates of the vehicle or the replacement
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second that there is an OBD II problem of the original tires with other
Generation) monitors operation and service is required. than those of the same Tire
of the fuel, ignition, and emission Performance Criteria (TPC) can
Malfunctions often are indicated by affect the vehicle's emission
control systems. It ensures that the system before any problem is
emissions are at acceptable levels controls and can cause this
apparent. Being aware of the light light to come on. Modifications
for the life of the vehicle, helping can prevent more serious damage
to produce a cleaner environment. to these systems could lead
to the vehicle. This system assists to costly repairs not covered
the service technician in correctly by the vehicle warranty.
diagnosing any malfunction. This could also result in a
failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance
test. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 103.
This light comes on during a Light On Steady: An emission

. Make sure the electrical system
malfunction in one of two ways: control system malfunction has is not wet. The system could
been detected on the vehicle. be wet if the vehicle was driven
Light Flashing: A misfire condition through a deep puddle of
has been detected. A misfire Diagnosis and service might
be required. water. The condition is usually
increases vehicle emissions and corrected when the electrical
could damage the emission control The following may correct an system dries out. A few driving
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis emissions system malfunction: trips should turn the light off.
and service might be required. . Make sure the fuel cap is . Make sure to fuel the vehicle
To prevent more serious damage to fully installed. See Filling with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
the vehicle: the Tank on page 952. causes the engine not to run as
. Reduce vehicle speed. The diagnostic system can efficiently as designed and can
determine if the fuel cap has cause: stalling after start-up,
. Avoid hard accelerations. been left off or improperly stalling when the vehicle is
. Avoid steep uphill grades. installed. A loose or missing changed into gear, misfiring,
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate hesitation on acceleration,
. If towing a trailer, reduce the into the atmosphere. A few
amount of cargo being hauled or stumbling on acceleration.
driving trips with the cap These conditions might go away
as soon as it is possible. properly installed should once the engine is warmed up.
If the light continues to flash, turn the light off.
when it is safe to do so, stop the If one or more of these conditions
vehicle. Find a safe place to park occurs, change the fuel brand used.
the vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, It will require at least one full tank of
wait at least 10 seconds, and the proper fuel to turn the light off.
restart the engine. If the light is See Recommended Fuel on
still flashing, follow the previous page 948.
steps and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
If none of the above have made

. The critical emission control
the light turn off, your dealer can systems have not been
check the vehicle. The dealer completely diagnosed by
has the proper test equipment the system. This can happen
and diagnostic tools to fix any if the battery has recently
mechanical or electrical problems been replaced or if the battery
that might have developed. has run down. The diagnostic
The DLC is under the instrument system evaluates critical
Emissions Inspection and panel to the left of the steering emission control systems during
Maintenance Programs wheel. See your dealer if assistance normal driving. This can take
is needed. several days of routine driving.
Some state/provincial and
local governments may have The vehicle may not pass If this has been done and the
programs to inspect the on-vehicle inspection if: vehicle still does not pass the
emission control equipment. inspection, your dealer can
. The malfunction indicator lamp is prepare the vehicle for
For the inspection, the emission on with the engine running, or if
system test equipment is connected inspection.
the light does not come on when
to the vehicles Data Link the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
Connector (DLC). while the engine is off.
Brake System Warning Electric Parking Brake

Light
{ WARNING Light
The vehicle brake system The brake system might not be
consists of two hydraulic circuits. working properly if the brake
If one circuit is not working, the system warning light is on.
remaining circuit can still work Driving with the brake system
to stop the vehicle. For normal warning light on can lead to a
braking performance, both circuits crash. If the light is still on after
need to be working. the vehicle has been pulled off Metric English
the road and carefully stopped,
If the warning light comes on, there For vehicles with the Electric
have the vehicle towed for
is a brake problem. Have the brake Parking Brake (EPB), this light
system inspected right away. service.
should come on briefly as the
engine is started. If it does not
If the light comes on while come on, have the vehicle serviced
driving, a chime sounds. Pull by your dealer.
off the road and stop. The pedal The parking brake status light
might be harder to push or go closer comes on when the brake is
to the floor. It might also take longer applied. If the light continues
Metric English to stop. If the light is still on, have flashing after the parking brake
the vehicle towed for service. See is released, or while driving,
The brake indicator light should Towing the Vehicle on page 10101.
come on briefly as the engine is there is a problem with the
started. If it does not come on have Electric Parking Brake system.
the vehicle serviced by your dealer. A SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
message may also display in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Brake System Messages on
If the light does not come on, Antilock Brake System Start the engine again to reset the
or remains flashing, see your dealer. system. If the light stays on after
(ABS) Warning Light driving at a speed above 20 km/h
(13 mph), see your dealer for
service. A chime may also sound
when the light comes on steady.
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
For vehicles with the EPB, the If the regular brake system warning
brake warning light should come on For vehicles with the Antilock Brake light is also on, the vehicle does not
briefly when the engine is started. System (ABS), this light comes on have antilock brakes and there is
If it does not come on, have the briefly when the engine is started. a problem with the regular brakes.
vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the light does not come on, have See Brake System Warning Light on
If this light comes on, there is a it fixed so it will be ready to warn if page 522.
problem with a system on the there is a problem. See Brake System Messages on
vehicle that is causing the parking If the ABS light comes on and stays page 534 for all brakerelated DIC
brake system to work at a reduced on while driving, stop as soon as messages.
level. The vehicle can still be driven, possible and turn the ignition off.
but should be taken to a dealer as
soon as possible. See Parking
Brake on page 931 for more
information.
Traction Off Light The traction off light comes on when StabiliTrak OFF Light
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and
releasing the traction control button.
This light and the StabiliTrak Off
light come on when StabiliTrak is
turned off.
If the Traction Control System (TCS)
This light comes on briefly while is off, wheelspin is not limited. This light comes on when the
starting the engine. If it does not, Adjust driving accordingly. StabiliTrak system is turned off by
have the vehicle serviced by your pressing the StabiliTrak/TCS button.
dealer. If the system is working See Traction Control System (TCS) If the Traction Control System (TCS)
normally, the indicator light then on page 934 and StabiliTrak is off, wheel spin is not limited.
turns off. System on page 936 for more
information. When the StabiliTrak system is
off, the system does not assist
in controlling the vehicle. Adjust
driving accordingly.
The warning light goes off when
traction control and the StabiliTrak
system are enabled.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 934 and StabiliTrak
System on page 936 for more
information
Traction Control System If the light is on and not flashing, the Tire Pressure Light
TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak
(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light system have been disabled. A DIC
message may display. Check the
DIC messages to determine which
feature(s) is no longer functioning
and whether the vehicle requires
service.
If the indicator/warning light is on For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
and flashing, the TCS and/or the Monitor System (TPMS), this light
The StabiliTrak system or the StabiliTrak system is actively
Traction Control System (TCS) comes on briefly when the engine
working. is started. It provides information
indicator/warning light come on
briefly when the engine is started. See StabiliTrak System on about tire pressures and the TPMS.
page 936 and Traction Control
If the light does not come on, have System (TCS) on page 934 for
the vehicle serviced by the dealer. more information.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
When the Light is On Steady Engine Oil Pressure Light

This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
underinflated.
{ WARNING
A tire pressure message can Do not keep driving if the oil
accompany the light. See Tire pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire. The oil pressure light should come
Messages on page 541 for more
Someone could be burned. Check on briefly as the engine is started.
information. Stop as soon as
the oil as soon as possible and If it does not come on have the
possible, and inflate the tires to
have the vehicle serviced. vehicle serviced by your dealer.
the pressure value shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. If the light comes on and stays on,
See Tire Pressure on page 1063 Notice: Lack of proper engine it means that oil is not flowing
for more information. oil maintenance can damage the through the engine properly.
engine. The repairs would not be The vehicle could be low on oil
When the Light Flashes First and and might have some other system
Then is On Steady covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance problem. See your dealer.
This indicates that there may be a schedule for changing engine oil.
problem with the TPMS. The light
flashes for about a minute and
stays on steady for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 1067 for
more information.
Fuel Economy Light Low Fuel Warning Light Security Light
For vehicles with the fuel economy This light is located near the fuel This light flashes when the security
mode light, it comes on when the gauge and comes on briefly when system is activated.
eco (economy) switch, located the ignition is turned on as a check For more information, see Vehicle
next to the shift lever, is pressed. to show it is working. Security on page 218.
Press the switch again to turn off It also comes on when the fuel tank
the light and exit the fuel saver is low on fuel. The light turns off
mode. See Driving for Better Fuel when fuel is added. If it does not,
Economy on page 126 for more have the vehicle serviced.
information.
High-Beam On Light Adaptive Forward Front Fog Lamp Light

Lighting (AFL) Light
This light comes on when the The fog lamp light comes on when
high-beam headlamps are in use. This light comes on solid when the fog lamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam there is a problem with the The light goes out when the fog
Changer on page 62 for more Adaptive Forward Lighting system lamps are turned off. See Front
information. and flashes when the system is Fog Lamps on page 66 for more
switching between lighting modes. information.
See Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) on page 63 for more
information.
Lamps On Reminder Cruise Control Light Information Displays

Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC displays information about
the vehicle. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is
For vehicles with the lamps on The cruise control light is white detected. See Vehicle Messages on
reminder light, it comes on when whenever the cruise control is set, page 534 for more information.
the lights are in use. and turns green when the cruise All messages appear in the DIC
control is active. display located in the center of the
instrument panel cluster.
The light turns off when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise The vehicle may also have features
Control on page 938 for more that can be customized through the
information. controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 542 for
more information.
The DIC may display an indicator
when the Rainsense wipers are
active.
DIC Operation and Displays DIC Buttons Trip/Fuel Information Menu

The DIC has different displays Items
which can be accessed by using Press the MENU button on the
the DIC buttons on the turn signal turn signal lever until Trip/Fuel
lever located on the left side of the Information Menu is displayed.
steering wheel. The DIC displays Use the thumbwheel to scroll
trip, fuel, vehicle system information, through the following menu items:
and warning messages if a system . Trip
problem is detected.
A. SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Use this . Average Fuel Economy or
The bottom of the DIC display button to set or clear the menu Average Fuel Economy and
shows what position the shift item when it is displayed. Instantaneous Fuel Economy
lever is in and the odometer.
The direction the vehicle is driving B. w x (Thumbwheel): Use . Fuel Range
will be shown on the top of the the thumbwheel to scroll . Fuel Used
display. through the items in each menu.
A small marker will move up or
. Average Vehicle Speed
down the side of the display as . Timer
you scroll through the items. . Navigation Turn by Turn
This shows where each item
is in the menu. . Speed and Curve Assist
C. MENU: Press this button to . Digital Speedometer
get to the Trip/Fuel Information . Blank
Menu and the Vehicle
Information Menu.
Trip The Instantaneous Fuel Economy Fuel Used

The Trip display shows the display shows the current fuel The Fuel Used display shows
current distance traveled, in either economy in either liters per the approximate liters (L) or
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles gallons (gal) of fuel that have
the trip odometer was last reset. per gallon (mpg). This number been used since last reset.
The trip odometer can be reset to reflects only the fuel economy The fuel used can be reset by
zero by pressing the trip reset stem that the vehicle has right now pressing the SET/CLR button
or the SET/CLR button while the and changes frequently as driving while the Fuel Used display is
trip odometer display is showing. conditions change. Unlike average showing.
economy, this display cannot be
Average Fuel Economy or reset. Average Vehicle Speed
Average Fuel Economy and The Average Vehicle Speed
Instantaneous Fuel Economy Fuel Range
display shows the average speed
The Average Fuel Economy display The Fuel Range display shows the of the vehicle in kilometers per
shows the approximate average approximate distance the vehicle hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) can be driven without refueling. This average is calculated based on
or miles per gallon (mpg). The fuel range estimate is based the various vehicle speeds recorded
This number is calculated based on an average of the vehicle's fuel since the last reset of this value.
on the number of L/100 km (mpg) economy over recent driving history The average speed can be reset by
recorded since the last time this and the amount of fuel remaining in pressing the SET/CLR button while
menu item was reset. The Average the fuel tank. Fuel range cannot be the Average Vehicle Speed display
Fuel Economy can be reset by reset. is showing.
pressing SET/CLR while the
Average Fuel Economy display
is showing.
Timer Speed and Curve Assist Vehicle Information Menu

This display can be used as This display will show the speed Items
a timer. To start the timer, press limit or the advised speed as Press the MENU button on the
SET/CLR while Timer is displayed. determined by the information turn signal lever until Vehicle
The display will show the amount provided by the navigation system. Information Menu is displayed.
of time that has passed since the The map database loaded in the Use the thumbwheel to scroll
timer was last reset. To stop the navigation system may need to through the following menu items:
timer, press SET/CLR briefly while be updated periodically to display
Elapsed Time is displayed. To reset accurate information. See Maps
. Tire Pressure
the timer to zero, press and hold in the navigation manual for . Remaining Oil Life
SET/CLR. information on updating the map . Battery Voltage
database.
Turn-by-Turn . Unit
This display is used for the OnStar Digital Speedometer
. Blank
or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn The speedometer shows how
guidance. See the OnStar Owner's fast the vehicle is moving in either Tire Pressure
Guide or the navigation manual, kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles The display will show a vehicle
if the vehicle has navigation, for per hour (mph). The speedometer with the approximate pressures
more information. cannot be reset. of all four tires. Tire pressure is
Blank Display displayed in either kilopascal (kPa)
or in pounds per square inch (psi).
This display shows no information. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 1065 and Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 1067
Remaining Oil Life been changed. It cannot be reset Unit

This display shows an estimate accurately until the next oil change. Move the thumbwheel up or
of the oil's remaining useful life. To reset the engine oil life system, down to switch between metric
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is press the SET/CLR button while or English when the Unit display
displayed, that means 99% of the the Oil Life display is active. is active. Press SET/CLR to
current oil life remains. See Engine Oil Life System on confirm the setting. This will
page 1014. change the displays on the
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Battery Voltage cluster and DIC to either metric
message will appear on the display. or English measurements.
This display, available on some
See Engine Oil Messages on vehicles, shows the current battery Blank Display
page 537. The oil should be voltage. If the voltage is in the
changed as soon as possible. This display shows no information.
normal range, the value will display.
See Engine Oil on page 1010. For example, the display may read Compass
In addition to the engine oil life BATTERY VOLTAGE 15.0 VOLTS.
system monitoring the oil life, The vehicle may have a compass
The vehicle's charging system
additional maintenance is display in the Driver Information
regulates voltage based on the
recommended in the Maintenance Center (DIC). See Compass on
state of the battery. The battery
Schedule in this manual. page 57.
voltage can fluctuate while viewing
See Scheduled Maintenance on this information on the DIC.
page 112 for more information. This is normal. See Charging
Remember, the Oil Life display System Light on page 518 for more
must be reset after each oil change. information. If there is a problem
It will not reset itself. Also, be with the battery charging system,
careful not to reset the Oil Life the DIC will display a message.
display accidentally at any time See Battery Voltage and Charging
other than when the oil has just Messages on page 534.
Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and SERVICE BATTERY

Charging Messages CHARGING SYSTEM
Messages displayed on the DIC
indicate the status of the vehicle This message is displayed when
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE there is a fault in the battery
or some action that may be needed
to correct a condition. Multiple This message displays when charging system. Take the vehicle
messages may display one after the vehicle has detected that the to your dealer for service.
the other. battery voltage is dropping beyond
The messages that do not
a reasonable point. The battery Brake System Messages
saver system starts reducing certain
require immediate action can features of the vehicle that you may BRAKE FLUID LOW
be acknowledged and cleared be able to notice. At the point that
by pressing SET/CLR. The This message is displayed when the
features are disabled, this message brake fluid level is low. See Brake
messages that require immediate is displayed. It means that the
action cannot be cleared until that Fluid on page 1028.
vehicle is trying to save the charge
action is performed. All messages in the battery. Turn off unnecessary BRAKES OVERHEATED
should be taken seriously and accessories to allow the battery to
clearing the messages does This message is displayed when the
recharge. brakes are becoming overheated.
not correct the problem.
LOW BATTERY You may see this when driving on
hills. Shift to a lower gear.
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 1030 for more information.
STEP ON BRAKE TO SERVICE PARKING BRAKE Cruise Control Messages

RELEASE PARK BRAKE This message is displayed when APPLY BRAKE BEFORE
This message is displayed if you there is a problem with the parking
brake. Take the vehicle to your
CRUISE
attempt to release the electric
parking brake without the brake dealer for service. If this message displays when
pedal applied. See Parking Brake attempting to activate cruise control,
on page 931 for more information. Compass Messages apply the brake pedal and try again.
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE CAL CRUISE SET TO XXX
This message is displayed if the This message is displayed when This message displays when the
electric parking brake is on while the compass needs to be calibrated. cruise control is set and shows the
the vehicle is in motion. Release See Compass on page 57. speed it was set to. See Cruise
it before you attempt to drive. Control on page 938 for more
See Parking Brake on page 931 information.
for more information. Three dashes will be displayed if the
compass needs service. See your Door Ajar Messages
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
dealer for service.
This message may be displayed DOOR OPEN
when there is a problem with A door open symbol will be
the brake boost assist system. displayed on the DIC showing
When this message is displayed, which door is open. If the vehicle
the brake boost assist motor has been shifted out of P (Park),
might be heard operating and you a DOOR OPEN message will also
might notice pulsation in the brake be displayed. Close the door
pedal. This is normal under these completely.
conditions. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
HOOD OPEN Engine Cooling System COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADD

This message will display along with Messages COOLANT
a hood open symbol when the hood This message will display if the
is open. Close the hood completely. A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH coolant is low. See Engine Coolant
ENGINE TEMP on page 1020.
POWER LIFTGATE
UNAVAILABLE This message displays when ENGINE OVERHEATED
the engine coolant becomes
This message will display if the hotter than the normal operating IDLE ENGINE
power liftgate encounters multiple temperature. To avoid added This message displays when the
obstacles on the same power cycle. strain on a hot engine, the engine coolant temperature is too
After removing the obstructions, the air conditioning compressor hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
liftgate will resume normal power automatically turns off. When idle until it cools down.
operation. the coolant temperature returns
to normal, the air conditioning ENGINE OVERHEATED
REAR ACCESS OPEN compressor turns back on. STOP ENGINE
This message will display along with You can continue to drive This message displays and a
a symbol when the liftgate is open. the vehicle. continuous chime sounds if the
Close the liftgate completely. If this message continues to appear, engine cooling system reaches
have the system repaired by your unsafe temperatures for operation.
dealer as soon as possible to avoid Stop and turn off the vehicle as
damage to the engine. soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
HIGH COOLANT ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE Engine Power Messages

TEMPERATURE ENGINE
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays if the coolant This message displays when the
temperature is hot. See Engine engine oil temperature is too hot. This message displays when the
Overheating on page 1024. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle vehicle's engine power is reduced.
until it cools down. Reduced engine power can affect
Engine Oil Messages the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL If this message is on, but there
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the is no reduction in performance,
engine oil level is too low. Check proceed to your destination.
This message displays when the
the oil level. See Engine Oil on The performance may be reduced
engine oil needs to be changed.
page 1010. the next time the vehicle is driven.
When you change the engine oil,
The vehicle may be driven at a
be sure to reset the Oil Life System. OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP reduced speed while this message
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 1014 and Driver Information
ENGINE is on, but maximum acceleration
and speed may be reduced.
Center (DIC) on page 529 for This message displays if low oil
Anytime this message stays on,
information on how to reset the pressure levels occur. Stop the
the vehicle should be taken to
system. See Engine Oil on vehicle as soon as safely possible
your dealer for service as soon
page 1010 and Scheduled and do not operate it until the cause
as possible.
Maintenance on page 112 of the low oil pressure has been
for more information. corrected. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
Fuel System Messages NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKE Lamp Messages

TO RESTART
FUEL LEVEL LOW AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARD
This message is displayed if the LIGHTING) LAMPS NEED
This message displays when the remote is no longer detected in the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as vehicle. Press the brake pedal to
SERVICE
soon as possible restart the vehicle. This message displays when
TIGHTEN GAS CAP the Adaptive Forward Lighting
NUMBER OF KEYS (AFL) system is disabled and
This message displays when the PROGRAMMED needs service. See your dealer.
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the This message displays when See Adaptive Forward Lighting
fuel cap. programming new keys to the (AFL) on page 63 for more
vehicle. information.
Key and Lock Messages
REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE AUTOMATIC LIGHT
NO REMOTE DETECTED CONTROL ON
This message displays when
This message displays when leaving the vehicle with the RKE This message is displayed when
trying to start the vehicle if an transmitter still inside. the exterior lamp control is in AUTO
RKE transmitter is not detected. and the lights have turned on.
The transmitter battery may be REPLACE BATTERY IN See Twilight Sentinel on page 64.
weak. See Starting the Vehicle REMOTE KEY
with a Low Transmitter Battery AUTOMATIC LIGHT
This message displays when the CONTROL OFF
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) battery in the RKE transmitter needs
System Operation on page 24. to be replaced. This message is displayed when
the exterior lamp control is in AUTO
and the lights have turned off.
See Twilight Sentinel on page 64.
XXX TURN INDICATOR SERVICE PARK ASSIST SERVICE SUSPENSION

FAILURE This message is displayed if there SYSTEM
When one of the turn signals is is a problem with the park assist This message displays if there is
out, this message displays to system. Take the vehicle to your a problem with the selective ride
show which bulb needs to be dealer for service. control. See Selective Ride Control
replaced. See Bulb Replacement on on page 937.
page 1038 and Replacement Bulbs Ride Control System
on page 1047 for more information SERVICE TRACTION
Messages CONTROL
on the turn signal bulb replacement.
SERVICE REAR AXLE This message displays when
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays when there there is a problem with the
This message is displayed if is a problem with the All-Wheel Traction Control System (TCS).
the turn signal has been left on. Drive (AWD) System. See your See Traction Control System (TCS)
Turn off the turn signal. dealer for service. on page 934.
Object Detection System SERVICE STABILITRAK SPORT MODE ON

Messages This message displays if there This message displays when
is a problem with the StabiliTrak Sport Mode has been activated.
PARK ASSIST OFF system. See StabiliTrak System on See Selective Ride Control on
This message is displayed when the page 936. page 937 and Manual Mode on
park assist system has been turned page 928 for more information.
off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 940.
Airbag System Messages Service Vehicle Messages Starting the Vehicle

SERVICE AIRBAG SERVICE AC SYSTEM Messages
This message displays if there is This message is displayed if there is PRESS BRAKE TO START
a problem with the airbag system. a problem with the air conditioning VEHICLE
Take the vehicle to your dealer for system. Take the vehicle to your This message is displayed when
service. dealer for service. attempting to start the vehicle
SERVICE POWER STEERING without first pressing the brake
Safety Belt Messages pedal.
This message is displayed if there is
BUCKLE SEATBELT a problem with the power steering SERVICE KEYLESS START
This message displays as a system. Take the vehicle to your SYSTEM
reminder when the safety belt dealer for service.
This message is displayed if there
is not buckled. SERVICE VEHICLE SOON is a problem with the keyless start
system. Take the vehicle to your
Anti-Theft Alarm System This message is displayed if there is dealer for service.
a problem with the vehicle. Take the
Messages vehicle to your dealer for service.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the vehicle
detects a tamper condition.
Tire Messages This message also displays Transmission Messages

LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT,
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to SERVICE TRANSMISSION
SYSTEM indicate the location of the low tire. This message displays if there is
This message displays if there is The low tire pressure warning a problem with the transmission.
a problem with the Tire Pressure light will also come on. See Tire See your dealer.
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire Pressure Light on page 525.
Pressure Monitor Operation on
SHIFT TO PARK
If a tire pressure message appears
page 1067 for more information. on the DIC, stop as soon as you This message displays when the
can. Inflate the tires by adding air transmission needs to be shifted
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE to P (Park). This may appear when
until the tire pressure is equal to
This message displays when the values shown on the Tire and attempting to remove the key if the
the system is learning new tires. Loading Information label. See Tires vehicle is not in P (Park).
See Tire Pressure Monitor on page 1056, Vehicle Load Limits
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
on page 912, and Tire Pressure on ENGINE
more information. page 1063.
This message displays and a chime
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE You can receive more than one sounds if the transmission fluid in
This message displays when the tire pressure message at a time. the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
pressure in one or more of the tires The DIC also shows the tire transmission fluid temperature high
is low. pressure values. See Driver can cause damage to the vehicle.
Information Center (DIC) on Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
page 529. allow the transmission to cool.
This message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
Vehicle Reminder Vehicle Entering the Personalization

Menus
Messages Personalization 1. Press CONFIG to access the
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE The audio system controls are Configuration Settings menu.
WITH CARE used to access the personalization 2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
This message is displayed when ice menus for customizing vehicle highlight Vehicle Settings.
conditions are possible. features. Not all features are
available on every vehicle. 3. Press the center of the
TURN WIPER CONTROL TO Only the features available MENU/SELECT knob to select
INTERMITTENT FIRST on a particular vehicle will be the Vehicle Settings menu.
displayed on that vehicle. The following list of menu items will
This message is displayed when
attempting to adjust the intermittent CONFIG (Configuration): be available:
wiper speed without intermittent Press to access the Configuration . Climate and Air Quality
selected on the wiper control. Settings Menu. . Comfort and Convenience
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on MENU/SELECT Knob: Press
page 53. the center of this knob to enter
. Language
the menus and select menu items. . Lighting
Washer Fluid Messages Turn the knob to scroll through the . Power Door Locks
menus.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD . Remote Locking, Unlocking,
FLUID / BACK or BACK / (depending Starting
on system): Press to exit or move
This message displays when backward in a menu. . Return to Factory Settings
the washer fluid level is low.
For information on filling the Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
washer fluid, see Washer highlight the menu. Press the knob
Fluid on page 1026. to select it. Each of the menus is
detailed in the following information.
Climate and Air Quality Air Quality Sensor Remote Start Auto Heated Seats
Select the Climate and Air Quality This will allow you to select whether When on, this feature will turn the
menu and the following will be the system will operate at high or heated seats on when using remote
displayed: low sensitivity. Only vehicles with start on cold days.
the dual zone climate control will Press the MENU/SELECT knob
. Auto Fan Speed
have this option. when Remote Start Auto Heated
. Air Quality Sensor
Press the MENU/SELECT Seats is highlighted. Turn the knob
. Remote Start Auto Seat Cool knob when Air Quality Sensor to select On or Off. Press the knob
. Remote Start Auto Heated Seats is highlighted to open the menu. to confirm and go back to the
Turn the knob to highlight High or last menu.
. Auto Defog Low Sensitivity. Press the knob to
confirm the selection and move Auto Defog
. Auto Rear Defog
back to the last menu. This will allow you to turn the auto
Auto Fan Speed defog on or off.
Remote Start Auto Seat Cool
This will allow you to select the Press the MENU/SELECT knob
automatic fan speed. This feature When on, this feature will turn the when Auto Defog is highlighted to
sets the climate control fan speed to vented seats on when using remote open the menu. Turn the knob to
maintain the interior temperature. start on warm days. highlight On or Off. Press the knob
Press the MENU/SELECT knob Press the MENU/SELECT knob to confirm the selection and move
when Auto Fan Speed is highlighted when Remote Start Auto Seat Cool back to the last menu.
to open the menu. Turn the knob is highlighted. Turn the knob to
to highlight High, Medium, or Low. select On or Off. Press the knob
Press the knob to confirm the to confirm and go back to the
selection and move back to the last menu.
last menu.
Auto Rear Defog Easy Exit Driver Seat Reverse Tilt Mirror
This will allow you to turn the auto This allows you to turn the easy This allows you to turn the reverse
rear defog on or off. exit driver seat feature on or off. tilt mirror feature on or off. When
Press the MENU/SELECT When on, this feature will move the on, both the driver and passenger
knob when Auto Rear Defog is driver seat rearward upon turning mirrors will tilt downward when
highlighted to open the menu. the ignition off and the driver door vehicle is shifted to R (Reverse)
Turn the knob to highlight On or opened. This may be performed to to improve visibility of the ground
Off. Press the knob to confirm the make it easier to exit the vehicle. near the rear wheels. They will
selection and move back to the See Power Seat Adjustment on return to their previous driving
last menu. page 34 for more information. position when the vehicle is shifted
Press the MENU/SELECT knob out of R (Reverse), the ignition is
Comfort and Convenience when Easy Exit Driver Seat is turned to OFF, or the vehicle is left
highlighted. Turn the knob to select in reverse.
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and the On or Off. Press the knob to confirm Press the MENU/SELECT
following will be displayed: and go back to the last menu. knob when Reverse Tilt Mirror is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
. Easy Exit Driver Seat Chime Volume Driver & Passenger or Off. Press
. Chime Volume This allows the selection of the the knob to confirm and go back
. Reverse Tilt Mirror chime volume level. to the last menu.
. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear Press the MENU/SELECT knob Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
when Chime Volume is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Normal or When on, and the front windshield
High. Press the knob to confirm wipers are on, the rear window
and go back to the last menu. wiper will turn on automatically
when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
Press the MENU/SELECT knob Vehicle Locator Lights Power Door Locks
when Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear is This allows the vehicle locator lights Select Power Door Locks and the
highlighted. Turn the knob to select to be turned on or off. following will be displayed:
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu. Press the MENU/SELECT knob . Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
when Vehicle Locator Lights is
Language . Auto Door Unlock
Select the Language menu and the On or Off. Press the knob to confirm . Delayed Door Lock
following will be displayed: and go back to the last menu.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
. English Exit Lighting When on, this feature will keep the
. French This allows the selection of how driver door from locking when the
long the exterior lamps stay on door is open. If Off is selected, the
. Spanish Delayed Door Lock menu will be
when leaving the vehicle when it
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to is dark outside. available and the door will lock as
select the language. Press the knob programmed through this menu.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to confirm and go back to the Press the MENU/SELECT knob
when Exit Lighting is highlighted.
last menu. when Auto Door Unlock is
Turn the knob to select Off,
Lighting 30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes. highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Press the knob to confirm and go On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
Select the Lighting menu and the back to the last menu. and go back to the last menu.
following will be displayed:
. Vehicle Locator Lights
. Exit Lighting
Auto Door Unlock Press the MENU/SELECT knob Unlock Feedback (Lights)
This allows selection of which of the when Delayed Door Lock is When on, the exterior lamps will
doors will automatically unlock when highlighted. Turn the knob to select flash when unlocking the vehicle
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). On or Off. Press the knob to confirm with the RKE transmitter.
and go back to the last menu.
Press the MENU/SELECT Press the MENU/SELECT knob
knob when Auto Door Unlock Remote Lock/Unlock/Start when Unlock Feedback (Lights)
is highlighted. Turn the knob to Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start is highlighted. Turn the knob to
select All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. and the following will be displayed: select Flash Lights or Off. Press
Press the knob to confirm and go the knob to confirm and go back
back to the last menu.
. Unlock Feedback (Lights) to the last menu.
. Locking Feedback
Delayed Door Lock Locking Feedback
. Door Unlock Options
When on, this feature will delay This allows selection of what type of
the locking of the doors until . Passive Door Lock feedback is given when locking the
five seconds after the last door is . Passive Door Unlock vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
closed. You will hear three chimes Press the MENU/SELECT
to signal delayed locking is in use. . Memory Remote Recall
knob when Locking Feedback
Pressing either the power lock . Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder is highlighted. Turn the knob to
button or the lock button on the select Lights and Horn, Lights Only,
RKE transmitter twice will override Horn Only, or Off. Press the knob
the delayed locking feature and to confirm and go back to the
immediately lock all of the doors. last menu.
Door Unlock Options Passive Door Lock Passive Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doors If the vehicle has the Remote If the vehicle has the RKE system,
will unlock when pressing the unlock Keyless Entry (RKE) system, when this feature allows you to select
button on the RKE transmitter. enabled, this feature allows the which doors will automatically
Press the MENU/SELECT knob doors to lock after several seconds unlock when you open the driver
when Door Unlock Options is if all doors are closed and at least door with the RKE transmitter
highlighted. Turn the knob to one RKE transmitter has been present.
select All Doors or Driver Door removed from the interior of the Press the MENU/SELECT knob
Only. When set to Driver Door Only, vehicle. It does not matter how far when Passive Door Unlock is
the driver door will unlock the first away the RKE transmitter is from highlighted. Turn the knob to select
time the unlock button is pressed the vehicle. This feature can also be All Doors or Driver Door. Press the
and all doors will unlock when the configured to chirp the horn when knob to confirm and go back to the
button is pressed a second time. the doors are passively locked. last menu.
When set to All Doors, all of the Press the MENU/SELECT knob
doors will unlock at the first press when Passive Door Lock is Memory Remote Recall
of the unlock button. Press the highlighted. Turn the knob to select This allows the Memory Remote
knob to confirm and go back to On With Chirp, On, or Off. Press the Recall feature to be turned on or off.
the last menu. knob to confirm and go back to the Press the MENU/SELECT knob
last menu. when Memory Remote Recall is
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder Universal Remote This system provides a way to
This allows the Remote Left In replace up to three remote control
Vehicle reminder feature to be
System transmitters used to activate
turned on or off. If on, the horn devices such as garage door
See Radio Frequency
will chirp if a remote is left in the openers, security systems, and
Statement on page 1320 for
vehicle. home automation devices.
information regarding Part 15
Press the MENU/SELECT knob of the Federal Communications Do not use the Universal Remote
when Remote Left In Vehicle is Commission (FCC) rules and system with any garage door opener
highlighted. Turn the knob to select Industry Canada Standards that does not have the stop and
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm RSS-210/220/310. reverse feature. This includes
and go back to the last menu. any garage door opener model
Universal Remote System manufactured before April 1,1982.
Return to Factory Settings Programming Read the instructions completely
Select Return to Factory before attempting to program the
Settings to return all of the vehicle Universal Remote system. Because
personalization to the default of the steps involved, it may be
settings. Turn the knob to select helpful to have another person
Yes or No. Press the knob to available to assist with programming
confirm and go back to the the Universal Remote system.
last menu.
If the vehicle has this feature,
you will see these buttons with
one LED indicator next to them
in the overhead console.
Keep the original hand-held Programming the Universal 2. At the same time, press
transmitter for use in other vehicles Remote System and hold both the hand-held
as well as for future Universal transmitter button and one
Remote system programming. It is For questions or help programming of the three Universal Remote
also recommended that upon the the Universal Remote system, system buttons to be used to
sale of the vehicle, the programmed call 18003553515 or go to operate the garage door. Do not
Universal Remote system buttons www.homelink.com. release the Universal Remote
be erased for security purposes. Programming a garage door opener system button or the hand-held
See Erasing Universal Remote involves time-sensitive actions, so transmitter button until the
System Buttons later in this read the entire procedure before indicator light changes from
section. starting. Otherwise, the device will a slowly to a rapidly flashing
When programming a garage time out and the procedure will have light. You now may release
door, park outside of the garage. to be repeated. both buttons.
Park directly in line with and facing To program up to three devices: Some entry gates and
the garage door opener motor-head garage door openers may
1. Hold the end of the hand-held
or gate motor-head. Be sure that require substitution of Step 2
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm
people and objects are clear of with the procedure noted in
(1 to 3 in) away from the
the garage door or gate being Gate Operator and Canadian
Universal Remote system
programmed. Programming later in this
buttons while keeping
It is recommended that a new section.
the indicator light in view.
battery be installed in the hand-held The hand-held transmitter was
transmitter for quicker and more supplied by the manufacturer
accurate transmission of the of the garage door opener
radio-frequency signal. receiver (motor-head unit).
3. Press and hold for five seconds It may be helpful to have 6. Immediately return to the
the newly trained Universal another person assist with vehicle. Firmly press and hold
Remote system button (the the remaining Steps 4 for two seconds the Universal
button selected in Step 2) while through 6. Remote system button, selected
observing the indicator light and in Step 2 to control the garage
garage door activation. door, and then release it. If the
. If the indicator light stays on garage door does not move or
continuously or the garage the lamp on the garage door
door starts to move when opener receiver (motor-head
the Universal Remote unit) does not flash, press and
system button is pressed hold the same button a second
and released, then the time for two seconds, and then
programming is complete. release it. Again, if the door
There is no need to Learn or Smart Buttons does not move or the garage
continue programming door lamp does not flash, press
4. After Steps 1 through 3 have and hold the same button a third
Steps 4 through 6. been completed, locate the time for two seconds, and then
. If the Universal Remote Learn or Smart button inside release.
system indicator light blinks the garage on the garage door
rapidly for two seconds, opener receiver (motor-head The Universal Remote system
then turns to a constant unit). The name and color should now activate the
light and the garage door of the button may vary by garage door.
does not move, continue manufacturer. To program the remaining two
with programming Steps 4 5. Firmly press and release the Universal Remote system buttons,
through 6. Learn or Smart button. After begin with Step 1 of Programming
you press this button, you will the Universal Remote System.
have 30 seconds to complete
Step 6.
Gate Operator and Canadian If you live in Canada, or you are Universal Remote System
Programming having difficulty programming
a gate operator or garage door
Operation
If you have questions or need help opener by using the Programming
programming the Universal Remote Using the Universal Remote
the Universal Remote System System
system, call 18003553515 or go procedures, regardless of where
to www.homelink.com. you live, replace Step 2 under Press and hold the appropriate
Canadian radio-frequency laws Programming the Universal Universal Remote system button
require transmitter signals to time Remote System with the following: for at least half of a second.
out or quit after several seconds of The indicator light will come on
Continue to press and hold while the signal is being transmitted.
transmission. This may not be long the Universal Remote system
enough for the Universal Remote button while you press and Erasing Universal Remote
system to pick up the signal during release every two seconds (cycle)
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
System Buttons
the hand-held transmitter button
gate operators are manufactured to until the frequency signal has All programmed buttons should be
time out in the same manner. been successfully accepted by erased when the vehicle is sold or
the Universal Remote system. the lease ends.
The Universal Remote system To erase all programmed buttons
indicator light will flash slowly at on the Universal Remote system
first and then rapidly. Proceed with device:
Step 3 under Programming the 1. Press and hold down the
Universal Remote System to two outside buttons until the
complete. indicator light begins to flash.
This should take about
10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Remote System
Button
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Remote system buttons:
1. Press and hold the desired
Universal Remote system
button. Do not release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, proceed
with Step 1 of the section
Programming the Universal
Remote System.
If you have questions or need help
programming the Universal Remote
system, call 18003553515 or go
to www.homelink.com. You may
also call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer
Assistance Offices (U.S. and
Canada) on page 135 or Customer
Assistance Offices (Mexico) on
page 136.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lighting Features
Daytime Running Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Adaptive Forward Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering column.
6-2 Lighting
It controls the following systems: ; (Parking Lamps): Turns the Headlamp

. Headlamps parking lamps on together with the High/Low-Beam Changer
following:
. Taillamps Push the turn signal/lane change
. Taillamps lever away from you to turn the high
. Parking Lamps
.
. License Plate Lamps beams on.
License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights Pull the lever toward you to return to
. Instrument Panel Lights low beams.
2 (Headlamps): Turns the
. Fog Lamps headlamps on together with the
The exterior lamps control has lamps listed below. A warning chime
four positions: sounds if the driver door is opened
when the ignition switch is off and
O (Off): Briefly turn to this position the headlamps are on.
to turn the automatic light control off
or on again. . Parking Lamps
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the . Taillamps This indicator light turns on in the
headlamps on automatically at . License Plate Lamps instrument panel cluster when the
normal brightness, together with high beam headlamps are on.
the following: . Instrument Panel Lights
. Parking Lamps # (Front Fog Lamps): For Flash-to-Pass
vehicles with fog lamps, press The flashtopass feature works with
. Taillamps to turn the lamps on or off. the low beams or Daytime Running
. License Plate Lamps See Front Fog Lamps on page 66. Lamps (DRL) on or off.
. Instrument Panel Lights To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal/lane change lever all the
way toward you, then release it.
Lighting 6-3
Daytime Running When the DRL are on, only the Adaptive Forward
lowbeam headlamps, at a reduced
Lamps (DRL) level of brightness, will be on.
Lighting (AFL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can The highbeam headlamps, For vehicles with Xenon
make it easier for others to see the taillamps, sidemarker, instrument headlamps, the Adaptive Forward
front of your vehicle during the day. panel lamps, and other lamps Lighting System (AFL) adjusts
Fully functional daytime running will not be on. the headlamps to provide greater
lamps are required on all vehicles The headlamps automatically road illumination in various driving
first sold in Canada. change from DRL to the regular conditions.
A light sensor on top of the headlamps depending on the To enable AFL, set the exterior
instrument panel makes the DRL darkness of the surroundings. lamp control to the AUTO position.
work, so be sure it is not covered. The other lamps that come on Moving the control out of the AUTO
with the headlamps will also position will deactivate the system.
The DRL system makes the
come on. AFL will operate when the vehicle
lowbeam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness or for vehicles When it is bright enough outside, speed is greater than 3 km/h
with High Intensity Discharge (HID) the headlamps go off and the DRL (2 mph). AFL will not operate when
headlamps, the DRL lights will come come on. the transmission is in R (Reverse).
on when the following conditions AFL is not immediately operable
To turn the DRL lamps off or after starting the vehicle; driving
are met: on again, turn the exterior lamps a short distance is required to
. The ignition is in the control to the off position and then calibrate the AFL. See Exterior
ON/RUN mode. release. For vehicles first sold Lamp Controls on page 61.
in Canada, the DRL cannot be
. The exterior lamps control is
turned off.
in AUTO.
. The engine is running.
6-4 Lighting
Curve Lighting Twilight Sentinel With Twilight Sentinel the following

The Xenon light beam pivots based will happen:
on the steering wheel position and . When it is dark enough outside,
vehicle speed of at least 10 km/h and the exterior lamps control
(6 mph). The headlamps shine at is in the AUTO position, the
an angle of up to 15 degrees to the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
right or left of the direction of travel. go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps come on. The
Highway Lighting other lamps that come on with
If the vehicle is traveling straight the headlamps also come on.
continuously at high speeds, the . When it is bright enough outside,
light beam automatically raises This feature automatically turns the the headlamps go off, and the
slightly to increase the headlamp lamps on and off. A light sensor on DRL come on, as long as the
range. top of the instrument panel makes exterior lamp switch is in the
the Twilight Sentinel work, so be AUTO position. See Exterior
City Lighting
sure it is not covered. Lamp Controls on page 61.
If the vehicle speed is less than
50 km/h (31 mph), the headlamp
range is automatically reduced.
Lighting 6-5
If the vehicle is started in a dark Twilight Sentinel also provides Hazard Warning Flashers
garage, the automatic headlamp exterior illumination as you leave
system comes on immediately. the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel
If it is light outside when the has turned on the lamps when the
vehicle leaves the garage, there is ignition is turned off, the lamps
a slight delay before the automatic remain on until one of the following
headlamp system changes to occurs:
the DRL. During that delay, the . The exterior lamp control is
instrument panel cluster may not
be as bright as usual. Make sure moved from O to the parking
the instrument panel brightness lamp position.
control is in full bright position. . The delay time selected has
See Instrument Panel Illumination elapsed.
Control on page 67 for more
information. See Vehicle Personalization on
page 542 to select the delay time.
The vehicle can be idled with the You can also select no delay time. | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
lamps off, even when it is dark Press this button located on the
outside. After starting the vehicle, If the ignition is turned off with the
exterior lamp control in the parking instrument panel near the audio
turn the exterior lamp control to system, to make the front and rear
off, then release it. The lamps will lamp or headlamp position, the
Twilight Sentinel delay will not turn signal lamps flash on and off.
remain off until the control is turned This warns others that you are
to off again. occur. The lamps will turn off as
soon as the control is turned off. having trouble. Press again to
turn the flashers off.
The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
6-6 Lighting
Turn and Lane-Change If after signaling a turn or lane The ignition and the lowbeam
change the arrow flashes rapidly headlamps must be on to turn on
Signals or does not come on, a signal bulb the fog lamps.
may be burned out. # : Press to turn the fog lamps
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb on or off. An indicator light on the
is not burned out, check the fuse. instrument panel cluster comes on
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on when the fog lamps are on.
page 1048 for more information. The fog lamps come on together
with the parking lamps.
Front Fog Lamps
An arrow on the instrument panel Some localities have laws that
cluster will flash in the direction of require the headlamps to be on
the turn or lane change. along with the fog lamps.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. The turn signal flashes
three times.
The lever returns to its starting The front fog lamp button is located
position when it is released. on the exterior lamp control, on the
outboard side of the steering wheel.
Lighting 6-7
Interior Lighting Cargo Lamp 1 (Door): The lamp comes on

automatically when a door is
The cargo lamp is located over the
Instrument Panel opened.
rear compartment and is controlled
Illumination Control by the dome lamp. See Dome + (On): Turns the dome lamp on.
Lamps on page 67.
Reading Lamps
Courtesy Lamps There are reading lamps located on
The courtesy lamps come on the overhead console and over the
automatically when any door is rear passenger doors. These lamps
opened and the dome lamp is come on automatically when any
in the door position. door is opened.
To manually turn the reading lamps
Dome Lamps on or off:
The dome lamp controls are located . Press # or $ next to each
in the overhead console. overhead console reading lamp.
To change the dome lamp settings, . Press the lamp lens on the rear
This feature controls the brightness press the following: passenger reading lamps.
of the instrument panel lights. * (Dome Lamp Override): Turns
the lamp off, even when a door
D (Instrument Panel is open.
Brightness): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the
instrument panel lights.
6-8 Lighting
Lighting Features Exit Lighting Battery Load

The headlamps, taillamps, parking Management
Entry Lighting lamps, backup lamps, and license The vehicle has Electric Power
The headlamps, taillamps, license plate lamps come on at night, or in Management (EPM) that estimates
plate lamps, backup lamps, dome areas with limited lighting, when a the battery's temperature and state
lamps, and most of the interior lights door is opened after the ignition is of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
turn on briefly, when the Remote turned off. The dome lamps also for best performance and extended
come on when a door is opened life of the battery.
Keyless Entry (RKE) K is pressed, after the ignition is changed to the
or when the door handle is pulled. off position. When the battery's state of charge
After about 30 seconds the exterior is low, the voltage is raised slightly
lamps turn off, and then the dome The exterior lights and dome to quickly bring the charge back up.
and remaining interior lights dim lamp remain on after the door is When the state of charge is high,
to off. The entry lighting can be closed for a set amount of time, the voltage is lowered slightly to
manually turned off, by changing then automatically turn off. prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
the ignition out of the off position, The exterior lights turn off has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
or by pressing the (RKE) Q button. immediately by turning the display on the Driver Information
exterior lamps control to OFF. Center (DIC), you may see the
This feature can be changed. voltage move up or down. This is
See Vehicle Personalization on This feature can be changed.
normal. If there is a problem, an
page 542. See Vehicle Personalization on
alert will be displayed.
page 542.
Lighting 6-9
The battery can be discharged at EPM works to prevent excessive

idle if the electrical loads are very discharge of the battery. It does this
high. This is true for all vehicles. by balancing the generator's output
This is because the generator and the vehicle's electrical needs.
(alternator) may not be spinning It can increase engine idle speed
fast enough at idle to produce all to generate more power whenever
of the power needed for very high needed. It can temporarily reduce
electrical loads. the power demands of some
A high electrical load occurs when accessories.
several of the following are on, Normally, these actions occur
such as: headlamps, high beams, in steps or levels, without being
fog lamps, rear window defogger, noticeable. In rare cases at the
climate control fan at high speed, highest levels of corrective action,
heated seats, engine cooling fans, this action may be noticeable to the
trailer loads, and loads plugged into driver. If so, a DIC message might
accessory power outlets. be displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If one of these messages displays,
it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 529.
6-10 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player
Introduction
System (Radio with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-19
7-22 Infotainment
Mass Storage Read the following pages to
Introduction Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 become familiar with the audio
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Auxiliary Devices system's features.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 (Radio with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . .
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD
7-3 Auxiliary Devices (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM) . . . . . . . . 7-35
{ WARNING
and MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Rear Seat Infotainment Taking your eyes off the road
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 for extended periods could
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 cause a crash resulting in
Radio
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) injury or death to you or others.
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Do not give extended attention to
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 entertainment tasks while driving.
Phone
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-50
Bluetooth (Infotainment This system provides access to
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52 many audio and nonaudio listings.
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the Notice: Contact your dealer Navigation System
road while driving, do the following before adding any equipment.
For vehicles with a navigation
while the vehicle is parked: Adding audio or communication system, see the separate navigation
. Become familiar with the equipment could interfere with manual.
operation and controls of the operation of the engine,
the audio system. radio, or other systems, and Theft-Deterrent Feature
. Set up the tone, speaker could damage them. Follow
federal rules covering mobile The theft-deterrent feature works
adjustments, and preset by learning a portion of the Vehicle
radio stations. radio and telephone equipment.
Identification Number (VIN)
For more information, see Defensive The vehicle has Retained to the infotainment system.
Driving on page 92. Accessory Power (RAP). The infotainment system does
With RAP, the audio system can not operate if it is stolen or
This vehicle's infotainment system be played even after the ignition is moved to a different vehicle.
may be equipped with a noise turned off. See Retained Accessory
reduction system which can work Power (RAP) on page 922 for more
improperly if the audio amplifier, information.
engine calibrations, exhaust system,
microphones, radio, or speakers
are modified or replaced. This could
result in more noticeable engine
noise at certain speeds.
Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. Buttons 1 to 6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
C. TUNE
. Radio: Manually selects
radio stations.
. CD: Selects tracks.
D. FAV
. Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
E. l SEEK
. Radio: Seeks the next
station.
. CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
F. g SEEK J. k O. PHONE
. Radio: Seeks the previous . CD: Pauses the CD.
. Opens the phone
station. main menu.
K. CD Slot
. CD: Selects the previous
. Mutes the audio system.
. Insert a CD.
track or rewinds within a P. TONE
track. L. MENU/SELECT
. Opens the tone menu.
G. Y (CD Eject)
. Press: Selects menu items.
Q. AUX
. Removes a disc from the
. Turn: Opens menus,
highlights menu items,
. Selects a connected
CD slot. external audio source.
or sets numeric values
H. CD while in a menu. R. INFO
. Selects the CD player M. BACK / . Radio: Shows available
when listening to a information about the
different audio source. . Menu: Moves one current station.
level back.
I. RADIO/BAND . CD: Shows available
. Character Input: Deletes
. Changes the band while information about the
the last character. current track.
listening to the radio.
N. CONFIG
. Selects the radio when
listening to a different . Opens the settings menu.
audio source.
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) A. VOL/ O

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. Buttons 1 to 6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
. MEM: Saves and selects
favorite tracks and
playlists.
C. TUNE/INFO
. Radio: Manually selects
radio stations and shows
available information about
the current station.
. CD: Selects tracks
and shows available
information about the
current track.
. MEM: Selects tracks
and shows available
information about the
current track.
D. FAV G. Y (CD Eject) K. CD/DVD Slot

. Radio: Opens the . Removes a disc from the
. Insert a disc.
favorites list. CD slot. L. MENU/SELECT
. MEM: Opens the H. RADIO/BAND . Press: Selects menu items.
favorites list.
. Changes the band while . Turn: Open menus,
E. l SEEK listening to the radio. highlights menu items,
. Radio: Seeks the next . Selects the radio when or sets numeric values
station. listening to a different while in a menu.
. CD/DVD: Selects the next audio source. M. TONE
track or fast forwards I. MEM/CD/AUX . Opens the tone menu.
within a track. . Selects MEM, CD/DVD, N. 0 BACK
. MEM: Selects the next USB, or a connected
track or fast forwards auxiliary audio or auxiliary . Menu: Moves one
within a track. audio/video source. level back.
F. g SEEK J. k
. Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
. Radio: Seeks the previous . Radio: Pauses time shifted
station. content. O. CONFIG
. CD/DVD: Selects the . CD/DVD: Pauses
. Opens the settings menu.
previous track or rewinds CD/DVDA and DVDV P. DEL
within a track. playback. . MEM: Deletes the current
. MEM: Selects the previous . MEM: Pauses MEM track from MEM.
track or rewinds within a playback.
track.
Q. ( REC Turning the System On or Off Menu System

. CD/DVD: Records content VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to Controls
from audio CDs and turn the system on and off. The MENU/SELECT knob and
MP3/WMA CDs.
Automatic SwitchOff the BACK / button are used to
. AUX: Records content navigate the menu system.
from USB mass storage If the infotainment system has
devices. been turned on after the ignition MENU/SELECT: Press to:
is turned off, the system will turn . Select or activate the highlighted
R. PHONE off automatically after 10 minutes. menu option.
. Opens the phone Volume Control
main menu.
. Confirm a set value.
. Mutes the audio system. VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to . Turn a system setting on or off.
adjust the volume. Turn to:
Operation PHONE: For vehicles with OnStar, . Enter the menu system.
press and hold PHONE to mute the
Controls infotainment system. Press and hold
. Highlight a menu option.
The infotainment system is PHONE again, or turn the VOL/ O . Select a value.
operated by using the pushbuttons, knob to cancel mute.
multifunction knobs, menus shown BACK /: Press to:
on the display, and steering wheel For vehicles without OnStar, press
PHONE to mute the infotainment
. Exit a menu.
controls, if equipped.
system. Press PHONE again, . Return from a submenu screen
or turn the VOL/ O knob to to the previous menu screen.
cancel mute. . Delete the last character in a
sequence.
Selecting a Menu Option Activating a Setting Turning a Function On or Off
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
move the highlighted bar. highlight the setting. highlight the function.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT 2. Press the MENU/SELECT 2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to select the highlighted button to activate the setting. button to turn the function on
option. or off.
Setting a Value
Submenus Entering a Character Sequence
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to

An arrow on the righthand edge change the current value of the 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
of the menu indicates that it has a setting. highlight the character.
submenu with other options. 2. Press the MENU/SELECT 2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to confirm the setting. button to select the character.
Press the BACK / button to delete Adjusting the Treble, Midrange, Adjusting the Fader and Balance
the last character in the sequence and Bass
or press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence.
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source. 1. Press the TONE button.
1. Press the TONE button. 2. Select Fader or Balance.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0: 2. Select Treble, Midrange, 3. Select the value.
or Bass.
1. Press the TONE button.
3. Select the value. Press the BACK / button to go
2. Select the audio setting. back to the Tone Settings menu.
3. Press and hold the Press the BACK / button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu. Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)
MENU/SELECT button
until the value changes to 0. For vehicles that have an equalizer:
Press the BACK / button to go 1. Press the TONE button.

back to the Tone Settings menu. 2. Select EQ.
3. Select the setting.
Press the BACK / button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing)

. 5.1 Surround The infotainment System Settings
Settings system used in conjunction with
the Bose 5.1 Cabin Surround Configuring the Number of
For vehicles with DSP, it is used sound system for the vehicle Favorite Pages
to provide a choice of different includes digital 5.1 decoding.
listening experiences. This technology unlocks the full
. 2.0 Normal Select this setting benefit of digital 5.1 recordings,
to adjust the audio for normal so digitally encoded music
mode. This provides the best and movie soundtracks can
sound quality for all seating be presented faithfully and
positions. accurately. If the video screens
or Rear Seat Audio (RSA) To configure the number of available
. Centerpoint Centerpoint
are on, 5.1 Surround is not favorite pages:
signal processing circuitry.
available.
This setting creates a surround 1. Press the CONFIG button.
sound listening experience from To adjust the DSP settings:
stereo CDs and satellite radio. 2. Select Radio Settings.
1. Press the TONE button.
For more information on 3. Select Radio Favorites.
2. Select DSP.
Bose Centerpoint signal 4. Select the number of available
processing circuitry, please visit 3. Select the setting. favorite pages.
www. bose.com/centerpoint. Press the BACK / button to go 5. Press the BACK / button
back to the Tone Settings menu. to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Auto Volume Maximum Startup Volume Radio

The auto volume feature The maximum volume played when
automatically adjusts the radio the radio is first turned on can AM-FM Radio
volume to compensate for road be set.
and wind noise as the vehicle Control Buttons
speeds up or slows down, so that The buttons used to control the
the volume level is consistent. radio are:
The level of volume compensation RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
can be selected, or the auto volume radio on and choose between AM,
feature can be turned off. FM, and XM, if equipped.
1. Press the CONFIG button. MENU/SELECT: Press and turn to
navigate the available menus.
2. Select Radio Settings.
TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
3. Select Maximum Startup
Volume. INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available
4. Select the setting.
for the current song.
5. Press the BACK / button l SEEK/ g SEEK: Press to
2. Select Radio Settings. to go back to the System search for stations.
3. Select Auto Volume. Configuration menu.
FAV: Press to open the
4. Select the setting. favorites list.
5. Press the BACK / button 1 to 6: Press to select preset
to go back to the System stations.
Configuration menu. k (Play/Pause): Press to pause
time shifted content, if equipped.
RDS (Radio Data System) Selecting a Band Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS Press the RADIO/BAND button to
feature is available for use only on choose AM, FM, or XM, if equipped. Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK,
FM stations that broadcast RDS The last station that was playing to automatically search for the next
information. This feature only works starts playing again. available station. If a station is not
when the information from the radio found, the radio switches to a more
station is available. In rare cases, Selecting a Station
sensitive search level. If a station
a radio station could broadcast Seek Tuning (Radio with CD) still is not found, the frequency that
incorrect information that causes the was last active begins to play.
radio features to work improperly. If the radio station is not known:
If this happens, contact the radio Manual Tuning
Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK
station. to automatically search for the next Turn the TUNE knob to select the
While the radio is tuned to an available station. If a station is not frequency on the display.
FM-RDS station, the station name found, the radio switches to a more Favorites List
or call letters display. sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
Radio Menus that was last active begins to play. 2. Select Favorites List.
Radio menus are available for AM If the radio station is known: 3. Select the station.
and FM.
Press and hold g SEEK or
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
open the main radio menu for that l SEEK until the station on the
frequency. display is reached, then release
the button.
Station Lists 3. Select the programming type. Storing a Station as a Favorite

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. A list of stations that transmit
Stations from all bands can be
programming of the selected
2. Select AM or FM Station List. stored in any order in the favorite
type displays.
All receivable stations in the pages.
current reception area are 4. Select the station.
Up to six stations can be stored in
displayed. If a station list has The category lists are updated each favorite page and the number
not been created, an automatic when the station lists are of available favorite pages can
station search is done. updated. be set.
3. Select the station. Updating Station & Category Lists Storing Stations
Category Lists If stations stored in the station list To store the station to a position
Most stations that broadcast an can no longer be received: in the list, press the corresponding
RDS program type code specify the 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
type of programming transmitted. 2. Select Update AM or FM Station Retrieving Stations
Some stations change the program List, if the stations stored in
type code depending on the Press the FAV button to open a
the station list are no longer favorite page or to switch to another
content. The system stores the RDS received. A station search will
stations sorted by program type in favorite page. Briefly press one of
be completed and the first the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
the FM category list. station in the updated list station.
To search for a programming type will play.
determined by station: To cancel the station search, press
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select FM category list. A list of
all programing types available
displays.
Time Shifting (Radio with Press and release g SEEK or Satellite Radio
CD/DVD and MEM) l SEEK to jump forward or back Vehicles with an XM Satellite
The radio with MEM time shift 30 seconds in the time shift buffer. Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
feature can rewind 20 minutes When the radio station is Radio subscription can receive XM
of FM/AM content. While listening changed, the buffer is cleared programming.
to the radio, the content from the and automatically restarted for
current station is always being the current station. Content from XM Satellite Radio Service
buffered. a previously tuned station is no XM is a satellite radio service based
longer available. in the 48 contiguous United States
Press k to pause the radio.
The time shift feature is not and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
The radio displays the time shift
available while recording or with Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
status bar. The status bar shows
other sources of playback. programming and commercial-free
the amount of content stored in the
music, coast to coast, and in
buffer and the current pause point. Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle digital-quality sound. If XM service
To resume playback from the Turned Off needs to be reactivated, the radio
current pause point, press k again. If AM/FM is paused when the will display No Subscription Please
The radio is no longer live, but vehicle is turned off, the radio Renew on channel XM1. A service
played from the time shift buffer. continues to buffer the current fee is required to receive the XM
A status bar displays below the radio station for up to 20 minutes. service. For more information,
station number. If the vehicle is turned back on contact XM at www.xmradio.com
within 20 minutes, the radio or 1-800-929-2100 in the
Press and hold g SEEK or resumes playback from the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or
l SEEK to fast forward or paused point. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
rewind through the time shift buffer.
Hold l SEEK until the end of
the recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
Control Buttons Selecting the XM Band Selecting an XM Channel

The buttons used to control the XM Press the RADIO/BAND button to XM channels can be selected by
radio are: choose between the AM, FM and using g SEEK, l SEEK, the
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the XM bands. The last channel played TUNE knob, or the menu system.
radio on and choose between AM, in that band begins to play when
that band is selected. Selecting a Channel Using
FM, and XM, if equipped.
XM Categories g SEEK or l SEEK
g SEEK / l SEEK: Press to go (Radio with CD)
to the previous or next channel. XM channels are organized in
categories.
. Press and release g SEEK or
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list. l SEEK to go to the previous
Removing or Adding Categories or next channel.
16: Press to select a favorite. Channels in a category that have . Press and hold g SEEK or
TUNE: Turn to select a channel. been removed can still be accessed
l SEEK to scroll through the
INFO: Press to display additional by using the g SEEK or l SEEK previous or next channel until
information that may be available buttons, or the TUNE knob. the channel is reached.
about the current song. To add or remove categories: Selecting a Channel Using
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause 1. Press the CONFIG button. g SEEK or l SEEK
time shifted content, if equipped.
2. Select Radio Settings. (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)
3. Select XM Categories. Press and release g SEEK or
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to l SEEK to go to the previous
highlight the category. or next channel.
to remove or add the category.
Selecting a Channel Using the Storing an XM Channel as a Time Shifting (Radio with
TUNE Knob Favorite CD/DVD and MEM)
To select an XM channel using the Channels from all bands can be The radio with the MEM time shift
TUNE knob: stored in any order in the favorite feature can rewind 20 minutes of
Turn the TUNE knob to highlight an pages. XM content. While listening to the
XM channel; the channel is selected Up to six channels can be stored in radio, the content from the current
after a short delay. each favorite page and the number channel is always being buffered.
To select a channel using the menu: of available favorite pages can Press k to pause the radio.
be set. The radio displays the time shift
1. Turn the MENU/Select knob and
select Channel List. Storing a Channel as a Favorite status bar. The status bar shows
the amount of content stored in the
2. Select the desired channel. To store the channel to a position buffer and the current pause point.
in the list, press and hold the
Selecting a Channel Using the corresponding 1 to 6 button until To resume playback from the
Menu System the channel can be heard again. current pause point, press k again.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. The radio is no longer live, but
Retrieving Channels
2. Select XM Category List. played from the time shift buffer.
Press the FAV button to open A status bar displays below the
3. Select the category. a favorite page or to change to channel number.
4. Select the channel. another favorite page. Briefly press
one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve
the channel.
Press and hold g SEEK or Pausing XM with the Vehicle Channel Off Air: This channel is
l SEEK to fast forward or rewind Turned Off not currently in service. Tune in to
through the time shift buffer. If XM is paused when the vehicle another channel.
Hold l SEEK until the end is turned off, the radio continues to Channel Unauth: This channel is
of the recorded buffer resumes buffer the current radio station for blocked or cannot be received with
live playback. up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is your XM Subscription package.
turned back on within 20 minutes, Channel Unavailable: This
Press and release g SEEK or the radio resumes playback from previously assigned channel is no
l SEEK to go to the next or the paused point. longer assigned. Tune to another
previous song in the time shift
XM Messages station.
buffer.
XL (Explicit Language No Artist Info: The system
When the channel is changed, the
Channels): These channels, is working properly. No artist
buffer is cleared and automatically
or any others, can be information is available at this
restarted for the current channel.
blocked by request, by calling time on this channel.
Content from a previously tuned
station is no longer available. 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and No Title Info: The system is
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. working properly. No song title
The time shift feature is not
XM Updating: The encryption information is available at this
available while recording or with
code in the receiver is being time on this channel.
other sources of playback.
updated, no action is required. No CAT Info: The system is
This process should take no working properly. No category
longer than 30 seconds. information is available at this
Loading XM: The audio system time on this channel.
is acquiring and processing audio
and text data, no action is needed.
This message should disappear
shortly.
No Information: The system Unknown: If this message is FM

is working properly. No text or received when tuned to channel 0,
FM signals only reach about 16 to
informational messages are there could be a receiver fault.
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
available at this time on this Consult with your dealer.
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
channel. Check Antenna: If this message that automatically works to reduce
No Subscription Please Renew: does not clear within a short period interference, some static can occur,
XM subscription needs to be of time, the receiver could have a especially around tall buildings or
reactivated. Contact XM at fault. Consult with your dealer. hills, causing the sound to fade in
www.xmradio.com or call XM Not Available: If this message and out.
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. does not clear within a short period
and www.xmradio.ca or call AM
of time, the receiver could have a
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. fault. Consult with your dealer. The range for most AM stations is
No XM Signal: The system is greater than for FM, especially at
working properly. The vehicle may Radio Reception night. The longer range can cause
be in a location where the XM signal station frequencies to interfere with
is being blocked. When the vehicle Frequency interference and static each other. Static can occur when
is moved into an open area, the can occur during normal radio things like storms and power lines
signal should return. reception if items such as cell phone interfere with radio reception. When
chargers, vehicle convenience this happens, try reducing the treble
CAT Not Found: The system is accessories, and external electronic on the radio.
working properly. There are no devices are plugged into the
channels available for the selected accessory power outlet. If there is
category. interference or static, unplug the
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, item from the accessory power
this message alternates with the outlet.
XM Radio eightdigit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the
service.
XM Satellite Radio Service Audio Players Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
damage the surface. Pick up discs
digital radio reception from coast CD Player by grasping the outer edges or the
to coast in the 48 contiguous United (Radio with CD) edge of the hole and the outer edge.
States, and in Canada. Just as
with FM, tall buildings or hills can The CD player can play audio CDs If the bottom surface of a disc
interfere with satellite radio signals, and MP3 CDs. is dirty, take a soft lintfree cloth,
causing the sound to fade in and or dampen a clean soft cloth in
The CD player will not play
out. In addition, traveling or standing a mild neutral detergent solution
8 cm (3 in) CDs.
under heavy foliage, bridges, mixed with water, and clean it.
garages, or tunnels may cause loss Care of CDs Wipe the disc from the center
of the XM signal for a period of time. to the outer edge.
Sound quality can be reduced due
Cellular Phone Usage to disc quality, recording method, Care of the CD Player
quality of the music recorded, and
Cellular phone usage can cause Do not add a label to a disc, as it
how the disc has been handled.
interference with the vehicle's radio. could get caught in the CD player.
Handle discs carefully and store
If a label is needed, label the top
them in their original cases or other
Multi-Band Antenna of the recorded disc with a
protective cases away from direct
marking pen.
The multi-band antenna is on the sunlight and dust. If the bottom
roof of the vehicle. The antenna surface of a disc is damaged, the
is used for the AMFM radio, disc may not play properly or at all.
OnStar, the XM Satellite Radio
Service System, and GPS (Global
Positioning System), if the vehicle
has these features. Keep the
antenna clear of obstructions for
clear reception.
Do not use disc lens cleaners Control Buttons Inserting a CD

because they could contaminate the
The buttons used to control the CD With the printed side facing up,
lens of the disc optics and damage
player are: insert a disc into the CD slot until it
the CD player.
CD: Press to use the CD player. is drawn in.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, more than one CD is inserted l SEEK/ g SEEK: Press to Removing a CD
into the slot at a time, or an select tracks or to fast forward or
attempt is made to play scratched rewind within a track.
Press X.
or damaged CDs, the CD player The disc is pushed out of the
INFO: Press to display additional
could be damaged. While using CD slot.
information about the current track
the CD player, use only CDs in that may be available. If the disc is not removed after it is
good condition without any label, ejected, it is pulled back in after a
load one CD at a time, and keep TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
few seconds.
the CD player and the loading slot MENU/SELECT: Turn to enter the
free of foreign materials, liquids, menu; press to select an item. Playing a CD or MP3 CD
and debris.
Y (Eject): Press to eject the disc. Press the CD button. If there is a
disc in the player, it begins playing.
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause
a CD or MP3 track, press again to Information about the disc and
resume playback. current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
Selecting a CD Track Selecting an MP3 Track Tracks can be searched by:

Using the control buttons: Using the control buttons: . Playlists
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to Press g SEEK or l SEEK to Artists
. . .
select the previous or next track. select the previous or next track. . Albums
. Turn the TUNE knob. . Turn the TUNE knob. . Song Titles
Using the CD Menu: Using the CD Menu: . Genres
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. . Folder View
2. Select Tracks list. 2. Select Playlists/Folders. To search for tracks:
3. Select the track. 3. Select the playlist or folder. 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
Playing Tracks in Random Order 4. Select the track. 2. Select Search.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and Searching for MP3 Tracks 3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
set Shuffle Songs to On. The search feature may take some Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
time to display the information after or Folder View.
Fast Forward and Rewind
reading the disc due to the amount 4. Select the track.
Press and hold l SEEK or of information stored on the disc.
g SEEK to fast forward or rewind FM automatically plays while the
within the current track. disc is being read.
CD/DVD Player mixed with water, and clean it. Control Buttons
Wipe the disc from the center to
The CD/DVD player can play The buttons used to control the
the outer edge.
CDs, DVDAs, MP3/WMA CDs, CD/DVD player are:
MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVDVs. Care of the CD/DVD Player MEM/CD/AUX: Press to choose
The CD/DVD player will not play Do not add a label to a disc, as it between the MEM, CD/DVD,
8 cm (3 in) discs. could get caught in the CD/DVD and AUX.
player. If a label is needed, label l SEEK/ g SEEK: Press to
Care of CDs and DVDs the top of the recorded disc with select tracks or to fast forward or
Sound quality can be reduced due a marking pen. rewind within a track.
to disc quality, recording method, Do not use disc lens cleaners
quality of the music recorded, and INFO: Press to display additional
because they could contaminate the information about the disc that may
how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage
Handle discs carefully and store be available.
the CD/DVD player.
them in their original cases or other TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
protective cases away from direct Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, more than one CD is inserted MENU/SELECT: Turn to enter the
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
into the slot at a time, or an menu and press to select an item.
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all. attempt is made to play scratched Y (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
Do not touch the bottom surface of or damaged CDs, the CD player
could be damaged. While using k (Play/Pause): Press to pause a
a disc while handling it; this could CD, DVDA, or DVDV. Press again
damage the surface. Pick up discs the CD player, use only CDs in
good condition without any label, to resume playback. Press and hold
by grasping the outer edges or the to stop a DVDV disc.
edge of the hole and the outer edge. load one CD at a time, and keep
the CD player and the loading slot
If the bottom surface of a disc free of foreign materials, liquids,
is dirty, take a soft lintfree cloth, and debris.
or dampen a clean soft cloth in
a mild neutral detergent solution
Inserting a CD or DVD Selecting CD or DVDA Tracks Playing an MP3 CD or DVD

With the printed side facing up, Using the control buttons: Files that are not stored in
insert a disc into the slot until it is folders are displayed in the
drawn in.
. Press g SEEK or l SEEK to root directory (disc).
select the previous or next track.
Removing a CD or DVD The search rate increases
. Turn the TUNE knob. if the MENU/SELECT knob
Press Y. Using the menu: is continuously turned while
The disc is pushed out of the searching in a list.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
CD/DVD slot. Selecting an MP3 Track
2. Select Tracks List.
If the disc is not removed after it is Using the control buttons:
3. Select the track.
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds. Pausing a CD or DVDA Track
. Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
Playing a CD or DVDA Disc Press k to pause a CD or DVDA . Turn the TUNE knob.
Press the MEM/CD/AUX button. track. Press k again to continue
If there is a disc in the player, it playing the track. Using the CD or DVD Menu:
begins playing. 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
Playing CD or DVDA Tracks in
Information about the disc and Random Order 2. Select Folder List.
current track is shown on the
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and 3. Select the folder.
display depending on the data
stored. then set Shuffle Songs to On. 4. Select the track.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Press and hold l SEEK or
g SEEK to fast forward or
rewind within the current track.
Searching for MP3s on a CD The number of objects in each Playing a DVDV

or DVD category is shown in parentheses
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
It is normal for the search feature after the category.
System on page 737 for information
to take some time to display the To search for tracks: about how to control a Video DVD
information after reading the disc 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. using the wireless remote control.
due to the amount of information
stored on the disc. The infotainment 2. Select Search. Selecting a Chapter
system automatically switches to 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Using the control buttons:
FM while the disc is being read. Song Titles, or Genres. . Press g SEEK or l SEEK
Files that do not have any meta 4. Select the track. The search rate to select the previous or next
data stored in the ID3 tag display increases if the MENU/SELECT chapter.
as Unknown. knob is continuously turned . Turn the TUNE knob.
Tracks can be searched for by: while searching in a list.
Using the DVD Menu:
. Playlists Playing MP3 Tracks in Random
Order 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
. Artists
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and 2. Select Chapter List.
. Albums
set Shuffle Songs to On. 3. Select the chapter.
. Song Titles
Recording an Audio or MP3 Selecting a Title
. Genres CD to MEM
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
2. Select Title List.
3. Select the title.

. Cursor RIGHT
Changing the Audio Stream Mass Storage
. Cursor LEFT Media (MEM)
. Up Menu
2. Select Audio Stream. Infotainment systems with MEM
3. Select Change Audio Stream. Use the following actions to storage are able to record up to
navigate the menu on a DVDV Disc 1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from
4. Press MENU/SELECT to change while playing chapters. Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,
the selection. and USB storage devices. The MEM
. Pause (Play)
Select Cancel to exit the menu. player can also time shift audio from
. Chapter List AM, FM, and XM radio.
Pausing a DVD . Title List Music or content stored in MEM that
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. you did not create, or have the right
. DVD/DVD DVD on both video
2. Select Pause to pause the screens to distribute, must be deleted before
disc. Select unpause to start the sale or end of lease of the
playback.
. DVD/AUX Left video vehicle.
screen/Right AUX input
Navigating the DVDV Disc Menu . AUX/DVD Left AUX
Control Buttons
Use the following actions to input/Right video screen The buttons used to control the
navigate the title menu on a MEM player are:
. AUX/AUX AUX input on both
DVDV Disc.
video screens MEM/CD/AUX: Press to select the
. Select/Enter MEM player.
To navigate the menu:
. Cursor UP
l SEEK/ g SEEK: Press to
. Cursor DOWN select tracks or to fast forward or
2. Select the action. rewind within a track.
INFO: Press to display additional Recording to MEM Stopping the Recording

information about the MEM track
that may be available. Turn to select Press ( REC, then select Record Press the ( REC button while
tracks. Current Song or Record All Songs recording from an audio CD to
on Disc. If the track has started display the stop recording option.
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause playing, the system will restart the Select Stop Recording Song
the track currently playing; press track and begin recording from the to MEM.
again to resume playback. beginning of the track. When the
Renaming Recorded Discs
( REC: Press to record music song recording is completed, the
from a CD or USB drive. message Song Recorded to MEM Discs that have been recorded to
displays, and there may be a slight MEM can be renamed.
DEL: Press to delete the current pause.
track from MEM. 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
Songs recorded to MEM are stored 2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.
FAV (Favorites): Press to display as the current date, disc, and track
MEM favorites. number. 3. Select the disc.
1 to 6: Press to select a track or 4. Select Album or Artist to rename
playlist stored in that numeric Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc either one.
position.
If the disc or track has already been 5. Use the MENU/SELECT knob
Recording from Audio CDs recorded to MEM, the message to enter the character sequence.
The infotainment system can record The Song(s) is Already Recorded See Operation on page 77 for
the current song playing or all songs displays. more information.
from an audio CD to MEM. A status
bar appears on the top of the
display when the recording process
starts and disappears when the
process has ended. Copy protected
CDs cannot be recorded to MEM.
Recording from MP3/WMA Stopping the Recording Playing from MEM

Discs or USB Storage Devices Press the ( REC button while Playing Back a Previously
USB Host Support recording from an MP3/WMA CD Recorded CD
or USB storage device to display Turn the TUNE knob to select a
The USB connector uses the USB
the stop recording option. Select track if MEM is already playing from
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
Stop Recording Song to MEM the previously recorded disc.
USBSupported Devices
Deleting Tracks from MEM 1. Select Recorded Disc List.
. USB Flash Drives
Individual tracks and all tracks can 2. Select the disc.
. Portable USB Hard Drives be deleted from MEM.
Recording to MEM To delete individual tracks, press
and release the DEL button while Searching for a Track
Press ( REC, then select Record the track is playing. Tracks can be searched for by:
Current Song or Record All Songs
on Disc. To delete all tracks from MEM, . Playlists
press and hold the DEL button
The information stored by MEM . Artists
while a track is playing.
is titled according to the ID3 tag . Albums
associated with it.
. Song Titles
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
. Genres
If the disc or track has already been The number of objects in each
recorded to MEM, the message category is shown in parentheses
The Song(s) is Already Recorded after the category.
displays.
To search for tracks: To remove MEM favorites Album: Saves the album
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. categories: associated with the currently playing
1. Press the CONFIG button. track in the indicated favorites
2. Select Search. position.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, 2. Select Radio Settings.
Genre: Saves the genre associated
Song Titles, or Genres. 3. Select MEM Favorites. with the currently playing track in
4. Select the track. The search rate 4. Remove the checkmark from the indicated favorites position.
increases if the MENU/SELECT the box to remove that MEM Creating Playlists
knob is continuously turned favorites category.
while searching in a list. To create a playlist using tracks
Replace the checkmark to re-add stored in MEM:
Shuffle Songs the removed category.
1. Select Playlist from the MEM
Select the Shuffle Songs option Saving MEM Tracks as favorites.
from the MEM menu to randomly Favorites
play back tracks stored in MEM. 2. Select the track to be stored in
Favorites can be saved by the playlist.
Configuring MEM Favorites pressing and holding one of 3. Press and hold one of the
the 1 to 6 buttons. Favorites can be 1 to 6 buttons until the track
During MEM playback, press the
stored according to the following list: can be heard again to store the
FAV button to change between
favorite categories. The favorite Playlist: Adds the currently playing track.
categories are: track to the playlist selected. 4. Repeat Steps 1 though 3 to
. Playlists Artist: Saves the artist associated store additional tracks in the
with the currently playing track in playlist.
. Artists
the indicated favorites position.
. Albums
. Genres
Auxiliary Devices 3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,
and Zunes are compatible with the
(Radio with CD) Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
infotainment system.
the 3.5 mm auxiliary input jack to
The optional AUX input allows
use a portable audio player. Connecting and Controlling
portable devices to connect
to the vehicle using the 3.5 mm Playback of an audio device that is an iPod
(1/8 in) input jack, the USB port, connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary Not all iPods can be controlled by
or Bluetooth wireless technology, input jack can only be controlled the infotainment system.
if equipped. using the controls on the device.
Connecting an iPod
Portable devices are controlled by Adjusting the Volume
using the menu system described in Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Operation on page 77. Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
Searching for a Track
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set Tracks can be searched for by:
on the portable audio device. . Playlists
USB Port . Artists
For vehicles with a USB port, the . Albums
following devices may be connected . Song Titles
and controlled by the infotainment
system. . Podcasts

. iPods . Genres
. PlaysForSure Devices (PFD) . Audiobooks
. USB Drives . Composers
The AUX input is located in the . Zunes
center console.
To search for tracks: Repeat Searching for a Track

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and Tracks can be searched for by:
2. Select Search. set Repeat to On or Off, then press . Playlists
the BACK button to return to the
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, main screen. . Artists
Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, . Albums
Audiobooks, or Composers. On: Repeats the current track.
Off: Playback starts from the . Song Titles
beginning of the current track after . Podcasts
Shuffle the last track finishes.
. Genres
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and Connecting and Controlling a
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On To search for tracks:
PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
or Off, then press the BACK button or Zune 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
to return to the main screen.
Connecting a PFD or Zune 2. Select Search.
On: Plays tracks in the current
folder in random order. Connect the PFD or Zune to the 3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
USB port. Albums, Song Titles, Podcasts,
Off: Plays tracks in the current or Genres.
folder in sequential order.
Shuffle Functionality Connecting and Controlling a Files that do not have any meta
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and USB Drive data stored in the ID3 tag display
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On as Unknown.
The infotainment system can only
or Off. play back .mp3 and .wma files from Tracks can be searched for by:
On: Plays current tracks in random a USB drive. . Playlists*
order. Only the first 10,000 songs are . Artists
Off: Plays current tracks in recognized on the device. . Albums
sequential order. When a device is not supported, the
message No supported data found.
. Song Titles
Repeat Functionality
You can safely disconnect the . Genres
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and device appears.
set Repeat to On or Off.
. Folder View
Connecting a USB Drive *This only displays if a playlist is
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track. Connect the USB drive to the found on the device.
USB port. To search for tracks:
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track Searching for a Track 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
after the last track finishes. It is normal for the search feature 2. Select Search.
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device 3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
due to the amount of information Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
stored. or Folder View.
Shuffle Functionality Connecting a Bluetooth Pairing Information:

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and Device . Up to five devices can be paired
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On Before a Bluetooth device can to the system.
or Off. be connected to the infotainment . The pairing process is disabled
On: Plays current tracks in random system, it must first be paired to the when the vehicle is moving.
order. system. Not all Bluetooth devices
can be paired to the infotainment
. The infotainment system
Off: Plays current tracks in system. Before pairing the Bluetooth automatically links with the first
sequential order. device, become familiar with its available paired device in the
user guide for Bluetooth functions. order the device was paired.
Repeat Functionality
The system only connects to . Only one paired device can be
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and Bluetooth devices that support connected to the infotainment
set Repeat to On or Off. A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution system at a time.
Repeat On: Repeats the current Profile) version 1.2. . Pairing should only need to be
track. A Bluetooth phone with MP3 completed once, unless changes
Repeat Off: Playback starts from capability cannot be paired to the to the pairing information have
the beginning of the current track vehicle as a phone and an MP3 been made or the device is
after the last track finishes. player at the same time. deleted.
Bluetooth Setup Menu To select the Bluetooth Music Setup 4. Some devices may require
The Bluetooth Setup menu can be menu when a Bluetooth device is a Personal Identification
accessed with or without a device connected and active: Number (PIN) in order to
attached to the USB port. 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. complete the pairing process.
Locate the device named
To select the Bluetooth Setup menu 2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup. GMusicConnect in the list on
when a device is attached to the the Bluetooth device and follow
USB port and active: Pairing a Device
the instructions on the device to
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob 1. Select Connect To New Device enter the fourdigit PIN provided
while in the iPod, Zune, PFD, from the Bluetooth Music by the infotainment system.
or USB device main menu. Setup menu.
Connecting to a Device
2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup. 2. The system asks a series of
Yes/No questions to determine Once a device is paired to the
To select the Bluetooth Music Setup what type of device is being infotainment system, it can be
menu when a device is not attached paired. connected to the infotainment
to the USB port, or when a device system.
is attached to the USB port but not 3. After the system determines
what type of Bluetooth device To connect a paired device when
active: no other device is connected to the
is being paired, the Bluetooth
1. Press the AUX button until AUX device will need to be put into infotainment system:
is the active source. discovery mode. 1. Select the Select Device option
2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
3. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
2. Select the new device.
To connect a paired device when Changing the Default PIN Controlling a Bluetooth
another device is connected to the To change the default PIN: Device
infotainment system:
1. Select Change Default PIN Bluetooth devices that support
1. Select the Select Device option from the Bluetooth Music AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote
from the Bluetooth Music Setup menu. Control Profile) version 1.0 may
Setup menu. be able to be controlled by the
2. Select one of the predefined infotainment system.
2. Select the new device. PIN, or select Other to create
3. The active device is a PIN. Press and release g SEEK /
disconnected from the To create a PIN: l SEEK to skip tracks.
system and the new device
is connected. 1. Select the length of the PIN. Other Information
Removing a Device 2. Enter the character sequence. The Bluetooth word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth
1. Select Remove Device from the Messages SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
Bluetooth Music Setup menu. The following messages may by General Motors is under license.
2. Select the device. appear on the infotainment screen. Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
3. The device is removed from the Poor Bluetooth Signal Quality:
system. This message displays when the See Radio Frequency Statement on
Bluetooth signal strength is low. page 1320 for FCC information.
Before connecting to the removed
device again, it will need to paired This Feature is Unavailable While
to the infotainment system. Vehicle is Moving: This message
displays when an action is not
allowed while the vehicle is moving.
Auxiliary Devices (Radio 3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack Connecting and Controlling
with CD/DVD and MEM) Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to an iPod
the 3.5 mm auxiliary input jack to Not all iPods can be controlled by
The optional AUX input allows
use a portable audio player. the infotainment system.
portable devices to be connected
using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack Playback of an audio device that is Connecting an iPod
or the USB port. connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
input jack can only be controlled Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the controls on the device. Selecting a Track
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 77. Adjusting the Volume Using the control buttons:
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the . Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
volume of the infotainment system select the previous or next track.
after the volume level has been set . Turn the TUNE knob to select a
on the portable audio device.
track in the current submenu.
USB Port The track will start to play.
The following devices may be Playing Tracks in Random Order
connected to the USB port and Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
controlled by the infotainment set Shuffle Songs to On or Off.
system.
Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in
. iPods random order.
. USB Mass Storage Devices Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in
The AUX input is located in the
Not all iPods or USB Mass Storage sequential order.
center console.
Devices are compatible with the
infotainment system.
Searching for a Track Connecting and Controlling a Selecting a Track

Tracks can be searched for by: USB Drive Using the control buttons:
. Playlists Files that are not stored in . Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
folders are displayed in the
. Artists select the previous or next track.
root directory (USB).
. Albums . Turn the TUNE knob to select a
Connecting a USB Drive track in the current submenu.
. Song Titles The track will start to play.
Connect the USB drive to the
. Genres USB port. Selecting a track in a different
. Composers Disconnecting a USB Drive folder:
. Audiobooks A USB drive should be ejected from 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
The number of objects in each the USB port before disconnecting 2. Select Folder List.
category is shown in parentheses it. To eject a USB drive:
3. Select the folder.
after the category. 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
To search for tracks: 2. Select USB Eject.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob. Searching for Tracks
Playing Tracks in Random Order
2. Select Search. It is normal for the search feature
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and to take some time to display the
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, then set Shuffle Songs to On. information after reading the device
Albums, Song Titles, Genres, due to the amount of information
Composers, or Audiobooks. stored.
4. Select the track. The search rate Files that do not have any meta
increases if the MENU/SELECT data stored in the ID3 tag display
knob is continuously turned as Unknown.
while searching in a list.
Tracks can be searched by: Rear Seat Before Driving

. Playlists The RSE is for rear seat
Infotainment passengers only. The driver
. Artists
cannot safely view the video
. Albums Rear Seat Entertainment screen while driving.
. Song Titles (RSE) System In severe or extreme weather
. Genres The vehicle may have a DVD Rear conditions the RSE system may not
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. work until the temperature is within
The number of objects in each The RSE system works with the the operating range. The operating
category is shown in parentheses vehicle's infotainment system. range is above 20C (4F)
after the category. and below 60C (140F). If the
The DVD player is part of the
To search for tracks: front radio. The RSE system temperature is outside of this range,
includes a radio with a DVD player, heat or cool the vehicle until it is
two rear seat video display screens, within the operating range.
2. Select Search. audio/video jacks, two wireless
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, headphones, and a remote control.
Song Titles, or Genres. See CD/DVD Player on page 722
or the separate navigation manual
4. Select the track. The search rate for more information on the vehicle's
increases if the MENU/SELECT DVD system.
knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list.
Recording Tracks to MEM
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
Global Off
. Insert a DVD video disc. Headphones
Depending on the infotainment
. Press the Remote Control power
system, the RSE system may button.
have a Global Off feature. . Press the MEM/CD/AUX button
The Global Off feature disables or the k button when a DVD
all RSE system features. Press video disc is in the player.
and hold the radio power button for
more than three seconds for Global . Press the SRC button on the
Off to disable the RSE features. steering wheel when a DVD
A padlock icon may display on video disc is in the player.
the infotainment screen when the . Cycle the ignition.
Global Off feature is on. On some
infotainment systems, the Global
Off feature can be turned off by
performing one of the following: A. Battery cover
. Press and hold the radio B. Channel 1 or 2 switch
power button for more than C. Power button
three seconds.
D. Volume control
. Insert or eject any disc.
E. Power indicator light
RSE includes two 2-channel Infrared transmitters are on the Notice: Do not store the
wireless headphones. Channel 1 top of the left seatback video headphones in heat or direct
is dedicated to the DVD player, screen. The headphones shut off sunlight. This could damage
and Channel 2 is dedicated to automatically to save the battery the headphones and repairs will
RSA selections. The headphones power if the RSE system and RSA not be covered by the warranty.
are used to listen to various are shut off or if the headphones are Storage in extreme cold can
multimedia. If the vehicle is not out of range of the transmitters for weaken the batteries. Keep the
equipped with RSA, then Channel 2 more than three minutes. Moving too headphones stored in a cool,
is dedicated to any external auxiliary far forward or stepping out of the dry place.
device connected to the rear A/V vehicle can cause the headphones If the foam ear pads attached to
jacks. The wireless headphones to lose the signal or have static. the headphones become worn or
have an On/Off button, Channel 1 To adjust the volume on the damaged, the pads can be replaced
or 2 switch, and a volume control. headphones, use the volume separately from the headphone set.
Turn the headphones off when not control. To purchase replacement ear pads,
in use. call 18882933332, then prompt
For best audio performance, the
Push the On/Off button to turn headphones must be worn correctly, zero (0), or contact your dealer.
on the headphones. A light on with the headband over the top of
the headphones comes on. If the the head. L (Left) and R (Right)
light does not come on, check the are above the ear pads and
batteries. Intermittent sound or static are indicators as to how the
can also indicate weak batteries. headphones should be placed
See Battery Replacement later in on the head.
this section for more information.
Battery Replacement Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks Changing the Source on the Video
To change the batteries: Display Screens
The A/V jacks may be located
1. Loosen the screw to the battery on the rear of the floor console. The image from the auxiliary device
door located on the left side of They allow audio or video cables can be switched between the video
the headphones. to be connected from an auxiliary display screens.
device such as a camcorder or a To change the display:
2. Slide the battery door open. video game system.
3. Replace the two AAA batteries. 1. Press the AUX button on the
The A/V jacks are color coded: remote control to change the
4. Replace the battery door and . Yellow for video input. source of both video screens
tighten the screw. from the DVD player to the
. White for left audio input.
Remove the batteries if the auxiliary device.
headphones are not going to be
. Red for right audio input.
2. Press the AUX button a second
used for a long period of time. Power for auxiliary devices is not time to change the left video
supplied by the radio system. screen source to the DVD player
To use the auxiliary inputs of the and the right video screen to the
RSE system: auxiliary device.
1. Connect the auxiliary device

cables to the A/V jacks.
2. Power on both the auxiliary
device and the RSE video
screen.
3. Press the AUX button a third Audio Output Audio can be heard from the wired
time to change the left video headphone jacks on the RSA
Audio from the DVD player or
screen source to the auxiliary system by selecting the desired
auxiliary inputs can be heard
device and the right video source from the RSA system,
through the following:
screen to the DVD player. if the vehicle has this feature.
. Wireless headphones
4. Press the AUX button a fourth The front seat passengers are able
time to change the source of . Vehicle speakers to listen to playback from the A/V
both video screens to the DVD . Vehicle wired headphone jacks jacks through the vehicle speakers
player. on the rear seat audio system, by selecting Rear A/V as the source
if the vehicle has this feature. on the radio.
Changing the RSE Video Screen
Settings The RSE system transmits the
The screen display mode, audio signal to the wireless
brightness, and language can headphones if an audio signal is
be changed from the setup available. See Headphones earlier
menu using the remote control. in this section for more information.
To change a setting:
1. Press z.
2. Use n, q, p, o, and r to
select the settings.
3. Press z again to exit the
setup menu.
Video Screens Push the video screen down into its Video Screen Input Jack
locked position when it is not in use.
The video screens are located Each video screen is equipped
The screen turns off automatically.
in the back of the driver and front with a video input jack to allow
passenger seats. Only the left RSE seatback console video cables to be connected
contains the infrared transmitters for from an auxiliary device such as
the wireless headphones. They may a camcorder or a video game
be visible as eight illuminated LEDs. system. This signal will override
These LEDs are not on the right any video provided by the RSE
video screen. Both seatback system; either the DVD or Auxiliary
consoles contain an infrared A/V jack source. The RSE system
receiver for the remote control. must be on for this input to operate.
They are located at the top of
each console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching
the video screen, as damage may
occur. See Cleaning the Video
Screen later in this section for
To use the video screen: more information.
1. Push the release button located
on the seatback console.
2. Move the screen to the desired
viewing position.
Remote Control See Battery Replacement later in Remote Control Buttons

this section. Objects blocking the O (Power): Press to turn the video
line of sight could also affect the screens on and off.
function of the remote control.
If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the
P (Illumination): Press to turn
the remote control backlight on.
Radio DVD slot, the remote control The backlight times out after several
O button can be used to turn on seconds if no other button is
the video screen display and start pressed.
the disc. The infotainment system
can also turn on the video screen v (Title): Press to return to
display. See CD/DVD Player on the main menu of the DVD. This
page 722 or the separate function could vary for each disc.
navigation manual for more y (Main Menu): Press to access
information. the DVD menu. The DVD menu is
To use the remote control, aim it Notice: Storing the remote different on every DVD. Use the
at the transmitter window at either control in a hot area or in direct navigation arrows to move the
seatback console and press the sunlight can damage it, and the cursor. After making a selection
button. Direct sunlight or very bright repairs will not be covered by press the enter button. This button
light could affect the ability of the the warranty. Storage in extreme only operates when using a DVD.
RSE transmitter to receive signals cold can weaken the batteries. n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation
from the remote control. Check Keep the remote control stored Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
the batteries if the remote control in a cool, dry place. navigate through a menu.
does not seem to be working.
r (Enter): Press to select the
highlighted choice in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press to t (Previous Track/Chapter): [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast

adjust the brightness and screen Press to go to the start of the forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast
display mode, and display the current track or chapter. Press forwarding a DVD video, press s.
language menu. again to go to the previous track To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
q (Return): Press to exit the or chapter. This button may not
or CD, release [. This button might
current active menu and return to work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the not work when the DVD is playing
the previous menu. This button the copyright information or the
operates only when the display previews.
previews.
menu or a DVD menu is active. u (Next Track/Chapter): Press e (Audio): Press to change audio
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, to go to the beginning of the next
chapter or track. This button might tracks on DVDs that have this
rewinding, or fast forwarding a feature when the DVD is playing.
DVD. Press twice to return to not work when the DVD is playing
the beginning of the DVD. the copyright information or the { (Subtitles): Press to turn
previews. ON/OFF subtitles and to move
s (Play/Pause): Press to start
r (Fast Reverse): Press to through subtitle options when a
playing a DVD. Press to pause a DVD is playing.
DVD while it is playing. Press again quickly reverse the DVD or CD.
to continue playing. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch
press s. To stop fast reversing the video displays between the DVD
Depending on the infotainment player and an auxiliary source.
system in the vehicle, DVD a DVD audio or CD, release r.
playback may be slowed down This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright
by pressing s then [. Reverse
information or the previews.
slow play by pressing s then r.
Press s again to cancel slow play.
The AUX button also controls the \ (Clear) (If Available): Press Battery Replacement
source display between the left and this button within three seconds To change the remote control
right video screens as described in after inputting a numeric selection, batteries:
the table below: to clear all numeric inputs.
1. Slide back the rear cover on the
Aux Left Right } 10 (Double Digit Entries) remote control.
Button Screen Screen (If Available): Press this button
to select chapter or track numbers 2. Replace the two batteries in the
Press compartment.
greater than 9. Press this button
Default before inputting the number. 3. Replace the battery cover.
DVD DVD
State (No
Media Media 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): Remove the batteries from the
Press)
The numbered keypad provides the remote control if unused for an
First Aux Video Aux Video capability of direct chapter or track extended period of time.
Press Source Source number selection.
Second DVD Aux Video Replacing the Remote Control
Press Media Source
If the remote control becomes
Third Aux Video DVD lost or damaged, a new universal
Press Source Media remote control can be purchased.
Return to Return to Use a Toshiba code set for
Fourth replacement universal remote
Default Default
Press controls.
State State
2 (Camera): Press to change the

camera angle on DVDs that have
this feature when the DVD is
playing.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action
No power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by
borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
looks stretched out.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the
remote control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or
installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push Play but sometimes If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player
the DVD starts where I left off and sometimes at the resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the
beginning. stop button was pressed two times, the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.)

Problem Recommended Action
The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary
sound. source mode by pressing the AUX button on the remote
control.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,
buzzes. and interference from cellular telephone towers or by
using a cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on correctly using the
L (left) and R (right) on the headphones.
Check that the headphones are positioned properly with
the headband across the top of the head.
I lost the remote and/or the headphones. See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD
player by pressing the AUX button on the remote
control.
DVD Display Error Messages DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
The DVD display error message Video distortion can occur when System
depends on which radio the vehicle operating cellular phones, scanners,
Vehicles with this feature allow
has. The video screen may display CB radios, Global Position Systems
the rear seat passengers to listen
one of the following: (GPSs)*, two-way radios, mobile
to and control any of the music
Disc Load/Eject Error or faxes, or walkie talkies.
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other
Mechanical Error: There are It might be necessary to turn off the auxiliary sources. RSA can only
disc load or eject problems. DVD player when operating one of control music sources that the front
Disc Format Error or Unknown these devices in or near the vehicle. seat passengers are not listening to,
Format: The disc is inserted with *Excludes the OnStar System. except on radios where dual control
the disc label wrong side up, or the is allowed.
disc is damaged. Cleaning the RSE Seatback RSA can function when the front
Console
Disc Region Error or Disc Error: radio is off. X displays on the
The disc is not from a correct Use only a clean cloth dampened infotainment system when RSA
region. with clean water to clean the RSE is on.
seatback console surface.
No Disc Inserted: No disc is Audio can be heard through
present when the Y or MEM/CD/ Cleaning the Video Screens wired headphones (not included)
AUX button is pressed on the radio. plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
Use only a clean cloth dampened
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat
with clean water. Use care when
Entertainment system with wireless
touching or cleaning the screens
headphones, audio can also be
as damage could result.
heard on Channel 2 of the wireless
headphones.
To listen to a portable audio SRCE (Source): Press to select While listening to a disc, press to
device through the RSA, attach between the radio, CD, and if these go to the next track or chapter on
the portable audio device to either features are available: DVD, front
the disc. Press to go back to the
the front or rear auxiliary input, or rear auxiliary, HDD, USB. The
if available. Turn the device on, front radio may override the rear start of the current track or chapter if
then choose the front auxiliary selection as required. more than ten seconds have played.
input with the RSA SRCE button. If the front seat passengers are
(Seek): While listening to the listening to a disc, this function may
radio, press to go to the previous or be inactive on some radios. Press
to the next station and stay there. and hold or to fast reverse or
If the front seat passengers are
fast forward.
listening to the radio, this function
may be inactive on some radios. When a DVD video menu is being
displayed, press or to cursor up
Press and hold or until Tune
or down on the menu. Hold or to
displays. Continue to press or to
cursor left or right on the menu.
tune to an individual station. Tune
stays active until or has not PROG (Program): Press to go
to the next preset radio station or
P (Power): Press to turn the RSA been pressed for several seconds.
channel set on the main radio. If the
on or off. If the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio, this function front seat passengers are listening
Volume: Turn to increase or may be inactive on some radios. to the radio, this function may be
decrease the volume of the wired inactive on some radios.
headphones. The left knob controls
the left headphones and the right
knob controls the right. Use the
volume control on the headphones
for wireless headphones.
When a CD or DVD audio disc is

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
playing, press PROG to go to the
Phone The system may not work with
beginning of the disc or display disc all cell phones. See Pairing a
info. If the front seat passengers are Bluetooth (Overview) Phone in this section for more
listening to a disc, this function may For vehicles equipped with information.
be inactive on some radios. Bluetooth capability, the system . If the cell phone has voice
When a disc is playing in the CD can interact with many cell phones, dialing capability, learn to use
or DVD changer, press and hold allowing: that feature to access the
PROG to select the next disc, . Placement and receipt of calls in address book or contact list.
if multiple discs are loaded. If the a hands-free mode. See Voice Pass-Thru in this
front seat passengers are listening section for more information.
to a disc, this function may be
. Sharing of the cell phones
address book or contact list
. See Storing and Deleting Phone
inactive on some radios. Numbers in this section for
with the vehicle.
The PROG button may be used to more information.
access the menu of an MP3. Once To minimize driver distraction,
in the menu, use or to make
before driving, and with the vehicle
parked:
{ WARNING
selections.
. Become familiar with the When using a cell phone, it can
When a DVD video menu is features of the cell phone. be distracting to look too long
displayed, press PROG, or press Organize the phone book and or too often at the screen of
and hold PROG to perform the contact lists clearly and delete the phone or the infotainment
menu function, then press ENTER. duplicate or rarely used entries. (navigation) system. Taking
If possible, program speed dial your eyes off the road too long
or other shortcuts. or too often could cause a crash
. Review the controls and resulting in injury or death.
operation of the infotainment Focus your attention on driving.
system.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system $ i (End Call/Mute): Press to Audio System

can use a Bluetoothcapable cell end a call, reject a call, or cancel When using the Bluetooth system,
phone with a HandsFree Profile an operation. sound comes through the vehicle's
to make and receive phone calls.
Infotainment System Controls front audio system speakers
The infotainment system and voice
and overrides the audio system.
recognition are used to control For information about how to
the system. The system can Use the VOL/ O knob during a
navigate the menu system using the
be used while in ON/RUN or infotainment controls, see Operation call to change the volume level.
ACC/ACCESSORY. The range on page 77. The adjusted volume level remains
of the Bluetooth system can be in memory for later calls. The
up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones 5 / > PHONE: Press to enter the system maintains a minimum
support all functions and not all Phone main menu. volume level.
phones work with the Bluetooth Voice Recognition Other Information
system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
for more information about The voice recognition system uses The Bluetooth word mark and
compatible phones. commands to control the system logos are owned by the Bluetooth
and dial phone numbers. SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
Bluetooth Controls by General Motors is under license.
Noise: The system may not
Use the buttons located on the recognize voice commands if there Other trademarks and trade names
infotainment system and the is too much background noise. are those of their respective owners.
steering wheel to operate the See Radio Frequency
When to Speak: A tone sounds to
Bluetooth system. Statement on page 1320
indicate that the system is ready for
Steering Wheel Controls a voice command. Wait for the tone for Federal Communications
and then speak. Commission and Industry
b g (Push To Talk): Press to Canada Standards information.
answer incoming calls, confirm How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
system information, and start calm and natural voice.
voice recognition.
Bluetooth (Infotainment The pairing process can be started Pairing a Phone

by using the voice recognition
Controls) system or the controls on the
For information about how to infotainment system. 2. Select Phone Settings.
navigate the menu system using the Pairing Information: 3. Select Bluetooth.
infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 77. . Up to five cell phones can be 4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
paired to the Bluetooth system. A fourdigit Personal
Pairing Identification Number (PIN)
. The pairing process is disabled appears on the display.
A Bluetoothenabled cell phone when the vehicle is moving.
must be paired to the Bluetooth 5. Start the pairing process on the
system first and then connected to
. The Bluetooth system links with cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle before it can be used. the first available paired cell the vehicle. Reference the cell
See the cell phone manufacturer's phone in the order the phone phone manufacturer's user guide
user guide for Bluetooth functions was paired. for information on this process.
before pairing the cell phone. If a . Only one paired cell phone can Locate the device named Your
Bluetooth phone is not connected, be connected to the Bluetooth Vehicle in the list on the cell
calls will be made using OnStar system at a time. phone and follow the instructions
HandsFree Calling, if available. . Pairing should only need to be on the cell phone to enter the
Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide completed once, unless changes PIN provided by the system.
for more information. to the pairing information have 6. The system prompts for a name
A Bluetooth phone with MP3 been made or the phone is for the phone and confirms the
capability cannot be connected to deleted. name provided. This name is
the vehicle as a phone and an MP3 To link to a different paired phone, used to indicate which phone is
player at the same time. see Linking to a Different Phone connected.
later in this section.
7. The system responds with Linking to a Different Phone Making a Call Using
<Phone name> has been To link to a different phone, the new Phone Book
successfully paired after the phone must be in the vehicle and
pairing process is complete. For cell phones that support the
available to be connected to the phone book feature, the Bluetooth
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair Bluetooth system before the system can use the contacts stored
additional phones. process is started. on your cell phone to make calls.
Listing All Paired and Connected 1. Press the CONFIG button. See your cell phone's owner's guide
Phones or contact your wireless provider to
2. Select Phone Settings. find out if this feature is supported
1. Press the CONFIG button. 3. Select Bluetooth. by your phone.
2. Select Phone Settings. 4. Select Device List. When a cell phone supports the
3. Select Bluetooth. phone book feature, the Phone
5. Select the new phone to link
Book and Call Lists menus are
4. Select Device List. to and follow the on screen
automatically available.
prompts.
Deleting a Paired Phone The Phone Book menu allows you
If delete is selected, the
1. Press the CONFIG button. to access the phone book stored in
highlighted phone will be
the cell phone to make a call.
2. Select Phone Settings. deleted.
The Call Lists menu allows you to
3. Select Bluetooth. access the phone numbers from the
4. Select Device List. Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and
Missed Calls menus on your cell
5. Select the phone to delete and
phone to make a call.
follow the on screen prompts.
Radio with CD Radio with CD/DVD and MEM Making a Call

To make a call using the Phone 1. Press the 5 / > button. Radio with CD
Book menu:
2. Select Phone Book. 1. Press the 5 / > button twice.
1. Press the 5 / > button twice. 3. Search through the list by 2. Enter the character sequence.
2. Select Phone Book. selecting the letter group the See Entering a Character
3. Search through the list by phone book entry begins with, Sequence in Operation on
selecting the letter group the or press the SELECT button page 77 for more information.
phone book entry begins with, to scroll through the entire
list of names/numbers in the 3. Select Call to start dialing the
or press the SELECT button number.
to scroll through the entire phone book.
list of names/numbers in the 4. Select the name or number you Radio with CD/DVD and MEM
phone book. want to call. 1. Press the 5 / > button.
4. Select the name or number you To make a call using the Call
2. Select Enter number.
want to call. Lists menu:
3. Enter the character sequence.
To make a call using the Call 1. Press the 5 / > button. See Entering a Character
Lists menu:
2. Select Call Lists. Sequence in Operation on
1. Press the 5 / > button twice. 3. Select the Incoming Calls,
2. Select Call Lists. Outgoing Calls, or Missed 4. Select Call to start dialing the
Calls list. number.
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
Outgoing Calls, or Missed 4. Select the name or number you
Calls list. want to call.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
Accepting or Declining a Call Accepting a Call To start a conference while in a

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to current call:
When an incoming call is received,
the infotainment system mutes and Answer and press the MENU/ 1. Turn or press the
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. SELECT knob to accept the call. MENU/SELECT knob.
Accepting a Call Declining a Call 2. Select Enter Number.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to 3. Enter the character sequence
Answer and press the MENU/ Decline and press the MENU/ then select Call. See Entering
SELECT knob to accept the call. SELECT knob to decline the call. a Character Sequence in
Declining a Call Switching Between Calls more information.
(Call Waiting Calls Only)
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to 4. After the call has been
Decline and press the MENU/ To switch between calls: placed, turn or press the
SELECT knob to decline the call. 1. Turn or press the MENU/SELECT knob and
Call Waiting MENU/SELECT knob. choose Merge Calls.
2. Select Switch Call from 5. To add more callers to the
Call waiting must be supported on
the menu. conference call, repeat Steps 1
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
through 4. The number of callers
the wireless service carrier to work. Conference Calling that can be added is limited by
Conference calling and threeway your wireless service carrier.
calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
Ending a Call Bluetooth (Voice Pairing

Turn or press the MENU/SELECT Recognition) A Bluetooth cell phone must be
knob and select Hang Up. paired to the Bluetooth system and
Using Voice Recognition then connected to the vehicle before
Muting a Call it can be used. See your cell phone
To use voice recognition, press
To Mute a Call the b g button located on the manufacturer's user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT steering wheel. The system
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
knob and select Mute Call. responds differently depending
is not connected, calls will be made
on what kind of infotainment
To Cancel Mute using OnStar HandsFree Calling,
system the vehicle has.
if available. Refer to the OnStar
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT For vehicles without a navigation Owner's Guide for more information.
knob and select Mute Call. system, the system responds
Ready, followed by a tone. Pairing Information
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
After the tone, say a command. A Bluetooth phone with MP3
(DTMF) Tones
For vehicles with a navigation capability cannot be paired to the
The invehicle Bluetooth system can vehicle as a phone and an MP3
system, the system responds with
send numbers during a call. This is player at the same time.
a tone. After the tone say Hands
used when calling a menudriven
Free to use the Bluetooth voice . Up to five cell phones can be
phone system.
recognition system. The system paired to the Bluetooth system.
1. Turn or press the MENU/ then responds with Ready,
SELECT knob and select
. The pairing process is disabled
followed by a tone. After the
Enter Number. when the vehicle is moving.
tone, say a command.
2. Enter the character sequence.
. Pairing only needs to be
For additional information say
See Entering a Character completed once, unless the
Help while you are in a voice
Sequence in Operation on pairing information on the cell
recognition menu.
page 77 for more information. phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone can 4. Start the pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected
be connected to the Bluetooth cell phone that you want to pair. Phones
system at a time. For help with this process, see The system can list all cell phones
. If multiple paired cell phones your cell phone manufacturer's paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
are within range of the system, user guide. also connected to the vehicle, the
the system connects to the first 5. Locate the device named Your system responds with is connected
available paired cell phone in Vehicle in the list on the cell after that phone name.
the order that they were first phone. Follow the instructions
paired to the system. To link on the cell phone to enter the 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
to a different paired phone, see PIN that was provided in Step 3. navigation system, say Hands
Linking to a Different Phone After the PIN is successfully Free, after the tone.
later in this section. entered, the system prompts you 2. Say Bluetooth.
Pairing a Phone to provide a name for the paired
cell phone. This name will be 3. Say List.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a used to indicate which phones Deleting a Paired Phone
navigation system, say Hands are paired and connected to the
vehicle. See Listing All Paired If the phone name you want to
Free, after the tone.
and Connected Phones later in delete is unknown, see Listing All
2. Say Bluetooth. Paired and Connected Phones.
this section for more information.
3. Say Pair. The system responds 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
with instructions and a fourdigit navigation system, say Hands
additional phones.
Personal Identification Number Free, after the tone.
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
2. Say Bluetooth.
3. Say Delete. The system asks
for which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone Using the Store Command
To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to navigation system, say Hands
next available cell phone in the 30 phone numbers as name tags Free, after the tone.
order in which all the available cell in the HandsFree Directory that is
phones were paired. Depending 2. Say Store.
shared between the Bluetooth and
on which cell phone you want to OnStar systems. 3. Say the phone number or group
connect to, you may have to use of numbers you want to store all
this command several times. The following commands are used
at once with no pauses, then
delete and store phone numbers.
follow the directions given by the
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a Store: This command will store system to save a name tag for
navigation system, say Hands a phone number, or a group of this number.
Free, after the tone. numbers as a name tag.
2. Say Bluetooth. Using the Digit Store Command
Digit Store: This command allows
3. Say Change phone. a phone number to be stored as a If an unwanted number is
name tag by entering the digits one recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is Clear at any time to clear the
at a time.
found, the response will be last number.
<Phone name> is now Delete: This command is used to
connected. delete individual name tags. To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is not Delete All Name Tags: This Verify at any time.
found, the original phone command deletes all stored name
remains connected. tags in the HandsFree Calling 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
Directory and the Destinations navigation system, say Hands
Directory. Free, after the tone.
2. Say Digit Store.
3. Say each digit, one at a time, Using the Delete All Name Tags Making a Call
that you want to store. After Command
Calls can be made using the
each digit is entered, the system This command deletes all stored following commands.
repeats back the digit it heard name tags in the Hands Free
followed by a tone. After the Dial or Call: The dial or
Calling Directory and the
last digit has been entered, call command can be used
Destinations Directory.
say Store, and then follow the interchangeably to dial a phone
directions given by the system to To delete all name tags: number or a stored name tag.
save a name tag for this number.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with Digit Dial: This command allows
Using the Delete Command a navigation system, say a phone number to be dialed by
HandsFree, after the tone. entering the digits one at a time.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
2. Say Delete all name tags. Redial: This command is used to
navigation system, say Hands
dial the last number used on the cell
Free, after the tone. Listing Stored Numbers phone.
2. Say Delete. The list command will list all the Using the Dial or Call
3. Say the name tag you want to stored numbers and name tags. Command
delete.
Using the List Command 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
1. Press b g. For vehicles with navigation system, say Hands
a navigation system, say Free, after the tone.
HandsFree, after the tone. 2. Say Dial or Call.
2. Say Directory. 3. Say the entire number without
3. Say Hands Free Calling. pausing or say the name tag.
4. Say List. Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Using the Digit Dial Command Once connected, the person called Call Waiting
The digit dial command allows a will be heard through the audio
Call waiting must be supported on
phone number to be dialed by speakers.
the cell phone and enabled by the
entering the digits one at a time. Using the Redial Command wireless service carrier.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it 1. Press b g. For vehicles with a . Press b g to answer an
heard followed by a tone. navigation system, say Hands incoming call when another call
Free, after the tone. is active. The original call is
If an unwanted number is placed on hold.
recognized by the system, say 2. After the tone, say Redial.
Clear at any time to clear the Once connected, the person called
. Press b g again to return to the
last number. will be heard through the audio original call.
To hear all of the numbers speakers. . To ignore the incoming call, no
recognized by the system, action is required.
say Verify at any time.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, . Press 0 c to disconnect the
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a the audio system mutes and a ring current call and switch to the call
navigation system, say Hands tone is heard in the vehicle. on hold.
2. Say Digit Dial.
. Press b g to answer the call.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
. Press 0 c to ignore a call.
that you want to dial. After each
digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the
last digit has been entered,
say Dial.
ThreeWay Calling Muting a Call To Transfer Audio from the

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Threeway calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside
supported on the cell phone and the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in the
enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call vehicle:
carrier. cannot hear them.
1. Press b g.
1. While on a call, press b g. To mute a call, press b g, and then 2. Say Transfer Call.
2. Say Threeway call. say Mute Call.
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
3. Use the dial or call command to To cancel mute, press b g, and System from a Cell Phone
dial the number of the third party then say Unmute Call.
During a call with the audio on the
to be called.
Transferring a Call cell phone, press b g. The audio
4. Once the call is connected, transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
Audio can be transferred between
press b g to link all callers the Bluetooth system and the cell does not transfer to the vehicle,
together. phone. use the audio transfer feature on
the cell phone. See your cell phone
Ending a Call The cell phone must be paired manufacturer's user guide for more
and connected with the Bluetooth information.
Press 0 c to end a call. system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System

Voice passthru allows access to (DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out
the voice recognition commands on The Bluetooth system can send of the invehicle Bluetooth system,
the cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored it will be retained indefinitely.
manufacturer's user guide to see if as name tags during a call. You This includes all saved name tags in
the cell phone supports this feature. can use this feature when calling the phone book and phone pairing
To access contacts stored in the cell a menudriven phone system. information. For information on how
phone: Account numbers can also be to delete this information, see the
stored for use. previous sections on Deleting a
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a Paired Phone and Deleting
Sending a Number or Name Tag Name Tags.
navigation system, say Hands
During a Call
2. Say Bluetooth. The system 1. Press b g. The system
responds Bluetooth ready, responds Ready, followed
followed by a tone. by a tone.
3. Say Voice. The system 2. Say Dial.
responds OK, accessing 3. Say the number or name tag
<phone name>. to send.
The cell phone's normal prompt
messages will go through their cycle
according to the phone's operating.
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
Dual Automatic Climate Control
this system.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Rear Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
A. Fan Control G. Driver and Passenger

B. Power Temperature Controls
C. AUTO (Automatic Operation) H. Driver and Passenger Heated

and Ventilated Seats
D. ZONE
I. Air Conditioning
E. Defrost
J. Recirculation
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
K. Outside Air
L. Rear Window Defogger
8-2 Climate Controls
Automatic Operation Q / R (Driver and Passenger H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):

The system automatically controls Temperature Controls): The Press to change the direction of the
the fan speed, air delivery, air temperature can be adjusted airflow. The current mode appears
conditioning and recirculation in separately for the driver and the in the display screen. Changing
order to heat or cool the vehicle passenger. Press to increase or the mode cancels the automatic
to the desired temperature. decrease the temperature. operation and the system goes
ZONE: Press to link all climate into manual mode. Press AUTO
When the indicator light is on, to return to automatic operation.
the system is in full automatic zone settings to the driver settings.
operation. If the air delivery mode The ZONE indicator light turns off. To change the current mode, select
or fan setting is manually adjusted, When the passenger settings are one of the following:
the auto indicator turns off and adjusted, the ZONE indicator light Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
displays will show the selected is on. instrument panel outlets.
settings. Manual Operation \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
To place the system in automatic O (Power): Press to turn the between the instrument panel
mode do the following: climate control system on or off. outlets and the floor outlets.
1. Press AUTO. h i (Fan Control): Press to C (TriLevel): Air is divided
2. Set the temperature. Allow increase or decrease the fan between the windshield, instrument
the system time to stabilize. speed. Pressing either button panel, and floor outlets.
Then adjust the temperature cancels automatic operation and [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
as needed for best comfort. the system goes into manual mode. floor outlets.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
English units can be changed
operation.
to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
page 542.
- (Defog): Clears the windows of h (Recirculation): Press to turn Auto Defog: The climate control
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the on recirculation. An indicator light system may have a sensor to
windshield and floor outlets. comes on. Air is recirculated to automatically detect high humidity
quickly cool the inside of the vehicle inside the vehicle. When high
8 (Upper): Air is directed to the or prevent outside air and odors humidity is detected, the climate
windshield outlets. control system may adjust to
from entering.
7 (Hi-Level): Air is divided Automatic Air Recirculation:
outside air supply and turn on the
between the windshield and air conditioner. If the climate control
instrument panel outlets. When the AUTO indicator light system does not detect possible
is on, the air is automatically window fogging, it returns to normal
0 (Defrost): Clears the recirculated as needed to help operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
windshield of fog or frost more quickly cool the inside of the on, see Climate and Air Quality
quickly. Air is directed to the vehicle. under Vehicle Personalization on
windshield.
The climate control system may page 542.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to have a sensor to detect air pollution. % (Outside Air): Press to turn
turn the automatic air conditioning In auto recirculation control, the Air on outside air. An indicator light
on or off. If the fan is turned off or Quality Control system may operate. comes on. Outside air is circulated
the outside temperature falls below To adjust the sensitivity of the Air through the vehicle.
freezing, the air conditioner will Quality Control, see Climate
not run. and Air Quality under Vehicle
Press AUTO to return to automatic Personalization on page 542.
operation and the air conditioner
runs as needed. When the indicator
light is on, the air conditioner runs
automatically to cool the air inside
the vehicle or to dry the air needed
to defog the windshield faster.
Rear Window Defogger The heated outside rearview mirrors Remote Start Climate Control
turn on when the rear window Operation: For vehicles with the
= (Rear Window Defogger): defogger button is on and help to remote vehicle start feature, the
Press to turn the rear window
clear fog or frost from the surface climate control system may run
defogger on or off.
of the mirrors. See Heated Mirrors when the vehicle is started remotely.
The rear window defogger on page 222. The system uses the driver's
turns off automatically after about previous settings to heat or cool the
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
10 minutes. If turned on again it inside of the vehicle. See Remote
or other material from the inside
runs for about five minutes before Vehicle Start on page 210.
of the front windshield and rear
turning off. At higher speeds, the
window with a razor blade or The rear window defogger turns on
rear window defogger may stay on
anything else that is sharp. if it is cold outside.
continuously.
This may damage the rear
The rear window defogger can window defogger grid and Sensors
be set to automatic operation. affect your radio's ability to The solar sensor, located on top
See Climate and Air Quality pick up stations clearly. The of the instrument panel near the
under Vehicle Personalization on repairs wouldn't be covered windshield, monitors the solar heat.
page 542. When Auto Rear by your warranty.
Defog is selected, the rear window The climate control system
Heated and Ventilated Seats: uses the sensor information to
defogger turns on automatically
Press to heat or ventilate the seat. adjust the temperature, fan speed,
when the interior temperature is
See Heated and Ventilated Front recirculation, and air delivery mode
cold and the outside temperature
Seats on page 311. for best comfort.
is about 40F and below. The auto
rear defogger turns off automatically If the sensor is covered, the
after about 10 minutes. At higher automatic climate control system
speeds, the rear window defogger may not work properly.
may stay on continuously.
Rear Climate Control System Press the ZONE button on the front
climate control system to turn off
For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they are the rear blower and match the rear
integrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console. settings to the front. The ZONE
indicator light and rear climate
control display will turn off.
The rear climate control can be
turned off by pressing i.
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the
rear controls.
The front climate control system
must be on for the rear climate
control to work. To turn on the rear
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls climate control from rear seating,
press any rear climate control
button.
A. Fan Control ZONE: When the rear climate
control is turned on from the rear, The rear climate control will not
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
the ZONE indicator light will turn on. work if the front climate control
C. Temperature Control system is in defrost.
Automatic Operation Air Vents Maintenance

AUTO: Press N until the AUTO Move the sliding knob on the air
setting is selected to control the rear outlets up and down or left and Passenger Compartment
temperature, air delivery, and fan right to direct the airflow. Use the Air Filter
speed automatically. thumbwheels near the air outlets
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
Manual Operation to open or close off the airflow.
other airborne irritants from outside
h i (Fan Control): Press Operation Tips air that is pulled into the vehicle.
these buttons on the rear seat . Clear away any ice, snow, The filter should be replaced as part
audio control panel to increase or leaves from air inlets at the of routine scheduled maintenance.
or decrease the airflow. base of the windshield that could To find out what type of filter to use,
Pressing h when the system block the flow of air into the see Maintenance Replacement
is off will turn the system on. vehicle. Parts on page 119.
The air delivery mode remains . Keep the path under the front 1. Open the glove box completely
in its previous setting. seats clear of objects to help and remove the four screws
/+ (Temperature Control): circulate the air inside the along the upper portion of the
Press these buttons to adjust the vehicle more effectively. glove box.
temperature of the air flowing into . Use of nonGM approved hood 2. When released, lower the upper
the passenger area. Press + for deflectors can adversely affect portion of the glove box.
warmer air and press for the performance of the system.
cooler air. 3. Locate the service door for the
Check with your dealer before passenger compartment air filter.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control): adding equipment to the outside
Press the mode button to change of the vehicle.
the direction of the airflow. Multiple
presses will cycle through the
delivery selections.
4. Release the two latches holding 5. Remove the old air filter.
the service door. Lower the 6. Install the new air filter.
service door.
7. Close the service door and
latches.
8. Reinstall the upper portion of the
glove box.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
Operating Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
9-23
9-24
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . .
9-34
9-36
Parking Over Things Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-37
Driving Information That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-37
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust Cruise Control
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Object Detection Systems
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-40
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Automatic Transmission Rear Vision
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-26 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Fuel
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Drive Systems Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-48
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Brakes California Fuel
Starting and Operating Antilock Brake Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-49
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-50
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-34 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Starting the Gasoline Filling a Portable Fuel
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9-2 Driving and Operating
Towing Driving Information

General Towing WARNING (Continued)
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Driving Characteristics and Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 collisions resulting in injury or
Defensive driving means always
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 expect the unexpected. The first possible death. These simple
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 step in driving defensively is to wear defensive driving techniques
Trailer Sway the safety belt. See Safety Belts on could save your life.
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62 page 315.
Conversions and Add-Ons Drunk Driving
Add-On Electrical { WARNING
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Assume that other road users { WARNING
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is
drivers) are going to be careless very dangerous. Your reflexes,
and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness,
what they might do and be ready. and judgment can be affected by
In addition: even a small amount of alcohol.
. Allow enough following You can have a serious or
distance between you and even fatal collision if you
the driver in front of you. drive after drinking.
. Focus on the task of driving. Do not drink and drive or ride with
(Continued) a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with For persons under 21, it is against Control of a Vehicle
drinking and driving is a global the law in every U.S. state to drink
tragedy. alcohol. There are good medical, The following three systems
psychological, and developmental help to control the vehicle while
Alcohol affects four things that driving brakes, steering, and
anyone needs to drive a vehicle: reasons for these laws.
accelerator. At times, as when
judgment, muscular coordination, The obvious way to eliminate the driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
vision, and attentiveness. leading highway safety problem is ask more of those control systems
Police records show that for people never to drink alcohol than the tires and road can provide.
almost 40 percent of all motor and then drive. Meaning, you can lose control of
vehicle-related deaths involve Medical research shows that the vehicle. See Traction Control
alcohol. In most cases, these alcohol in a person's system System (TCS) on page 934 and
deaths are the result of someone can make crash injuries worse, StabiliTrak System on page 936.
who was drinking and driving. especially injuries to the brain, Adding nondealer accessories
In recent years, more than spinal cord, or heart. This means can affect vehicle performance.
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related that when anyone who has been See Accessories and Modifications
deaths have been associated with drinking driver or passenger is on page 103.
the use of alcohol, with about in a crash, that person's chance of
250,000 people injured. being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
Braking And, of course, actual stopping If the engine ever stops while
distances vary greatly with the the vehicle is being driven, brake
See Brake System Warning Light on surface of the road, whether it is normally but do not pump the
page 522. pavement or gravel; the condition brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
Braking action involves of the road, whether it is wet, dry, the pedal could get harder to push
perception time and reaction or icy; tire tread; the condition of the down. If the engine stops, there
time. Deciding to push the brake brakes; the weight of the vehicle; will still be some power brake assist
pedal is perception time. Actually and the amount of brake force but it will be used when the brake
doing it is reaction time. applied. is applied. Once the power assist is
Avoid needless heavy used up, it can take longer to stop
Average reaction time is about and the brake pedal will be harder
threefourths of a second. braking. Some people drive in
spurts heavy acceleration to push.
But that is only an average.
It might be less with one driver followed by heavy braking rather Adding nondealer accessories
and as long as two or three seconds than keeping pace with traffic. can affect vehicle performance.
or more with another. Age, physical This is a mistake. The brakes See Accessories and Modifications
condition, alertness, coordination, might not have time to cool between on page 103.
and eyesight all play a part. So do hard stops. The brakes will wear
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. out much faster with a lot of heavy
But even in threefourths of a braking. Keeping pace with the
second, a vehicle moving at traffic and allowing realistic following
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m distances eliminates a lot of
(66 ft). That could be a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
distance in an emergency, so better braking and longer brake life.
keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
Steering Steering in Emergencies

Power Steering There are times when steering
can be more effective than braking.
If power steering assist is lost For example, you come over a hill
because the engine stops or the and find a truck stopped in your
power steering system is not lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
functioning, the vehicle can be from nowhere, or a child darts out
steered but it will take more effort. from between parked cars and stops
right in front of you. These problems
Steering Tips can be avoided by braking if you
It is important to take curves at a can stop in time. But sometimes
reasonable speed. you cannot stop in time because
Traction in a curve depends on there is no room. That is the time An emergency like this requires
the condition of the tires and the for evasive action steering close attention and a quick decision.
road surface, the angle at which the around the problem. If holding the steering wheel at
curve is banked, and vehicle speed. The vehicle can perform very the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
While in a curve, speed is the one well in emergencies like these. positions, it can be turned a full
factor that can be controlled. First apply the brakes. See Braking 180 degrees very quickly without
on page 94. It is better to remove removing either hand. But you have
If there is a need to reduce speed, to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
do it before entering the curve, while as much speed as possible from
a collision. Then steer around quickly straighten the wheel once
the front wheels are straight. you have avoided the object.
the problem, to the left or right
Try to adjust the speed so you can depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency
drive through the curve. Maintain a situations are always possible is a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to good reason to practice defensive
accelerate until out of the curve, driving at all times and wear safety
and then accelerate gently into belts properly.
the straightaway.
Off-Road Recovery so that the vehicle straddles the Skidding

edge of the pavement. Turn the
The vehicle's right wheels can drop In a skid, a driver can lose control of
steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to
off the edge of a road onto the the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
5 in), about one-eighth turn, until
shoulder while driving. most skids by taking reasonable
the right front tire contacts the
care suited to existing conditions,
pavement edge. Then turn the
and by not overdriving those
steering wheel to go straight
conditions. But skids are always
down the roadway.
possible.
Loss of Control The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
Let us review what driving experts systems. In the braking skid,
say about what happens when the the wheels are not rolling. In the
three control systems brakes, steering or cornering skid, too much
steering, and acceleration do not speed or steering in a curve causes
have enough friction where the tires tires to slip and lose cornering force.
meet the road to do what the driver And in the acceleration skid, too
has asked. much throttle causes the driving
If the level of the shoulder is In any emergency, do not give up. wheels to spin.
only slightly below the pavement, Keep trying to steer and constantly If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
recovery should be fairly easy. seek an escape route or area of your foot off the accelerator pedal
Ease off the accelerator and then, less danger. and quickly steer the way you
if there is nothing in the way, steer want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety, Rain and wet roads can reduce
slow down and adjust your driving vehicle traction and affect your After driving through a large
to these conditions. It is important ability to stop and accelerate. puddle of water or a car/vehicle
to slow down on slippery surfaces Always drive slower in these types wash, lightly apply the brake
because stopping distance is longer of driving conditions and avoid pedal until the brakes work
and vehicle control more limited. driving through large puddles and normally.
deepstanding or flowing water.
While driving on a surface with Flowing or rushing water creates
reduced traction, try to avoid strong forces. Driving through
sudden steering, acceleration, { WARNING flowing water could cause the
or braking, including reducing Wet brakes can cause crashes. vehicle to be carried away. If this
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower happens, you and other vehicle
They might not work as well in
gear. Any sudden changes could occupants could drown. Do not
a quick stop and could cause
cause the tires to slide. You might ignore police warnings and be
pulling to one side. You could
not realize the surface is slippery very cautious about trying to
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn lose control of the vehicle.
drive through flowing water.
to recognize warning clues such (Continued)
as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
mirrored surface and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.

. Keep the windshield washer fluid
Hydroplaning
reservoir filled.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. . Driving on steep hills or through
Water can build up under the Have good tires with proper
mountains is different than driving
vehicle's tires so they actually tread depth. See Tires on
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
ride on the water. This can happen page 1056.
driving in these conditions include:
if the road is wet enough and you . Turn off cruise control.
are going fast enough. When the
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little good shape.
Highway Hypnosis
or no contact with the road. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
Always be alert and pay attention tires, cooling system, and
There is no hard and fast rule about to your surroundings while driving.
hydroplaning. The best advice is to transmission.
If you become tired or sleepy, find
slow down when the road is wet. a safe place to park the vehicle
. Shift to a lower gear when going
and rest. down steep or long hills.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Other driving tips include:
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include: . Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
{ WARNING
. Allow extra following distance. . Keep interior temperature cool. If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
. Pass with caution. . Keep your eyes moving scan would not work well. You would
. Keep windshield wiping the road ahead and to the sides. then have poor braking or even
equipment in good shape. . Check the rearview mirror and none going down a hill. You could
vehicle instruments often. crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction.
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take surface under the tires even more.
or with the ignition off is appropriate action.
dangerous. The brakes will The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 930 improves vehicle
have to do all the work of slowing Winter Driving stability during hard stops on
down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. Driving on Snow or Ice slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
You would then have poor braking Drive carefully when there is
or even none going down a hill. snow or ice between the tires Allow greater following distance on
You could crash. Always have the and the road, creating less traction any slippery road and watch for
engine running and the vehicle or grip. Wet ice can occur at about slippery spots. Icy patches can
in gear when going downhill. 0C (32F) when freezing rain occur on otherwise clear roads in
begins to fall, resulting in even less shaded areas. The surface of a
traction. Avoid driving on wet ice curve or an overpass can remain
. Stay in your own lane. Do not icy when the surrounding roads
or in freezing rain until roads can
swing wide or cut across the are clear. Avoid sudden steering
be treated with salt or sand.
center of the road. Drive at maneuvers and braking while
speeds that let you stay in Drive with caution, whatever the on ice.
your own lane. condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
. Top of hills: Be alert on slippery surfaces.
quickly causes the wheels to spin
something could be in your
and makes the surface under the
lane (stalled car, accident).
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be
a serious situation. Stay with If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
the vehicle unless there is help carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
nearby. If possible, use the Exhaust on page 924.
the base of your vehicle,
Roadside Service (U.S. and
especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
Canada) on page 138 or Roadside
the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
Service (Mexico) on page 1311.
To get help and keep everyone . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (Carbon
in the vehicle safe: time to be sure snow does Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
not collect there. could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
flashers. . Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the you might not know it is in your
. Tie a red cloth to an outside vehicle. Clear away snow from
vehicle that is away from
mirror. around the base of your vehicle,
the wind to bring in fresh air.
especially any that is blocking the
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
exhaust.
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel.
under the vehicle. This may Run the engine for short periods
. Adjust the climate control only as needed to keep warm, but
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that
inside. Engine exhaust contains be careful.
circulates the air inside
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which the vehicle and set the fan
cannot be seen or smelled. speed to the highest setting.
It can cause unconsciousness See Climate Control System
and even death. in the Index.
(Continued) (Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get
short periods as needed to warm it Out
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and
the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around
until help arrives but only when you the front wheels. Turn off any
If stuck too severely for the traction
feel really uncomfortable from the traction system. Shift back and
system to free the vehicle, turn the
cold. Moving about to keep warm forth between R (Reverse) and a
traction system off and use the
also helps. forward gear, spinning the wheels
rocking method.
as little as possible. To prevent
If it takes some time for help to transmission wear, wait until the
arrive, now and then when you run { WARNING wheels stop spinning before shifting
the engine, push the accelerator gears. Release the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine If the vehicle's tires spin at high pedal while shifting, and press
runs faster than the idle speed. speed, they can explode, and lightly on the accelerator pedal
This keeps the battery charged to you or others could be injured. when the transmission is in gear.
restart the vehicle and to signal for The vehicle can overheat, Slowly spinning the wheels in the
help with the headlamps. Do this causing an engine compartment forward and reverse directions
as little as possible to save fuel. fire or other damage. Spin the causes a rocking motion that could
wheels as little as possible and free the vehicle. If that does not
avoid going above 55 km/h get the vehicle out after a few tries,
(35 mph). it might need to be towed out.
If the vehicle does need to be towed
out, see Towing the Vehicle on
For information about using tire
page 10101.
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 1079.
Vehicle Load Limits Tire and Loading Information

{ WARNING Label
It is very important to know
how much weight the vehicle Do not load the vehicle
can carry. This weight is called any heavier than the
the vehicle capacity weight Gross Vehicle Weight
and includes the weight of Rating (GVWR), or either the
all occupants, cargo and all maximum front or rear Gross
nonfactoryinstalled options. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Two labels on the vehicle This can cause systems to
show how much weight it may break and change the way the
properly carry, the Tire and vehicle handles. This could
Loading Information label cause loss of control and a
and the Certification label. crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle. Label Example
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver
door open, the label is attached
near the door lock post.
The Tire and Loading Steps for Determining Correct 4. The resulting figure equals
Information label shows the Load Limit the available amount of cargo
number of occupant seating 1. Locate the statement and luggage load capacity.
positions (A), and the maximum The combined weight of For example, if the XXX
vehicle capacity weight (B) in occupants and cargo should amount equals 1400 lbs
kilograms and pounds. never exceed XXX kg or and there will be five 150 lb
The Tire and Loading XXX lbs on your vehicle's passengers in your vehicle,
Information label also shows placard. the amount of available cargo
the tire size of the original and luggage load capacity
2. Determine the combined is 650 lbs (1400 750
equipment tires (C) and the weight of the driver and
recommended cold tire inflation (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
passengers that will be
pressures (D). For more riding in your vehicle. 5. Determine the combined
information on tires and inflation weight of luggage and cargo
see Tires on page 1056 and 3. Subtract the combined being loaded on the vehicle.
Tire Pressure on page 1063. weight of the driver and That weight may not safely
passengers from XXX kg exceed the available cargo
There is also important loading
or XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross calculated in Step 4.
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front
and rear axle. See Certification
Label later in this section.
6. If your vehicle will be towing

a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
See Trailer Towing on page 958
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips. Example 1 Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 = 453 kg for Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) 2 = @ 68 kg (150 lbs) 5 =
136 kg (300 lbs). 340 kg (750 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and C. Available Cargo
Cargo Weight = 317 kg Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs).
(700 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and The label shows the size of the
Loading Information label for vehicle's original tires and the
specific information about the inflation pressures needed to
vehicle's capacity weight and obtain the gross weight capacity
seating positions. The combined of the vehicle. This is called
weight of the driver, passengers, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and cargo should never exceed (GVWR). The GVWR includes
the vehicle's capacity weight. the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Certification Label
The Certification/Tire label also
tells you the maximum weights
Example 3 for the front and rear axles,
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight called Gross Axle Weight Rating
for Example 3 = 453 kg (GAWR). To find out the actual
(1,000 lbs). loads on the front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
station and weigh the vehicle.
@ 91 kg (200 lbs) 5 = Your dealer can help you with
453 kg (1,000 lbs). this. Be sure to spread out the
C. Available Cargo load equally on both sides of
Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs). the center line.
Label Example
Never exceed the GVWR for the
A vehicle-specific Certification/ vehicle, or the GAWR for either
Tire label is attached to the the front or rear axle.
rear edge of the driver's door.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy Your warranty does not cover If you put things inside your
load, it should be spread out. parts or components that fail vehicle like suitcases,
See Steps for Determining because of overloading. tools, packages, or anything
Correct Load Limit earlier in The label will help you decide else they will go as fast as
this section. how much cargo and installed the vehicle goes. If you have to
equipment your vehicle can stop or turn quickly, or if there
{ WARNING carry. is a crash, they will keep going.
Do not load the vehicle
any heavier than the Gross
Using heavier suspension
components to get added
{ WARNING
Vehicle Weight Rating durability might not change your Things inside the vehicle can
(GVWR), or either the weight ratings. Ask your dealer strike and injure people in a
maximum front or rear Gross to help you load your vehicle sudden stop or turn, or in a
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). the right way. crash.
This can cause systems to . Put things in the cargo
break and change the way the area of the vehicle. In the
vehicle handles. This could cargo area, put them as
cause loss of control and a far forward as possible.
crash. Overloading can also Try to spread the weight
shorten the life of the vehicle. evenly.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) Starting and above 110 km/h (68 mph)

should be limited to
Operating five minutes per use.
. Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
. Avoid making hard stops
New Vehicle Break-In for the first 322 km (200 mi)
inside the vehicle so that
Notice: The vehicle does not or so. During this time the
some of them are above new brake linings are not
the tops of the seats. need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run yet broken in. Hard stops
. Do not leave an if you follow these guidelines: with new linings can mean
unsecured child restraint premature wear and earlier
. Do not drive at any one replacement. Follow this
in the vehicle. constant speed, fast or slow, breaking-in guideline every
. Secure loose items in the for the first 805 km (500 mi). time you get new brake
vehicle. Do not make full-throttle linings.
starts. Avoid downshifting
. Do not leave a seat folded to brake or slow the vehicle.
. Do not tow a trailer during
down unless needed. break-in. See Driving
. During the first 1 000 km Characteristics and Towing
(600 mi), avoid using more Tips on page 954 for the
than moderate acceleration trailer towing capabilities
in lower gears and avoid of your vehicle and more
vehicle speeds above information.
110 km/h (68 mph).
Following breakin, engine speed
. Between the first and load can be gradually
1 000 km (600 mi) and increased.
5 000 km (3,000 mi), heavy
acceleration in lower gears
can be used. Vehicle speeds
Adjustable Throttle and Adjust the throttle and brake pedals Pressing the button cycles it through
while the vehicle is in P (Park) three modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,
Brake Pedal without pressing on the pedals. ON/RUN/START and STOPPING
If the vehicle has this feature, the The pedals cannot be adjusted THE ENGINE/OFF.
position of the throttle and brake while the vehicle is in R (Reverse) If the pushbutton start is not
pedals can be adjusted. or when cruise control is engaged. working, the vehicle may be near a
The throttle and brake pedals can strong radio antenna signal causing
also be adjusted while driving. interference to the keyless entry
system. See Driver Information
Ignition Positions Center (DIC) on page 529 for
more information.
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN mode and the brake pedal
must be applied.
STOPPING THE ENGINE/OFF
(No LED Lights): When the
vehicle is stopped, press the engine
The switch used to adjust the START/STOP button once to turn
pedals is located on the right side the engine off.
of the steering column, below the
wiper stalk. Pull the switch toward
you to move the pedals further from The vehicle has an electronic
the floor, or push the switch away keyless ignition with pushbutton
from you to move the pedals closer start.
to the floor.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the In an emergency, if the vehicle must 4. Set the parking brake.
ignition will turn off, and Retained be shut off while driving: See Parking Brake on
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain 1. Brake using a firm and steady page 931.
active. See Retained Accessory pressure. Do not pump the
Power (RAP) on page 922 for
more information.
brakes repeatedly. This may { WARNING
deplete power assist, requiring
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), increased brake pedal force. Turning off the vehicle while
the ignition will return to ACC/ moving may cause loss of power
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). assist in the brake and steering
ACCESSORY and display the This can be done while the
message SHIFT TO PARK in the systems and disable the airbags.
vehicle is moving. After shifting While driving, only shut the
Driver Information Center (DIC). to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
See Driver Information Center (DIC) vehicle off in an emergency.
brakes and steer the vehicle to
on page 529 for more information. a safe location.
When the vehicle is shifted into 5. If the vehicle must be shut off
P (Park), the ignition system will 3. Come to a complete stop, shift
to P (Park), and turn the ignition while driving, switch the ignition
switch to OFF. to ACC/ACCESSORY.
to OFF. On vehicles with an
Do not turn the engine off when the automatic transmission, the shift
vehicle is moving. This will cause lever must be in P (Park) to turn
a loss of power assist in the brake the ignition switch to the OFF
and steering systems and disable position.
the airbags.
ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LED Starting the Gasoline To start the vehicle:

Light): This mode allows you to
use some electrical accessories
Engine Starting Procedure
when the engine is off. Place the transmission in the proper 1. With the brake pedal applied,
With the ignition off, pressing the gear by moving the shift lever to press the START button
button one time without the brake P (Park) or N (Neutral). To restart located on the instrument panel.
pedal applied, will place the ignition the engine when the vehicle is See Ignition Positions on
system in ACC/ACCESSORY. already moving, use N (Neutral). page 918.
The ignition will switch from Notice: Do not try to shift to 2. When the engine begins
ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. cranking, let go of the button and
ten minutes to prevent battery If you do, you could damage the the engine cranks automatically
run down. transmission. Shift to P (Park) until it starts.
only when the vehicle is stopped. If the transmitter is not in
ON/RUN/START (Green LED
Light): This mode is for driving The keyless access transmitter must the vehicle or something is
and starting. With the ignition off, be inside the vehicle for the ignition interfering with the transmitter,
and the brake pedal applied, to work. the Driver Information
pressing the button once will place Center (DIC) will display
Cell phone chargers can interfere
the ignition system in ON/RUN/ NO REMOTE DETECTED.
with the operation of the Keyless
START. Once engine cranking See Driver Information Center
Access System. Battery chargers
begins, release the button. Engine (DIC) on page 529 for more
should not be plugged in when
cranking will continue until the information.
starting or turning off the engine.
engine starts. See Starting the If the battery in the
Gasoline Engine on page 920 keyless access transmitter
for more information. The ignition needs replacing, the
will then remain in ON/RUN. DIC displays REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY.
The vehicle can still be driven.
See Remote Keyless Entry Notice: Cranking the engine for been initiated, the engine continues
(RKE) System Operation on long periods of time, by pressing cranking for a few seconds or until
page 24 for more information. the START button immediately the vehicle starts. If the engine does
3. Do not race the engine after cranking has ended, can not start, cranking automatically
immediately after starting it. overheat and damage the stops after 15 seconds to prevent
Operate the engine and cranking motor, and drain the cranking motor damage. To prevent
transmission gently until the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds gear damage, this system also
oil warms up and lubricates between each try, to allow the prevents cranking if the engine
all moving parts. cranking motor to cool down. is already running.
4. If the engine does not start and When the engine starts, let go of Notice: The engine is designed
no DIC message is displayed, the accelerator. If the vehicle starts to work with the electronics in
wait 15 seconds before trying briefly but then stops again, do the the vehicle. If you add electrical
again to let the cranking motor same thing. This clears the extra parts or accessories, you could
cool down. gasoline from the engine. change the way the engine
The vehicle has a operates. Before adding electrical
If the engine does not start equipment, check with your
after 5-10 seconds, especially Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in dealer. If you do not, the engine
in very cold weather (below might not perform properly. Any
18C or 0F), it could be starting the engine and protects
components. Once cranking has resulting damage would not be
flooded with too much gasoline. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor
while cranking for up to
15 seconds.
Engine Heater The length of time the heater should

{ WARNING remain plugged in depends on
The engine coolant heater, several factors. Ask a dealer in the
if available, can help in cold weather Plugging the cord into an area where you will be parking the
conditions at or below 18C (0F) ungrounded outlet could cause vehicle for the best advice on this.
for easier starting and better fuel an electrical shock. Also, the
economy during engine warm-up. wrong kind of extension cord Retained Accessory
Plug in the coolant heater at least could overheat and cause a fire.
four hours before starting the You could be seriously injured. Power (RAP)
vehicle. An internal thermostat in Plug the cord into a properly These accessories can be used
the plug end of the cord will prevent grounded three-prong 110-volt AC after the engine is turned off:
engine coolant heater operation at outlet. If the cord will not reach,
temperatures above 18C (0F).
. Audio system (up to 10 minutes
use a heavy-duty three-prong or driver door is opened).
To Use the Engine Coolant extension cord rated for at least
. Power windows, sunroof
Heater 15 amps.
(if equipped), and power outlets
1. Turn off the engine. (up to 10 minutes or any door is
4. Before starting the engine, be opened).
2. Open the hood and unwrap sure to unplug and store the
the electrical cord. The cord is cord as it was before to keep
located near the air cleaner. it away from moving engine
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded parts. If you do not it could
110-volt AC outlet. be damaged.
Shifting Into Park Leaving the Vehicle with the pulling it toward you. If you can, it
Engine Running means that the shift lever was not
fully locked into P (Park).
{ WARNING
{ WARNING Torque Lock
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not It can be dangerous to leave the Torque lock is when the weight
fully in P (Park) with the parking vehicle with the engine running. of the vehicle puts too much
The vehicle could move suddenly force on the parking pawl in the
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
if the shift lever is not fully in transmission. This happens when
roll. If you have left the engine
P (Park) with the parking brake parking on a hill and shifting the
running, the vehicle can move transmission into P (Park) is not
suddenly. You or others could be firmly set. And, if you leave the
done properly and then it is difficult
injured. To be sure the vehicle will vehicle with the engine running,
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
not move, even when you are on it could overheat and even catch
torque lock, set the parking brake
fairly level ground, use the steps fire. You or others could be and then shift into P (Park). To find
that follow. injured. Do not leave the vehicle out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"
with the engine running. listed previously.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and If torque lock does occur, your
set the parking brake. If you have to leave the vehicle vehicle may need to be pushed
with the engine running, be sure uphill by another vehicle to relieve
See Parking Brake on page 931
the vehicle is in P (Park) and the the parking pawl pressure, so you
parking brake is firmly set before can shift out of P (Park).
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) you leave it. After you have moved
by pushing the lever all the way the shift lever into P (Park), hold If you are towing a trailer and
toward the front of the vehicle. down the regular brake pedal. parking on a hill, see Driving
See if you can move the shift lever Characteristics and Towing
3. Turn the ignition off. Tips on page 954.
away from P (Park) without first
Shifting Out of Park If you still are unable to shift out of Engine Exhaust
P (Park):
This vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system. 1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
{ WARNING
The shift lock release is designed to
prevent movement of the shift lever 2. Hold the brake pedal down and Engine exhaust contains carbon
out of P (Park), unless the ignition is press the shift lever button monoxide (CO) which cannot be
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY again. seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
and the brake pedal is applied can cause unconsciousness and
3. Move the shift lever to the
The shift lock release is always even death.
desired position.
functional except in the case of an Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
If you still cannot move the shift
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9volt) battery. lever from P (Park), consult your . The vehicle idles in areas
dealer or a professional towing with poor ventilation (parking
If the vehicle has an uncharged service. garages, tunnels, deep snow
battery or a battery with low voltage, that may block underbody
try charging or jump starting the Parking Over Things airflow or tail pipes).
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 1096. That Burn . The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
To shift out of P (Park):
{ WARNING . The exhaust system leaks
1. Apply the brake pedal. due to corrosion or damage.
Things that can burn could touch
2. Press the shift lever button. . The vehicle exhaust system
hot exhaust parts under the
3. Move the shift lever to the vehicle and ignite. Do not park has been modified, damaged
desired position. or improperly repaired.
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn. (Continued)
Running the Vehicle

WARNING (Continued)
While Parked
{ WARNING
. There are holes or openings It can be dangerous to get out
It is better not to park with the
in the vehicle body from of the vehicle if the automatic
engine running. But if you ever have
damage or after market transmission shift lever is not fully
to, here are some things to know.
modifications that are not in P (Park) with the parking brake
completely sealed. firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If unusual fumes are detected or
{ WARNING Do not leave the vehicle when
if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed the engine is running unless
coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is you have to. If you have left the
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can
. Drive it only with the windows
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others
completely down.
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the
. Have the vehicle repaired which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when
immediately. you are on fairly level ground,
It can cause unconsciousness
Never park the vehicle with the and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and
engine running in an enclosed engine in an enclosed area move the shift lever to P (Park).
area such as a garage or a that has no fresh air ventilation.
building that has no fresh air For more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be
ventilation. Exhaust on page 924. sure the vehicle will not move.
See Shifting Into Park on
page 923.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 954.
Automatic { WARNING
Make sure the shift lever is fully
in P (Park) before starting the
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
engine. The vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock
The shift lever is located on the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully control system. You must fully apply
center console between the front in P (Park) with the parking brake the regular brakes first and then
seats. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. press the shift lever button before
Do not leave the vehicle when you can shift from P (Park) when the
the engine is running unless ignition is in ON/RUN. If you cannot
you have to. If you have left the shift out of P (Park), ease pressure
engine running, the vehicle can on the shift lever and push the shift
move suddenly. You or others lever all the way into P (Park) as
you maintain brake application.
could be injured. To be sure the
Then press the shift lever button
vehicle will not move, even when
and move the shift lever into
you are on fairly level ground, another gear. See Shifting Out
always set the parking brake and of Park on page 924.
move the shift lever to P (Park).
page 923. If you are pulling a
There are several different positions trailer, see Driving Characteristics
for the shift lever. and Towing Tips on page 954.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) D (Drive): This position is for

while the vehicle is moving { WARNING normal driving. It provides the best
forward could damage the fuel economy. If you need more
transmission. The repairs would Shifting into a drive gear while the power for passing, and you are:
not be covered by the vehicle engine is running at high speed
. Going less than 35 mph
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) is dangerous. Unless your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal, the (55 km/h), push the accelerator
only after the vehicle is stopped. pedal about halfway down.
vehicle could move very rapidly.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to You could lose control and hit . Going about 35 mph (55 km/h)
back up. or more, push the accelerator all
people or objects. Do not shift
At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse) into a drive gear while the engine the way down.
can be used to rock the vehicle is running at high speed. The transmission will shift down
back and forth to get out of snow, to a lower gear and have more
ice, or sand without damaging your power.
transmission. See If the Vehicle is Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
Stuck on page 911 for additional or N (Neutral) with the engine Downshifting the transmission in
information. running at high speed may slippery road conditions could result
damage the transmission. in skidding, see Skidding under
N (Neutral): In this position, the The repairs would not be covered Loss of Control on page 96
engine does not connect with the by the vehicle warranty. Be sure
wheels. To restart when the vehicle the engine is not running at high Notice: Spinning the tires or
is already moving, use N (Neutral) speed when shifting the vehicle. holding the vehicle in one
only. You can also use N (Neutral) place on a hill using only the
when the vehicle is being towed. accelerator pedal may damage
the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires.
When stopping on a hill, use
the brakes to hold the vehicle
in place.
Manual Mode SPORT MODE ON will be 3. To return to Sport Mode from

displayed in the DIC. See Ride M (Manual Mode), press and
Driver Shift Control (DSC) Control System Messages on briefly hold the shift lever
Notice: If you drive the vehicle page 539. The word sport forward.
at a high rpm without upshifting will display below the odometer.
while using Driver Shift Control The gear position will also be
(DSC), you could damage the indicated in the tachometer.
vehicle. Always upshift when Within Sport Mode there
necessary while using DSC. is a further performance
Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature called Performance
allows you to shift an automatic Mode Lift Foot (PMLF) Mode.
The feature is activated The tachometer display on the
transmission similar to a manual
automatically when sports instrument panel cluster will
transmission. To use the DSC
oriented driving is detected, show which gear the vehicle is
feature:
based on cornering and on/off in. The number indicates the
1. Move the shift lever to throttle application. PMLF allows requested gear range when moving
the left from D (Drive) to the transmission to hold the the shift lever forward or rearward.
M (Manual Mode). current gear instead of upshifting See Tachometer on page 512 for
If you do not move the shift lever when the throttle is lifted. more information.
forward or rearward, the vehicle 2. To enter M (Manual Mode), press While using the DSC feature,
will be in Sport Mode. When you the shift lever forward to upshift the vehicle will have firmer,
are in Sport Mode the vehicle or rearward to downshift. quicker shifting. You can use this
will still shift automatically. for sport driving or when climbing
The transmission may remain An M will be displayed in
or descending hills, to stay in gear
in a gear longer than it would in the DIC.
longer, or to downshift for more
the normal driving mode based power or engine braking.
on braking, throttle input, and
vehicle lateral acceleration.
The transmission will only allow Fuel Economy Mode in the instrument cluster will come
you to shift into gears appropriate on. See Fuel Economy Light on
for the vehicle speed and engine The vehicle may have a fuel page 527. Pressing the button a
revolutions per minute (rpm). The economy mode. When engaged, second time will turn fuel economy
transmission will not automatically fuel economy mode can improve mode off.
shift to the next lower gear if the the vehicle's fuel economy.
When fuel economy mode is on:
engine rpm is too high, nor to the
next higher gear when the maximum . The transmission will upshift
engine rpm is reached. sooner, and downshift later.
If shifting is prevented for any . The torque converter will lock up
reason, the currently selected gear sooner, and stay on longer.
will flash multiple times, indicating . The gas pedal will be less
that the transmission has not shifted sensitive.
gears.
. The vehicle's computers will
While in the DSC mode, the more aggressively shut off fuel
transmission will automatically to the engine under deceleration.
downshift when the vehicle comes
to a stop. This will allow for more
power during take-off.
Pressing the eco button by the shift
When accelerating the vehicle from lever will engage fuel economy
a stop in snowy and icy conditions, mode. When activated, the eco light
you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear ratio allows you
to gain more traction on slippery
surfaces.
Drive Systems Brakes

All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake
Vehicles with this feature always System (ABS)
send engine power to all four This vehicle has the Antilock
wheels. It is fully automatic, and Brake System (ABS), an advanced If there is a problem with ABS, this
adjusts itself as needed for road electronic braking system that helps warning light stays on. See Antilock
conditions. prevent a braking skid. Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
When using a compact spare on page 523.
When the engine is started and
tire on an AWD vehicle, the the vehicle begins to drive away, If driving safely on a wet road
system automatically detects ABS checks itself. A momentary and it becomes necessary to
the compact spare and disables motor or clicking noise might be slam on the brakes and continue
AWD. To restore AWD operation heard while this test is going on, braking to avoid a sudden obstacle,
and prevent excessive wear on and it might even be noticed that a computer senses that the wheels
the system, replace the compact the brake pedal moves a little. are slowing down. If one of the
spare with a full-size tire as soon as This is normal. wheels is about to stop rolling, the
possible. See Compact Spare Tire computer will separately work the
on page 1096 for more information. brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure Using ABS Parking Brake
to each wheel, as required, faster
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
than any driver could. This can help
the brake pedal down firmly and let
the driver steer around the obstacle
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
while braking hard.
pump or motor operating and feel
As the brakes are applied, the the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
computer keeps receiving updates normal.
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly. Braking in Emergencies
Remember: ABS does not change ABS allows the driver to steer and
the time needed to get a foot up to brake at the same time. In many
the brake pedal or always decrease emergencies, steering can help
stopping distance. If you get too more than even the very best
close to the vehicle in front of you, braking.
there will not be enough time to The vehicle has an Electric Parking
apply the brakes if that vehicle Brake (EPB). The switch for the
suddenly slows or stops. Always EPB is in the center console.
leave enough room up ahead to The EPB can always be activated,
stop, even with ABS. even if the ignition is off. To avoid
draining the battery, do not cycle
the EPB too often without the
engine running. The EPB can
be left applied while the vehicle
is parked.
The system has a parking brake you need to have the vehicle If this light flashes continuously,
status light and a parking brake serviced. Do not drive the vehicle release the EPB, and attempt to
warning light. See Brake System if the parking brake status light is apply it again. If this light continues
Warning Light on page 522. flashing. See your dealer. See to flash, do not drive the vehicle.
There are also three Driver Brake System Warning Light on See your dealer.
Information Center (DIC) messages. page 522 for more information. If the parking brake warning light is
See Driver Information Center (DIC) If the EPB is applied while the on, the EPB has detected an error
on page 529 for more information. vehicle is in motion, a chime will in another system and is operating
In case of insufficient electrical sound, and the DIC message with reduced functionality. To apply
power, the EPB cannot be applied RELEASE PARKING BRAKE the EPB when this light is on, lift up
or released. will be displayed. The vehicle on the EPB switch and hold it in the
Before leaving the vehicle, check will decelerate as long as the up position. Full application of the
the parking brake status light to switch is held in the up position. parking brake by the EPB system
ensure the parking brake is applied. Releasing the EPB switch during may take a longer period of time
the deceleration will release the than normal when this light is on.
EPB Apply parking brake. If the switch is held Continue to hold the switch until the
The EPB can be applied any time in the up position until the vehicle parking brake status light remains
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is comes to a stop, the EPB will on. If the parking brake warning light
applied by momentarily lifting up on remain applied. is on, see your dealer.
the EPB switch. Once fully applied, If the parking brake status light If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
the parking brake status light will be flashes continuously, the EPB is wheels should be blocked to
on. While the brake is being applied, only partially applied or released, prevent vehicle movement.
the status light will flash until full or there is a problem with the EPB.
apply is reached. If the light does The DIC message SERVICE
not come on, or remains flashing, PARKING BRAKE will be displayed.
EPB Release Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist

brake on can overheat the brake
To release the EPB, place the This vehicle has a brake assist
system and cause premature
ignition in the ON/RUN position, feature designed to assist the
wear or damage to brake system
apply and hold the brake pedal, driver in stopping or decreasing
parts. Make sure that the parking
and push down momentarily on vehicle speed in emergency driving
brake is fully released and the
the EPB switch. If you attempt to conditions. This feature uses the
brake warning light is off before
release the EPB without the brake stability system hydraulic brake
driving.
pedal applied, a chime will sound, control module to supplement
and the DIC message STEP ON Automatic EPB Release the power brake system under
BRAKE TO RELEASE PARK conditions where the driver has
BRAKE will be displayed. The EPB The EPB will automatically
release if the vehicle is running, quickly and forcefully applied the
is released when the parking brake brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
status light is off. placed into gear, and an attempt
is made to drive away. Avoid rapid stop or slow down the vehicle.
If the parking brake warning light acceleration when the EPB is The stability system hydraulic brake
is on, the EPB has detected an applied, to preserve parking control module increases brake
error in another system and is brake lining life. pressure at each corner of the
operating with reduced functionality. vehicle until the ABS activates.
To release the EPB when this light If you are towing a trailer and Minor brake pedal pulsation or
is on, push down on the EPB switch parking on a hill, see Driving pedal movement during this time
and hold it in the down position. Characteristics and Towing Tips on is normal and the driver should
EPB release may take a longer page 954 for more information. continue to apply the brake pedal
period of time than normal when as the driving situation dictates.
this light is on. Continue to hold the The brake assist feature will
switch until the parking brake status automatically disengage when
light is off. If the light is on, see your the brake pedal is released or
dealer. brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) Ride Control Systems TCS is on whenever the vehicle
is started. To limit wheel spin,
This vehicle has a Hill Start especially in slippery road
Assist (HSA) feature, which Traction Control conditions, the system should
may be useful when the vehicle is System (TCS) always be left on. But, TCS
stopped on a grade. This feature can be turned off if needed.
is designed to prevent the vehicle The vehicle has a Traction Control
from rolling, either forward or System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
rearward, during vehicle drive off. On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the
After the driver completely stops system operates if it senses that
and holds the vehicle in a complete one or both of the front wheels
standstill on a grade, HSA will be are spinning or beginning to lose
automatically activated. During the traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive
transition period between when the (AWD) vehicle, the system will
driver releases the brake pedal and operate if it senses that any of the d flashes to indicate that the
starts to accelerate to drive off on wheels are spinning or beginning to traction control system is active.
a grade, HSA holds the braking lose traction. When this happens, If there is a problem detected
pressure to ensure that there is no the system brakes the spinning with TCS, SERVICE TRACTION
rolling. The brakes will automatically wheel(s) and/or reduces engine CONTROL and SERVICE
release when the accelerator pedal power to limit wheel spin. STABILITRAK may be displayed on
is applied within the twosecond The system may be heard or felt the Driver Information Center (DIC)
window. It will not activate if the while it is working, but this is and d will be on. See Ride Control
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing normal. System Messages on page 539.
downhill or if the vehicle is facing When this message is displayed
uphill and in R (Reverse).
and d comes on and stays on,
the vehicle is safe to drive but the
system is not operational. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake When TCS is turned off on AWD

or accelerate heavily when TCS is vehicles, the system may still make
off. The vehicle's driveline could noise. This is normal and necessary
be damaged. with AWD hardware.
If d comes on and stays on, reset It may be necessary to turn the
the system by: system off if the vehicle ever gets
The TCS off light comes on and stuck in sand, mud, or snow and
1. Stopping the vehicle. TRACTION CONTROL OFF is rocking the vehicle is required.
2. Turning the engine off and displayed on the Driver Information See If the Vehicle is Stuck on
waiting 15 seconds. Center (DIC) to indicate that the page 911 for more information.
traction control system has been See also Winter Driving on page 99
3. Starting the engine. turned off. See Ride Control System for information on using TCS when
If d still comes on and stays on at a Messages on page 539. driving in snowy or icy conditions.
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see TCS can be turned off by pressing If cruise control is being used when
your dealer for service. and releasing g. When TCS is TCS activates, cruise control will
A chime may also sound when the turned off, i comes on and automatically disengage. Press the
light comes on steady. cruise control button to reengage
the system will not limit wheel
when road conditions allow. See
spin. Driving should be adjusted
The g is located on the console. Cruise Control on page 938.
accordingly. Press and release g
again to turn the system back on. Adding nonGM accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 103 for more information.
StabiliTrak System If there is a problem detected

with StabiliTrak, SERVICE
The vehicle has a vehicle stability STABILITRAK is displayed on
enhancement system called the Driver Information Center (DIC)
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
and d will stay on. See Vehicle
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the Messages on page 534. When
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. When the stability control system this message is displayed and/or d
activates, the Traction Control comes on and stays on, the vehicle
StabiliTrak activates when the System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light is safe to drive but the system is
computer senses a difference will flash on the instrument panel. not operational. Driving should be
between the intended path and This also occurs when traction adjusted accordingly. See Ride
the direction the vehicle is actually control is activated. A noise may Control System Messages on
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively be heard or vibration may be felt page 539.
applies braking pressure to the in the brake pedal. This is normal.
vehicle's brakes to help steer the Continue to steer the vehicle in If d comes on and stays on, reset
vehicle in the intended direction. the intended direction. the system by:
StabiliTrak is on automatically 1. Stopping the vehicle.
whenever the vehicle is started.
To assist with directional control 2. Turning the engine off and
of the vehicle, the system should waiting 15 seconds.
always be left on. 3. Starting the engine.
If d still comes on and stays on at a
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see
your dealer for service.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle To switch from TOUR to SPORT

mode, move the shift lever to the
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear left while the transmission is in
axle can give more traction on D (Drive).
snow, mud, ice, sand, or gravel.
When traction is low, this feature TOUR: Use for normal city and
allows the drive wheel with the highway driving. This setting
g is located on the console. most traction to move the vehicle. provides a smooth, soft ride.
Both StabiliTrak and Traction The limited-slip rear axle also gives SPORT: Use where road
Control can be turned off if needed the driver enhanced control when conditions or personal preference
by pressing and holding g until g cornering hard or completing a demand more control. This setting
maneuver, such as a lane change. provides more feel, or response
and i come on the instrument
to road conditions through increased
panel. When StabiliTrak is turned
off, the system will not assist with
Selective Ride Control steering effort and suspension
control. Transmission shift points
directional control of the vehicle or The vehicle may have a ride
and shift firmness are also
limit wheel spin. Driving should be control system called Selective
enhanced. See Manual Mode on
adjusted accordingly. Press and Ride Control. The setting can be
page 928 under Automatic
release g again to turn the system changed at any time. Based on
Transmission.
back on. road conditions, steering wheel
angle, and the vehicle speed, the If there is a problem detected with
If cruise control is being used when system automatically adjusts to Selective Ride Control, SERVICE
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise provide the best handling while SUSPENSION SYSTEM displays
control will automatically disengage. providing a smooth ride. The Tour on the Driver Information Center
Press the cruise control button to and Sport modes will feel similar (DIC). See Ride Control System
reengage when road conditions on a smooth road. Messages on page 539. Driving
allow. See Cruise Control on should be adjusted accordingly.
Cruise Control If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak + RES (Resume/Accelerate):

system and begins to limit wheel Press briefly to make the vehicle
spin while using cruise control, resume to a previously set speed
{ WARNING the cruise control automatically or press and hold to accelerate.
disengages. See StabiliTrak SET (Set/Coast): Press to set the
Cruise control can be dangerous System on page 936 or
where you cannot drive safely at speed and activate cruise control or
Traction Control System (TCS) on make the vehicle decelerate.
a steady speed. So, do not use page 934. When road conditions
the cruise control on winding allow the cruise control to be safely [ (Cancel): Press to disengage
roads or in heavy traffic. used, you can apply the cruise cruise control without erasing the
Cruise control can be dangerous control again. set speed from memory.
on slippery roads. On such roads, Setting Cruise Control
fast changes in tire traction can
If the cruise button is on when not in
cause excessive wheel slip, and use, it could get bumped and go into
you could lose control. Do not use cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control on slippery roads. cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more
can be maintained without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
Cruise Control
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control shuts off. T (On/Off): Press to turn the
system on and off.
The cruise control light on the Increasing Speed While Cruise

. To slow down in small amounts,
instrument panel cluster comes on Control is at a Set Speed press the SET button on the
after the cruise control has been steering wheel briefly. Each time
If the cruise control system is this is done, the vehicle goes
set to the desired speed. already activated, about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
1. Press T. . Press and hold the +RES button
Passing Another Vehicle While
2. Get up to the desired speed. on the steering wheel until the
Using Cruise Control
desired speed is reached, then
3. Press and release the SET release it. Use the accelerator pedal to
button located on the steering increase the vehicle speed.
wheel.
. To increase vehicle speed in
When you take your foot off the
small amounts, press the +RES
4. Take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down
button. Each time this is done,
accelerator. to the previous set cruise speed.
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
Resuming a Set Speed (1 mph) faster. Using Cruise Control on Hills
If the cruise control is set at a Reducing Speed While Cruise How well the cruise control will
desired speed and then the brakes Control is at a Set Speed work on hills depends upon the
are applied, the cruise control is vehicle speed, load, and the
If the cruise control system is
disengaged without erasing the steepness of the hills. When going
already activated,
set speed from memory. up steep hills, you might have to
. Press and hold the SET button step on the accelerator pedal to
Once the vehicle speed reaches on the steering wheel until the maintain the vehicle speed. When
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, desired lower speed is reached, going downhill, you might have to
press the +RES button on the then release it. brake or shift to a lower gear to
steering wheel. The vehicle returns keep the vehicle speed down. If the
to the previous set speed and stays brake is applied the cruise control
there. disengages.
Ending Cruise Control Object Detection

There are three ways to end cruise
{ WARNING
control:
Systems The Ultrasonic Front and Rear
. Step lightly on the brake pedal. Parking Assist (UFRPA) system
Ultrasonic Parking Assist does not replace driver vision.
. Press the [ button on the For vehicles with the Ultrasonic It cannot detect:
steering wheel. Front and Rear Parking Assist . Objects that are below the
(UFRPA) system, it assists the
. Press the T button on the bumper, underneath the
driver with parking and avoiding
steering wheel. vehicle, or if they are too
objects. UFRPA operates at speeds
close or far from the vehicle.
Erasing Speed Memory less than 8 km/h (5 mph), and
the sensors on the front and rear . Children, pedestrians,
The cruise control set speed is bumper detect objects up to 1.2 m bicyclists, or pets.
erased from memory by pressing (4 ft) in front of the vehicle and 2.5 m
the T button or if the ignition is If you do not use proper care
(8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least before moving forward and while
turned off. 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground.
backing; vehicle damage, injury,
or death could occur. Even with
UFRPA, always check in front of
the vehicle before moving forward
and behind the vehicle before
backing up. While moving forward
and backing, be sure to look for
objects and check the vehicle
mirrors.
How the System Works High-toned beeps heard from Front Display
the front speakers are for objects
When the vehicle is shifted into
detected near the front bumper.
R (Reverse) the front and rear
Low-toned beeps heard from the
sensors are automatically turned
rear speakers are for objects
on. After the vehicle is shifted out
detected near the rear bumper.
of R (Reverse), the rear sensors
are turned off and the front sensors When an object is detected, high or
stay on until the vehicle is above a lowtone beeps are heard. As the
certain speed. The front sensors vehicle gets closer to an object, the The front display is located in the
time between the beeps becomes instrument panel in the center of
may also be turned on by pressing
the park assist button located next shorter. When the distance is less the speedometer and has four bars
to the shift lever without shifting than 30 cm (11.8 in), beeping is to provide distance and system
continuous. The distance may information.
into R (Reverse) while the vehicle
is traveling at a low speed. See be less during warmer or humid
Turning the System On and Off weather.
later in this section. PARK ASSIST OFF displays on
When the vehicle is in N (Neutral), the Driver Information Center (DIC)
the system may be active. If the to indicate that UFRPA is off.
vehicle is in a car wash, the sensors The message disappears after
may detect objects in the car wash. a short period of time.
See Turning the System On and
Off later in this section to turn the
system off.
The following describes how the UFRPA front display lights appear as the
. A trailer was attached to
vehicle gets closer to a detected object: the vehicle, or an object was
hanging out of the liftgate during
Description Metric English the last drive cycle. Once the
one amber bar 1.2 m 4 ft attached object is removed,
UFRPA will return to normal
two amber bars 1.0 m 40 in operation.
three amber bars 0.6 m 23 in . An object is attached to the front
three amber bars and one red bar 0.3 m 1 ft of the vehicle.
. A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle.
Turning the System On and Off When the System Does Not . The vehicle's bumper is
The UFRPA system can be turned Seem to Work Properly damaged. Take the vehicle to
on and off by pressing the park If UFRPA does not turn on due to a your dealer to repair the system.
assist button located next to the temporary condition, the message . Other conditions may affect
shift lever. PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the system performance, such as
DIC, and the light on the park assist vibrations from a jackhammer or
button turns off. This can occur the compression of air brakes on
under the following conditions: a very large truck.
. The ultrasonic sensors are
not clean. Keep the vehicle's
bumpers free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
The park assist button lights up instructions, see Exterior Care
when the system is on and turns on page 10105.
off when it has been disabled.
Rear Vision WARNING (Continued)

Vehicles Without a Navigation
Camera (RVC) System
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Do not back the vehicle by only When the vehicle is on and the
Camera (RVC) system. Read this looking at the RVC screen, or use driver shifts into R (Reverse), the
entire section before using it. the screen during longer, higher video image automatically appears
speed backing maneuvers or on the inside rearview mirror. Once
The RVC system can assist where there could be cross-traffic. the driver shifts out of R (Reverse),
the driver when backing up by Your judged distances using the the video image automatically
displaying a view of the area screen will differ from actual disappears from the inside rearview
behind the vehicle. mirror.
distances.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
{ WARNING If you do not use proper care
before backing up, you could System Off or On
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, To turn off the RVC system,
system does not replace driver bicyclist, or pet, resulting in press and hold z, located on the
vision. RVC does not: vehicle damage, injury, or death. inside rearview mirror, until the left
. Detect objects that are Even though the vehicle has indicator light turns off. The RVC
outside the camera's field the RVC system, always check display is now disabled.
of view, below the bumper, carefully before backing up by
To turn the RVC system on again,
or underneath the vehicle. checking behind and around the
vehicle. press and hold z until the left
. Detect children, pedestrians, indicator light illuminates. The RVC
bicyclists, or pets. system display is now enabled and
(Continued) the display will appear in the mirror
normally.
Vehicles With a Navigation Turning the Rear Vision Camera Symbols

System System On or Off The navigation system may
An image appears on the navigation To turn the rear vision camera have a feature that lets the driver
screen with the message Check system on or off: view symbols on the navigation
Surroundings for Safety when the 1. Shift into P (Park). screen while using the rear vision
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). camera. The Ultrasonic Front and
The navigation screen goes to the 2. Press the CONFIG button. Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)
previous screen after approximately 3. Select Display. system must not be disabled to
10 seconds once the vehicle is use the caution symbols. The error
shifted out of R (Reverse). message Rear Parking Assist
Symbols Unavailable may display
To cancel the delay, do one of the if UFRPA has been disabled and
following: the symbols have been turned on.
. Press a hard key on the See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
navigation system. page 940.
. Shift into P (Park). The symbols appear and may
cover an object when viewing the
. Reach a vehicle speed of
navigation screen when an object
8 km/h (5 mph).
is detected by the UFRPA system.
4. Select Camera. When a

checkmark appears next to the
Camera option, the RVC system
is on.
To turn the symbols on or off: To turn the guidelines on or off: Rear Vision Camera Location
1. Shift into P (Park). 1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button. 2. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Display. 3. Select Display.
4. Select Symbols. When a 4. Select Guidelines. When a
checkmark appears next to checkmark appears next to the
the Symbols option, symbols Guidelines option, guidelines
will appear. will appear.
Guidelines Rear Vision Camera Error
The RVC system has a guideline Messages
overlay that can help the driver align SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA
the vehicle when backing into a SYSTEM: This message can
parking spot. display when the system is not The camera is located above the
receiving information it requires license plate.
from other vehicle systems.
The area displayed by the camera is
If any other problem occurs or if a limited.
problem persists, see your dealer.
It does not display objects that are When the System Does Not
close to either corner or under the Seem to Work Properly
bumper and can vary depending
on vehicle orientation or road The rear vision camera system may
conditions. The distance of the not work properly or display a clear
image that appears on the screen image if:
is different from the actual distance. . The RVC is turned off.
The following illustration shows See Turning the Rear Vision
the field of view that the camera Camera System On or Off
provides. earlier in this section.
. It is dark.
. The sun or the beam of
headlamps is shining directly
into the camera lens.
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
. The back of the vehicle is in
an accident. The position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
A. View displayed by the camera. be affected. Be sure to have
the camera and its position and
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
mounting angle checked at your
dealer.
Fuel The VIN is at the top left of the

instrument panel. See Vehicle
Use of the recommended fuel Identification Number (VIN) on
is an important part of the proper page 121.
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
keep the engine clean and maintain
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
optimum vehicle performance,
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
we recommend the use of gasoline
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
Gasoline.
page 950. For all other vehicles,
Look for the TOP TIER label on the use only the unleaded gasoline
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets described under Recommended
enhanced detergency standards The eighth digit of the Vehicle Fuel on page 948.
developed by auto companies. A list Identification Number (VIN) shows
of marketers providing TOP TIER the code letter or number that
Detergent Gasoline can be found identifies the vehicle's engine.
at www.toptiergas.com.
Recommended Fuel If the vehicle has the 2.8L V6 engine Gasoline Specifications
(VIN Code 6), use premium
If the vehicle has the 3.0L V6 engine unleaded gasoline with a posted
(U.S. and Canada Only)
(VIN Code Y), use regular unleaded octane rating of 91 or higher. At a minimum, gasoline should
gasoline with a posted octane For best performance, use meet ASTM specification
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane premium unleaded gasoline with a D 4814 in the United States or
rating is less than 87, an audible posted octane rating of 93. In an CAN/CGSB3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
knocking noise, commonly referred emergency, you can use regular Some gasolines contain an
to as spark knock, might be heard unleaded gasoline with an octane octane-enhancing additive called
when driving. If this occurs, use rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
a gasoline rated at 87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
or higher as soon as possible. aggressive driving maneuvers such against the use of gasolines
If heavy knocking is heard when as wide open throttle applications. containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
using gasoline rated at 87 octane You might also hear audible spark on page 949 for additional
or higher, the engine needs service. knock during acceleration. Refill information.
the tank with premium fuel as soon
as possible to avoid damaging the
engine. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
91octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
California Fuel Fuels in Foreign However, some gasolines contain

only the minimum amount of
Requirements Countries additive required to meet U.S.
If the vehicle is certified to meet Never use leaded gasoline or any Environmental Protection Agency
California Emissions Standards, other fuel not recommended in the regulations. To help keep fuel
it is designed to operate on fuels previous text on fuel. Costly repairs injectors and intake valves clean
that meet California specifications. caused by use of improper fuel and avoid problems due to dirty
See the underhood emission control would not be covered by the vehicle injectors or valves, look for gasoline
label. If this fuel is not available in warranty. that is advertised as TOP TIER
states adopting California Emissions Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
To check the fuel availability, ask
Standards, the vehicle will operate TOP TIER label on the fuel pump
an auto club, or contact a major oil
satisfactorily on fuels meeting to ensure gasoline meets enhanced
company that does business in the
federal specifications, but emission detergency standards developed
country where you will be driving.
control system performance might by the auto companies. A list of
be affected. The malfunction marketers providing TOP TIER
indicator lamp could turn on and the Fuel Additives Detergent Gasoline can be found
vehicle might fail a smogcheck test. To provide cleaner air, all gasolines at www.toptiergas.com.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on in the United States are now
page 519. If this occurs, return to required to contain additives that
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. help prevent engine and fuel system
If it is determined that the condition deposits from forming, allowing the
is caused by the type of fuel used, emission control system to work
repairs might not be covered by the properly. In most cases, nothing
vehicle warranty. should have to be added to the fuel.
For customers who do not use Notice: This vehicle was not Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline designed for fuel that contains
regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel methanol. Do not use fuel Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
System Treatment PLUS, added containing methanol. It can and a yellow fuel cap can use either
to the fuel tank at every engine oil corrode metal parts in the fuel unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
change, can help clean deposits system and also damage plastic containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
from fuel injectors and intake and rubber parts. That damage For all other vehicles, use only the
valves. GM Fuel System Treatment would not be covered under the unleaded gasoline described under
PLUS is the only gasoline additive vehicle warranty. Recommended Fuel on page 948.
recommended by General Motors. Some gasolines that are We encourage the use of E85 in
It is available at your dealer. not reformulated for low vehicles that are designed to use it.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, emissions can contain an The ethanol in E85 is a renewable
such as ethers and ethanol, octane-enhancing additive called fuel, meaning it is made from
and reformulated gasolines methylcyclopentadienyl manganese renewable sources such as corn
might be available in your area. tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant and other crops.
We recommend that you use these where you buy gasoline whether the Many service stations will not have
gasolines, if they comply with the fuel contains MMT. We recommend an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump
specifications described earlier. against the use of such gasolines. available. The U.S. Department of
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Fuels containing MMT can reduce Energy has an alternative fuels
other fuels containing more than spark plug life and affect emission website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/
10% ethanol must not be used in control system performance. The locator/stations/) that can help you
vehicles that were not designed malfunction indicator lamp might find E85 fuel. Those stations that
for those fuels. turn on. If this occurs, return to do have E85 should have a label
your dealer for service. indicating ethanol content. Do not
use the fuel if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet and heater efficiency below 0C Notice: Some additives are not
ASTM Specification D 5798. (32F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank compatible with E85 fuel and can
By definition, this means that fuel should contain no more than 70% harm the vehicle's fuel system.
labeled E85 will have an ethanol ethanol. It is best not to alternate Do not add anything to E85.
content between 70% and 85%. repeatedly between gasoline and Damage caused by additives
Filling the fuel tank with fuel E85. If you do switch fuels, it is would not be covered by the
mixtures that do not meet ASTM recommended that you add as vehicle warranty.
specifications can affect driveability much fuel as possible do not Notice: This vehicle was not
and could cause the malfunction add less than 11 L (3 gal) when designed for fuel that contains
indicator lamp to come on. refueling. You should drive the methanol. Do not use fuel
To ensure quick starts in the vehicle immediately after refueling containing methanol. It can
wintertime, the E85 fuel must be for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow corrode metal parts in the fuel
formulated properly for your climate the vehicle to adapt to the change system and also damage plastic
according to ASTM specification in ethanol concentration. and rubber parts. That damage
D 5798. If you have trouble starting E85 has less energy per liter would not be covered under the
on E85, it could be because the (gallon) than gasoline, so you will vehicle warranty.
E85 fuel is not properly formulated need to refill the fuel tank more
for your climate. If this happens, often when using E85 than when
switching to gasoline or adding you are using gasoline. See Filling
gasoline to the fuel tank can the Tank on page 952.
improve starting. For good starting
Filling the Tank Lamp could turn on.

See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 519.
{ WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a { WARNING
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and Fuel can spray out on you if you
others, read and follow all the open the fuel cap too quickly.
instructions on the fuel pump If you spill fuel and then
island. Turn off the engine when something ignites it, you could
refueling. Do not smoke near be badly burned. This spray can
fuel or when refueling the vehicle. happen if the tank is nearly full,
Do not use cellular phones. Keep The tethered fuel cap is located and is more likely in hot weather.
sparks, flames, and smoking behind a hinged fuel door on the Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
materials away from fuel. Do not passenger side of the vehicle. for any hiss noise to stop. Then
leave the fuel pump unattended unscrew the cap all the way.
To open the fuel door, push the
when refueling the vehicle. This rearward center edge in and release
is against the law in some places. and it will open. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
Do not re-enter the vehicle while To remove the fuel cap, turn it top off or overfill the tank and wait
pumping fuel. Keep children away slowly counterclockwise. a few seconds after you have
from the fuel pump; never let finished pumping before removing
children pump fuel. While refueling, hang the tethered the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
fuel cap from the hook on the surfaces as soon as possible.
fuel door. See Exterior Care on page 10105.
When reinstalling the cap, turn When replacing the fuel cap, turn
it clockwise until it clicks once, it clockwise until it clicks once.
otherwise the Malfunction Indicator Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued)

determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. This
Container
would allow fuel to evaporate into
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact
the atmosphere. See Malfunction { WARNING with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
Indicator Lamp on page 519.
Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be
while it is in the vehicle. Static
{ WARNING electricity discharge from the
maintained until the filling is
complete.
If a fire starts while you are container can ignite the fuel . Do not smoke while
refueling, do not remove the vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel.
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to
. Do not use a cellular phone
by shutting off the pump or by
you and others: while pumping fuel.
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately. . Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is . Do not fill a container while
needed, be sure to get the right it is inside a vehicle, in a
type of cap from your dealer. vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
The wrong type of fuel cap might or on any surface other than
not fit properly, might cause the the ground.
malfunction indicator lamp to (Continued)
light, and could damage the
fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 519.

. For maximum vehicle and trailer
Towing weights, see Trailer Towing.
Driving Characteristics
.
and Towing Tips
For information on equipment
General Towing to tow a trailer, see Towing
Information Equipment. { WARNING
Only use towing equipment that For information on towing a disabled The driver can lose control when
has been designed for the vehicle. vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on pulling a trailer if the correct
Contact your dealer or trailering page 10101. For information on equipment is not used or the
dealer for assistance with preparing towing the vehicle behind another vehicle is not driven properly.
the vehicle for towing a trailer. vehicle such as a motor home, see For example, if the trailer is too
See the following trailer towing Recreational Vehicle Towing on heavy, the brakes may not work
information in this section: page 10101. well or even at all. The driver
. For information on driving and passengers could be
while towing a trailer, see seriously injured. The vehicle may
Driving Characteristics and also be damaged; the resulting
Towing Tips. repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the
vehicle.
The vehicle can tow a trailer when Pulling a Trailer

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
equipped with the proper trailer Use a lower gear if the
Here are some important points: transmission shifts too often.
towing equipment. For trailering
capacity, see Trailer Towing on . There are many laws, including . Do not use the Fuel Economy
page 958. Trailering changes speed limit restrictions that apply Mode when towing.
handling, acceleration, braking, to trailering. Check for legal
durability and fuel economy. requirements.
. Obey speed limit restrictions.
With the added weight, the engine, Do not drive faster than the
. Do not tow a trailer at all during
transmission, wheel assemblies and maximum posted speed for
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles) trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
tires are forced to work harder and the new vehicle is driven.
under greater loads. The trailer also (55 mph), to reduce wear on the
The engine, axle or other vehicle.
adds wind resistance, increasing parts could be damaged.
the pulling requirements. For safe
trailering, correctly use the proper . During the first 800 km
trailering equipment. (500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
The following information has (50 mph) and do not make starts
important trailering tips and rules at full throttle. This reduces wear
for your safety and that of your on the vehicle.
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.
Driving with a Trailer Towing with a Stability Control Backing Up

Towing a trailer requires experience. System Hold the bottom of the steering
Get familiar with handling and When towing, the sound of the wheel with one hand. To move the
braking with the added trailer stability control system might be trailer to the left, move that hand
weight. The vehicle is now longer heard. The system is reacting to to the left. To move the trailer to
and not as responsive as the the vehicle movement caused by the right, move your hand to the
vehicle is by itself. the trailer, which mainly occurs right. Always back up slowly and,
Check all trailer hitch parts during cornering. This is normal if possible, have someone
and attachments, safety chains, when towing heavier trailers. guide you.
electrical connectors, lamps, tires Following Distance Making Turns
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle Stay at least twice as far behind the Notice: Making very sharp turns
and trailer moving and then apply vehicle ahead as you would when while trailering could cause the
the trailer brake controller by hand driving the vehicle without a trailer. trailer to come in contact with
to be sure the brakes are working. This can help to avoid situations the vehicle. The vehicle could
that require heavy braking and be damaged. Avoid making very
During the trip, check regularly to be sudden turns. sharp turns while trailering.
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working Passing When turning with a trailer, make
properly. wider turns than normal so the
More passing distance is needed trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
when towing a trailer. Because the curbs, road signs, trees or other
rig is longer, it is necessary to go objects. Use the turn signal well in
farther beyond the passed vehicle advance and avoid jerky or sudden
before returning to the lane. maneuvers.
Turn Signals When Towing a The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Parking on Hills
Trailer Use a lower gear if the transmission
The turn signal indicators on the
shifts too often. { WARNING
instrument panel flash whenever When towing at high altitude on
signaling a turn or lane change. steep uphill grades, engine coolant Parking the vehicle on a hill
Properly hooked up, the trailer boils at a lower temperature than with the trailer attached can be
lamps also flash, telling other at normal altitudes. If the engine is dangerous. If something goes
drivers the vehicle is turning, turned off immediately after towing wrong, the rig could start to move.
changing lanes or stopping. at high altitude on steep uphill People can be injured, and both
grades, the vehicle could show the vehicle and the trailer can be
When towing a trailer, the arrows on signs similar to engine overheating. damaged. When possible, always
the instrument panel flash for turns To avoid this, let the engine run park the rig on a flat surface.
even if the bulbs on the trailer are while parked, preferably on level
burned out. Check occasionally to ground, with the transmission in
be sure the trailer bulbs are still P (Park) for a few minutes before If parking the rig on a hill:
working. turning the engine off. If the 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
Driving on Grades overheat warning comes on, see not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
Engine Overheating on page 1024. the wheels into the curb if facing
Reduce speed and shift to a downhill or into traffic if facing
lower gear before starting down uphill.
a long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, 2. Have someone place chocks
the brakes might have to be used under the trailer wheels.
so much that they would get hot 3. When the wheel chocks are in
and no longer work well. place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. transmission fluid, engine oil, axle Weight of the Trailer
Then apply the parking brake lubricant, belts, cooling system and
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
and shift into P (Park). brake system. Inspect these before
and during the trip. It depends on how the rig is used.
5. Release the brake pedal.
For example, speed, altitude, road
Check periodically to see that all
Leaving After Parking on a Hill grades, outside temperature and
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
how much the vehicle is used to
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal pull a trailer are all important. It can
while you:
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing depend on any special equipment
. Start the engine. on the vehicle, and the amount of
The cooling system may temporarily tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
. Shift into a gear. overheat during severe operating See Weight of the Trailer Tongue
. Release the parking brake. conditions. See Engine Overheating later in this section for more
on page 1024. information.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is Trailer Towing Maximum trailer weight is calculated
clear of the chocks. assuming only the driver is in
Before pulling a trailer, there are the tow vehicle and it has all the
4. Stop and have someone pick up three important considerations that required trailering equipment.
and store the chocks. have to do with weight: The weight of additional optional
Maintenance When Trailer . The weight of the trailer equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
Towing . The weight of the trailer tongue from the maximum trailer weight.
The vehicle needs service more . The total weight on the vehicle's Use the following chart to determine
often when pulling a trailer. See this tires how much the vehicle can weigh,
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
based upon the vehicle model and
index for more information. Things
options.
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
Maximum Trailer Maximum Tongue

Vehicle Weight GCWR* Weight
2.8L Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 725 kg (8,212 lbs) 159 kg (350 lbs)
3.0L Engine, FWD without Trailering
1 134 kg (2,500 lbs) 3 185 kg (7,022 lbs) 113 kg (250 lbs)
Package
3.0L Engine, FWD with Trailering Package 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 640 kg (8,025 lbs) 159 kg (350 lbs)
3.0L Engine, AWD without Trailering
1 134 kg (2,500 lbs) 3 270 kg (7,209 lbs) 159 kg (350 lbs)
Package
3.0L Engine, AWD with Trailering Package 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 725 kg (8,212 lbs) 159 kg (350 lbs)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for trailering Weight of the Trailer Tongue If there are a lot of options,
information or advice. equipment, passengers or cargo in
The tongue load (A) of any trailer
See Customer Assistance Offices the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
is an important weight to measure
(U.S. and Canada) on page 135 weight the vehicle can carry, which
because it affects the total gross
or Customer Assistance Offices will also reduce the trailer weight the
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
(Mexico) on page 136 for more vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
information. the tongue load must be added
the curb weight of the vehicle, any
to the GVW because the vehicle
cargo carried in it, and the people
will be carrying that weight, too.
who will be riding in the vehicle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on After loading the trailer, weigh Total Weight on the Vehicle's
page 912 for more information the trailer and then the tongue, Tires
about the vehicle's maximum load separately, to see if the weights are
capacity. proper. If they are not, adjustments Be sure the vehicle's tires are
might be made by moving some inflated to the upper limit for cold
items around in the trailer. tires. These numbers can be found
on the Certification label or see
Trailering may be limited by the Vehicle Load Limits on page 912
vehicle's ability to carry tongue for more information. Make sure not
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause to go over the GVW limit for the
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR vehicle, or the GAWR, including the
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or weight of the trailer tongue. If using
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle a weight distributing hitch, make
Weight Rating). The effect of sure not to go over the rear axle
additional weight may reduce the limit before applying the weight
trailering capacity more than the distribution spring bars.
total of the additional weight.
It is important that the vehicle
If a weight-carrying hitch or a does not exceed any of its
weight-distributing hitch is being ratings GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
used, the trailer tongue (A) should Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue
weigh 1015 percent of the total Weight. The only way to be sure it is
loaded trailer weight (B). not exceeding any of these ratings
is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.
Towing Equipment Hitch Cover To reinstall the hitch cover:

1. Hold the cover at a 45 degree
Hitches angle to the vehicle and push
It is important to have the correct the upper tabs in the hitch cover
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large into the slots in the fascia.
trucks going by and rough roads are 2. Move the bottom of the cover
a few reasons why the right hitch is
forward until the lower tabs line
needed.
up with the lower fascia slots.
. The rear bumper on the vehicle
3. Snap the hitch cover into place
is not intended for hitches.
by pushing the upper corners
Do not attach rental hitches or
forward.
other bumper-type hitches to it.
Use only a frame-mounted hitch 4. Turn the fasteners on the lower
that does not attach to the tabs 90 degrees clockwise to
The vehicle may have a hitch cover. lock the cover in place.
bumper.
To remove the hitch cover:
. Will any holes be made in the Safety Chains
1. Turn the fasteners on
body of the vehicle when the
the lower tabs 90 degrees Always attach chains between the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
counterclockwise. vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
are, then be sure to seal the
holes later when the hitch is 2. Lift the lower edge of the cover safety chains under the tongue
about 45 degrees. of the trailer to help prevent the
removed. If the holes are not
sealed, dirt, water, and deadly tongue from contacting the road if it
3. Pull the cover downward becomes separated from the hitch.
carbon monoxide (CO) from to disengage the upper
the exhaust can get into the Always leave just enough slack so
attachments. the rig can turn. Never allow safety
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 924. chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes Trailer Sway Conversions and

A loaded trailer that weighs more Control (TSC) Add-Ons
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway
have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the
Control (TSC) feature as part of the Add-On Electrical
StabiliTrak system. If TSC detects
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
that the trailer is swaying, the
Equipment
the instructions for the trailer brakes
vehicle's brakes are automatically Notice: Do not add anything
so they are installed, adjusted and
applied. electrical to the vehicle unless
maintained properly.
you check with your dealer first.
Because the vehicle has anti-lock Some electrical equipment can
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's damage the vehicle and the
brake system. If you do, both brake damage would not be covered
systems will not work well, or at all. by the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
Trailer Wiring Harness keep other components from
All of the electrical circuits required When TSC is applying the brakes, working as they should.
for the trailer lighting system can be the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator light Add-on equipment can drain the
accessed at a connector mounted to flashes to notify the driver to vehicle's 12volt battery, even if the
the frame, behind the rear bumper reduce speed. See Traction Control vehicle is not operating.
cover. System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light on
The vehicle has an airbag system.
page 525. If the trailer continues to Before attempting to add anything
sway, StabiliTrak will reduce engine
electrical to the vehicle, see
torque to help slow the vehicle.
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is Vehicle on page 343 and Adding
turned off. Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 344.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-24 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-26 High Intensity Discharge
General Information Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
California Proposition Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . 10-43
California Perchlorate All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-31 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-46
Accessories and Automatic Transmission Shift Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Lock Control Function
Vehicle Checks Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Electrical System
Doing Your Own Ignition Transmission Lock Electrical System
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Park Brake and P (Park) Fuses and Circuit
Engine Compartment Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-32 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Wiper Blade Engine Compartment Fuse
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Instrument Panel Fuse
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Headlamp Aiming Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Rear Compartment Fuse
Automatic Transmission
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16
10-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Wheel Alignment and Tire General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-57 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-78 For service and parts needs,
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 visit your dealer. You will receive
Tire Terminology and If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Tire Sealant and and supported service people.
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Genuine GM parts have one of
Tire Pressure for High-Speed Storing the Tire Sealant and these marks:
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-96
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Jump Starting
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Towing
When It Is Time for New Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-101
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Recreational Vehicle
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Appearance Care
Uniform Tire Quality Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and

65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications
Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding nondealer accessories
one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag or making modifications to
known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners, the vehicle can affect vehicle
cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in performance and safety, including
other reproductive harm. Engine Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, such things as airbags, braking,
exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials. stability, ride and handling,
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. emissions systems, aerodynamics,
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see durability, and electronic systems
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ like antilock brakes, traction
perchlorate. control, and stability control.
These accessories or modifications
could even cause malfunction
or damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Damage to vehicle components Vehicle Checks

resulting from modifications or WARNING (Continued)
the installation or use of nonGM
certified parts, including control Doing Your Own . Be sure to use the proper
module or software modifications, Service Work nuts, bolts, and other
is not covered under the terms of fasteners. Metric and
English fasteners can be
the vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
{ WARNING easily confused. If the wrong
affected parts. You can be injured and the fasteners are used, parts
vehicle could be damaged if you can later break or fall off.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other try to do service work on a vehicle You could be hurt.
systems on the vehicle. Your GM without knowing enough about it.
dealer can accessorize the vehicle . Be sure you have sufficient If doing some of your own service
using genuine GM Accessories. knowledge, experience, work, use the proper service
When you go to your GM dealer the proper replacement manual. It tells you much more
and ask for GM Accessories, you parts, and tools before about how to service the vehicle
will know that GM-trained and attempting any vehicle than this manual can. To order the
supported service technicians will maintenance task. proper service manual, see Service
perform the work using genuine Publications Ordering Information
GM Accessories. (Continued) on page 1316.
Also, see Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 344.
Vehicle Care 10-5
This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood

Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the To open the hood:
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 343.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Records on
page 1110.
2. Move the secondary hood

release lever up to release
the striker. The lever is located
near the middle of the hood.
1. Pull the release handle with the
above symbol on it. It is located 3. Lift the hood.
below the instrument panel to Before closing the hood, be sure all
the left of the steering wheel. the filler caps are on properly.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.8 L V6 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and

page 1016. Pressure Cap. See Engine
B. Power Steering Reservoir and Coolant on page 1020.
Cap. See Power Steering Fluid H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
on page 1026. See Jump Starting on
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine page 1096.
Oil on page 1010. I. Remote Negative () Terminal
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine (Out of View). See Jump
Oil on page 1010. Starting on page 1096.
E. Brake Master Cylinder J. Engine Compartment Fuse

Reservoir. See Brakes on Block on page 1048.
page 1027. K. Windshield Washer Fluid
F. Battery (Out of View). Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
See Battery on page 1030. page 1026.
10-8 Vehicle Care
3.0 L V6 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on F. Transmission Fluid Cap J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
page 1016. and Dipstick (Out of View). See Jump Starting on
B. Power Steering Reservoir and See Automatic Transmission page 1096.
Cap (Under Engine Cover). Fluid on page 1016. K. Remote Negative () Terminal
See Power Steering Fluid on G. Brake Master Cylinder (Out of View). See Jump
page 1026. Reservoir. See Brakes on Starting on page 1096.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine page 1027. L. Engine Compartment Fuse
Oil on page 1010. H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Block on page 1048.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Pressure Cap. See Engine M. Windshield Washer Fluid
View). See Engine Oil on Coolant on page 1020. Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 1010. I. Battery (Out of View). page 1026.
E. Engine Cover on page 1010. See Battery on page 1030.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Engine Cover To remove: Engine Oil

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A). To ensure proper engine
2. Remove the engine cover performance and long life,
bolt (B). careful attention must be paid to
engine oil. Following these simple,
3. Raise the engine cover (C) to but important steps will help protect
release from the retainers.
your investment:
4. Lift and remove the engine . Always use engine oil approved
cover. to the proper specification and
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to of the proper viscosity grade.
reinstall engine cover. See Selecting the Right Engine
Oil in this section.
Engine Cover (3.0 L V6)

. Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
A. Oil Fill Cap proper oil level. See Checking
B. Engine Cover Bolt Engine Oil and When to Add
Engine Oil in this section.
C. Engine Cover
. Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine
Oil Life System on page 1014.
. Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See What to Do with
Used Oil in this section.
Vehicle Care 10-11
Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 106 for the location of the
It is a good idea to check the If the oil is below the cross-hatched
engine oil fill cap.
engine oil level at each fuel fill. area at the tip of the dipstick, add
In order to get an accurate reading, 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended Add enough oil to put the level
the vehicle must be on level ground. oil and then recheck the level. somewhere in the proper operating
The engine oil dipstick handle See Selecting the Right Engine range. Push the dipstick all the way
is a yellow loop. See Engine Oil in this section for an back in when through.
Compartment Overview on explanation of what kind of oil to
page 106 for the location use. For engine oil crankcase
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
of the engine oil dipstick. capacity, see Capacities and Selecting the right engine oil
1. If the engine has been running Specifications on page 122. depends on both the proper oil
recently, turn off the engine and Notice: Do not add too much specification and viscosity grade:
allow several minutes for the oil oil. Oil levels above or below Specification (3.0L V6 Engine)
to drain back into the oil pan. the acceptable operating range
Checking the oil level too soon shown on the dipstick are harmful Use and ask for engine oils with
after engine shutoff will not to the engine. If you find that the dexos certification mark.
provide an accurate oil level you have an oil level above the Oils meeting the requirements of
the vehicle should have the dexos
reading. operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level certification mark on the container.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean This certification mark indicates that
it with a paper towel or cloth, gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper the oil has been approved to the
then push it back in all the way. dexos specification.
Remove it again, keeping the tip operating range, the engine
down, and check the level. could be damaged. You should
drain out the excess oil or limit
driving of the vehicle and seek a
service professional to remove
the excess amount of oil.
10-12 Vehicle Care
not available at an oil change or Notice: Use only engine oil

for maintaining proper oil level, that is approved to the dexos
you may use substitute engine oil specification or an equivalent
displaying the API Starburst symbol engine oil of the appropriate
and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade. viscosity grade. Engine
Use of oils that do not meet the oils approved to the dexos
dexos specification, however, specification will show the
This vehicle was filled at the factory may result in reduced performance dexos symbol on the container.
with dexosapproved engine oil. under certain circumstances. Failure to use the recommended
Notice: Use only engine oil engine oil or equivalent can
Specification (2.8L V6 Engine) result in engine damage not
that is approved to the dexos
specification or an equivalent Use and ask for engine oils with covered by the vehicle warranty.
engine oil of the appropriate the dexos certification mark. Oils If you are unsure whether the
viscosity grade. Engine oils meeting the requirements of the oil is approved to the dexos
approved to the dexos vehicle should have the dexos specification, ask your service
specification will show the certification mark on the container. provider.
dexos symbol on the container. This certification mark indicates that Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
Failure to use the recommended the oil has been approved to the dexos is unavailable for top-up only:
engine oil or equivalent can dexos specification. Engine oil not meeting the dexos
result in engine damage not specification or equivalent should
covered by the vehicle warranty. not be used for an oil change. In the
If you are unsure whether the event that dexosapproved engine
oil is approved to the dexos oil is not available for maintaining
specification, ask your service proper oil level, however, you may
provider. use substitute engine oil displaying
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if the API Starburst symbol and of
dexos is unavailable: In the event This vehicle was filled at the factory SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
that dexosapproved engine oil is with dexosapproved engine oil.
Vehicle Care 10-13
Extensive use of oils that do not Cold Temperature Operation: In

meet the dexos specification, an area of extreme cold, where
however, may result in reduced the temperature falls below
performance or engine damage 29C (20F), an SAE 0W-30
under certain circumstances. oil should be used. An oil of this
Maintaining the proper oil level is viscosity grade will provide easier
very important. However, if you cold starting for the engine at
use a substitute oil for any reason, extremely low temperatures.
we recommend that you perform a When selecting an oil of the
complete oil change back to dexos appropriate viscosity grade, be
as soon as possible to protect the sure to always select an oil that
engine and maintain the engine's meets the required specification,
peak performance. dexos. See Specification earlier
in this section for more information.
Viscosity Grade
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not
use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W30, 10W40, or 20W-50.
10-14 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Additives/Engine What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System
Oil Flushes Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil
Do not add anything to the oil. elements that can be unhealthy for
The recommended oils with the your skin and could even cause This vehicle has a computer system
dexos specification and displaying cancer. Do not let used oil stay on that indicates when to change the
the dexos certification mark are all your skin for very long. Clean your engine oil and filter. This is based
that is needed for good performance skin and nails with soap and water, on engine revolutions and engine
and engine protection. or a good hand cleaner. Wash or temperature, and not on mileage.
properly dispose of clothing or rags Based on driving conditions, the
Engine oil system flushes are not mileage at which an oil change is
containing used engine oil. See the
recommended and could cause indicated can vary considerably.
manufacturer's warnings about the
engine damage not covered by the For the oil life system to work
use and disposal of oil products.
vehicle warranty. properly, the system must be reset
Used oil can be a threat to the
every time the oil is changed.
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the When the system has calculated
oil from the filter before disposal. that oil life has been diminished,
Never dispose of oil by putting it indicates that an oil change is
it in the trash or pouring it on the necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
ground, into sewers, or into streams OIL SOON message comes on. See
or bodies of water. Recycle it by Engine Oil Messages on page 537.
taking it to a place that collects Change the oil as soon as possible
used oil. within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
Vehicle Care 10-15
It is possible that, if driving under How to Reset the Engine Oil The oil life system can also be reset
the best conditions, the oil life Life System as follows:
system might indicate that an oil 1. Turn the ignition on with the
change is not necessary for up to a Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the engine off.
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year system can calculate the next 2. Fully press and release the
and at this time the system must engine oil change. To reset the accelerator pedal three times
be reset. Your dealer has trained system: within five seconds.
service people who will perform this 1. Using the DIC MENU button and If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
work and reset the system. It is also thumbwheel on the turn signal SOON message is not on, the
important to check the oil regularly lever, display REMAINING OIL system is reset.
over the course of an oil drain LIFE on the DIC. See Driver
interval and keep it at the proper Information Center (DIC) on The system is reset when the
level. page 529 and Engine Oil CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Messages on page 537. message is off.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be 2. Press the SET/CLR button to If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) reset the oil life at 100%. message comes back on when the
since the last oil change. vehicle is started, the engine oil life
Be careful not to reset the oil system has not been reset. Repeat
Remember to reset the oil life
life display accidentally at any the procedure.
system whenever the oil is changed.
time other than after the oil is
changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil
change.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Automatic Transmission There is a special procedure Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

for checking and changing the
Fluid transmission fluid. Because this See Engine Compartment Overview
procedure is difficult, you should on page 106 for the location of the
How to Check Automatic engine air cleaner/filter.
Transmission Fluid have this done at your dealer
service department. Contact your When to Inspect the Engine Air
It is not necessary to check dealer for additional information
the transmission fluid level. Cleaner/Filter
or the procedure can be found in
A transmission fluid leak is the the service manual. To purchase Inspect the air cleaner/filter at
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak a service manual, see Service the scheduled maintenance
occurs, take the vehicle to your Publications Ordering Information intervals and replace it at the first
dealer service department and on page 1316. oil change after each 80 000 km
have it repaired as soon as (50,000 mi) interval. See Scheduled
possible. Change the fluid and filter at
Maintenance on page 112 for more
the intervals listed in Scheduled
information. If driving in dusty/dirty
Maintenance on page 112, and
conditions, inspect the filter at each
be sure to use the fluid listed
engine oil change.
in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 117.
Vehicle Care 10-17
How to Inspect the Engine Air 3.0 L V6 Shown, 2.8 L V6 Similar 5. Lift the retaining clips (C) on the
Cleaner/Filter air filter housing.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 6. Turn and tilt cover slightly
remove the filter from the vehicle upwards and slide cover away
and lightly shake the filter to from outside edge of vehicle.
release loose dust and dirt. If the Remove the air filter.
filter remains covered with dirt, a
new filter is required. Never use
compressed air to clean the filter.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 105.
2. Locate the air filter housing on A. Air Duct Clamp
the front of the passenger side B. Electrical Connectors
of the engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment C. Retaining Clips
Overview on page 106. 3. Disconnect the outlet duct by
loosening the air duct clamp (A). A. Cover Cut Outs
4. Disconnect the electrical B. Air Filter Tabs
connectors (B).
10-18 Vehicle Care
7. To install the air filter, place filter 9. Retighten the air duct clamp. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
inside box where the pleats fit in 10. Reconnect the electrical off, dirt can easily get into the
between the tabs located inside connectors. engine, which could damage it.
the lower box. Ensure that the Always have the air cleaner/filter
cover cut outs (A) on both sides in place when you are driving.
match the air filter tabs (B) on { WARNING Notice: Installing an air
both sides. cleaner different than the one
Operating the engine with the air
8. Replace air cleaner cover by cleaner/filter off can cause you recommended in Maintenance
inserting tabs appropriately into or others to be burned. The air Replacement Parts may cause
slots. Lower cover to meet cleaner not only cleans the air; engine damage not covered by
bottom of box. Place clips on it helps to stop flames if the the vehicle warranty.
retention features and clip engine backfires. Use caution
closed. when working on the engine
and do not drive with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Vehicle Care 10-19
Cooling System The coolant level should be

{ WARNING between the MIN and MAX lines.
When it is safe to lift the hood: If it is not, the vehicle may have a
An electric engine cooling fan leak at the radiator hoses, heater
under the hood can start up hoses, radiator, water pump,
even when the engine is not or somewhere else in the cooling
running and can cause injury. system.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood
electric fan.
{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and
If the coolant inside the coolant other engine parts, can be very
surge tank is boiling, do not do hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
anything else until it cools down. you can be burned.
The vehicle should be parked on Do not run the engine if there is
3.0 L V6 Engine Shown, a level surface. a leak. If you run the engine, it
2.8 L V6 Engine Similar could lose all coolant. That could
A. Engine Cooling Fan cause an engine fire, and you
(Out of View) could be burned. Get any leak
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Pressure Cap
10-20 Vehicle Care
If there seems to be no leak, Engine Coolant What to Use

with the engine on, check to
The cooling system in the vehicle
see if the electric engine cooling
fan is running. If the engine is is filled with DEX-COOL engine { WARNING
overheating, the fan should be coolant. This coolant is designed to
Adding only plain water or some
running. If it is not, the vehicle remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
other liquid to the cooling system
needs service. Turn off the engine. 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first. can be dangerous. Plain water
Notice: Using coolant other than and other liquids, can boil before
DEX-COOL can cause premature The following explains the cooling the proper coolant mixture will.
engine, heater core, or radiator system and how to check and add The coolant warning system is
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant when it is low. If there is a set for the proper coolant mixture.
coolant could require changing problem with engine overheating, With plain water or the wrong
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) see Engine Overheating on mixture, the engine could get too
or 24 months, whichever occurs page 1024.
hot but you would not get the
first. Any repairs would not be overheat warning. The engine
covered by the vehicle warranty. could catch fire and you or
Always use DEX-COOL others could be burned. Use
(silicate-free) coolant in the a 50/50 mixture of clean,
vehicle.
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If an improper coolant Checking Coolant

drinkable water and DEX-COOL mixture is used, the engine could
The vehicle must be on a level
coolant. If using this mixture, overheat and be badly damaged.
surface when checking the coolant
nothing else needs to be added. The repair cost would not be
level.
This mixture: covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture Check to see if coolant is visible
. Gives freezing protection down
can freeze and crack the engine, in the coolant surge tank. If the
to 37C (34F), outside
radiator, heater core, and other coolant inside the coolant surge
temperature.
parts. tank is boiling, do not do anything
. Gives boiling protection up else until it cools down. If coolant
to 129C (265F), engine Never dispose of engine coolant
is visible but the coolant level is
temperature. by putting it in the trash, pouring
not at the indicated mark, add a
it on the ground, or into sewers,
. Protects against rust and 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
streams, or bodies of water.
corrosion. water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
Have the coolant changed by an
coolant surge tank, but be sure the
. Will not damage aluminum parts. authorized service center, familiar
cooling system is cool before this is
with legal requirements regarding
. Helps keep the proper engine done. See Engine Overheating on
used coolant disposal. This will help
temperature. page 1024 for more information.
protect the environment and your
health. The coolant surge tank is located
in the engine compartment on
the driver side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 106 for more information
on location.
10-22 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the

Coolant Surge Tank { WARNING { WARNING
Notice: This vehicle has a Steam and scalding liquids from a Adding only plain water or some
specific coolant fill procedure. hot cooling system can blow out other liquid to the cooling system
Failure to follow this procedure and burn you badly. They are can be dangerous. Plain water
could cause the engine to under pressure, and if you turn and other liquids, can boil before
overheat and be severely the coolant surge tank pressure the proper coolant mixture will.
damaged. cap even a little they can The coolant warning system is
If no problem is found, check come out at high speed. Never set for the proper coolant mixture.
to see if coolant is visible in the turn the cap when the cooling With plain water or the wrong
coolant surge tank. If coolant is system, including the coolant mixture, the engine could get too
visible but the coolant level is not surge tank pressure cap, is hot. hot but you would not get the
at the indicated level mark, add a Wait for the cooling system and overheat warning. The engine
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable coolant surge tank pressure cap could catch fire and you or
water and DEX-COOL coolant at to cool if you ever have to turn others could be burned. Use a
the coolant surge tank, but be sure the pressure cap. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
the cooling system, including the water and DEX-COOL coolant.
coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is cool before you do it.
Vehicle Care 10-23
Notice: In cold weather, water

can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core and other
parts. Use the recommended
coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
{ WARNING
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts 2.8 L V6 Engine 3.0 L V6 Engine
are hot enough. Do not spill
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
coolant on a hot engine.
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you
hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
This will allow any pressure
still left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
10-24 Vehicle Care
2. Then keep turning the pressure Check the level in the coolant surge If the decision is made to lift the
cap slowly and remove it. tank when the cooling system has hood, make sure the vehicle is
3. Fill the coolant surge tank cooled down. If the coolant is not parked on a level surface.
with the proper DEX-COOL at the proper level, repeat Steps 1 Then check to see if the engine
coolant mixture to the indicated through 3 and reinstall the pressure cooling fans are running. If the
level mark. cap. If the coolant still is not at the engine is overheating, both fans
proper level when the system cools should be running. If they are not,
4. With the coolant surge tank down again, see your dealer.
pressure cap off, start the do not continue to run the engine
engine and let it run until you and have the vehicle serviced.
Engine Overheating
can feel the upper radiator Notice: Engine damage from
hose getting hot. Watch out The vehicle has an indicator to warn running the engine without
for the engine cooling fan. of engine overheating. coolant is not covered by the
By this time, the coolant level There is an engine coolant warranty.
inside the coolant surge tank temperature warning light on Notice: If the engine catches fire
may be lower. If the level is the vehicle's instrument panel. because of being driven with no
lower, add more of the proper See Engine Coolant Temperature coolant, the vehicle can be badly
DEX-COOL coolant mixture Gauge on page 515. damaged. The costly repairs
to the coolant surge tank until If the decision is made not to lift the would not be covered by the
the level reaches the indicated hood when this warning appears, vehicle warranty.
level mark. but instead get service help right
5. Then replace the pressure cap. away. See Roadside Service
Be sure the pressure cap is (U.S. and Canada) on page 138
hand-tight. or Roadside Service (Mexico) on
page 1311.
Vehicle Care 10-25
If Steam Is Coming from the If No Steam Is Coming from 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
If an engine overheat warning is the road, shift to P (Park)
{ WARNING displayed but no steam can be seen or N (Neutral) and let the
or heard, the problem may not be engine idle.
Steam from an overheated engine too serious. Sometimes the engine
can burn you badly, even if you can get a little too hot when the If the temperature overheat gauge
just open the hood. Stay away vehicle: is no longer in the overheat zone
from the engine if you see or hear .
or an overheat warning no longer
steam coming from it. Just turn it Climbs a long hill on a hot day displays, the vehicle can be driven.
off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
the vehicle until it cools down. for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
. Idles for long periods in traffic
Wait until there is no sign of vehicle distance from the vehicle in
steam or coolant before you
. Tows a trailer front. If the warning does not come
open the hood. If the overheat warning displays with back on, continue to drive normally.
no sign of steam: If the warning continues, pull
If you keep driving when the
engine is overheated, the liquids 1. Turn the air off. over, stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
in it can catch fire. You or others 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
could be badly burned. Stop the temperature and to the highest If there is no sign of steam,
engine if it overheats, and get out fan speed. Open the windows as idle the engine for three minutes
of the vehicle until the engine necessary. while parked. If the warning is still
is cool. displayed, turn off the engine until
it cools down.
10-26 Vehicle Care
Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering What to Use

Fluid To determine what kind of fluid to
To check the power steering fluid: use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 117. Always
1. Turn the engine off and let the
use the proper fluid.
engine compartment cool down.
2. Remove the engine cover, Washer Fluid
if required. See Engine Cover on
See Engine Compartment Overview page 1010. What to Use
on page 106 for reservoir location. 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the When windshield washer fluid
reservoir clean. is needed, be sure to read the
When to Check Power Steering
manufacturer's instructions before
Fluid 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
use. If operating the vehicle in an
dipstick with a clean rag.
It is not necessary to regularly area where the temperature may
check power steering fluid unless 5. Replace the cap and completely fall below freezing, use a fluid that
a leak is suspected in the system tighten it. has sufficient protection against
or unusual noise is heard. A fluid 6. Remove the cap again and look freezing.
loss in this system could indicate a at the fluid level on the dipstick.
problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. The level should be within the
HOT mark. If necessary, add only
enough fluid to bring the level within
the mark.
Vehicle Care 10-27

. Do not mix water with
Adding Washer Fluid
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Brakes
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD Water can cause the solution This vehicle has disc brakes.
FLUID message appears on the to freeze and damage the Disc brake pads have built-in wear
Driver Information Center (DIC) washer fluid tank and other indicators that make a high-pitched
when the fluid level is low. parts of the washer system. warning sound when the brake pads
Also, water does not clean are worn and new pads are needed.
as well as washer fluid. The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
. Fill the washer fluid tank
moving, except when applying
only three-quarters full when
the brake pedal firmly.
it is very cold. This allows
for fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could { WARNING
Open the cap with the washer damage the tank if it is
symbol on it. Add washer fluid completely full. The brake wear warning sound
up to the fill mark. See Engine means that soon the brakes will
Compartment Overview on
. Do not use engine coolant not work well. That could lead to
page 106 for reservoir location. (antifreeze) in the windshield a crash. When the brake wear
washer. It can damage the warning sound is heard, have
Notice windshield washer system
the vehicle serviced.
. When using concentrated and paint.
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions Notice: Continuing to drive with
for adding water. worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment Brake Fluid

can cause a brake squeal when
Every time the brakes are applied,
the brakes are first applied or
with or without the vehicle moving,
lightly applied. This does not mean
the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are Replacing Brake System Parts
necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be The brake master cylinder reservoir
inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
evenly tighten wheel nuts in if the vehicle is to have really good indicated on the reservoir cap.
the proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed See Engine Compartment Overview
specifications in Capacities and and tested with top-quality brake on page 106 for the location of the
Specifications on page 122. parts. When parts of the braking reservoir.
Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get There are only two reasons why
replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts. the brake fluid level in the reservoir
If this is not done, the brakes might might go down:
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
. The brake fluid level goes down
See your dealer if the brake pedal because of normal brake lining
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front wear. When new linings are
or if there is a rapid increase in installed, the fluid level goes
pedal travel. This could be a and rear brakes for the worse.
The braking performance expected back up.
sign that brake service might be
required. can change in many other ways if . A fluid leak in the brake
the wrong replacement brake parts hydraulic system can also cause
are installed. a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Do not top off the brake fluid. What to Add Notice

Adding fluid does not correct a leak. Use only new DOT 3 brake . Using the wrong fluid
If fluid is added when the linings fluid from a sealed container. can badly damage brake
are worn, there will be too much See Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts.
fluid when new brake linings are Lubricants on page 117. For example, just a few
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, drops of mineral-based oil,
as necessary, only when work is Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around such as engine oil, in the
done on the brake hydraulic system. brake hydraulic system can
the cap before removing it.
damage brake hydraulic
{ WARNING This helps keep dirt from entering
the reservoir. system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
If too much brake fluid is added, Do not let someone put in
it can spill on the engine and { WARNING the wrong kind of fluid.
burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, With the wrong kind of fluid in . If brake fluid is spilled on the
and the vehicle could be the brake hydraulic system, vehicle's painted surfaces,
the brakes might not work well. the paint finish can be
damaged. Add brake fluid only
This could cause a crash. Always damaged. Be careful not
when work is done on the brake
use the proper brake fluid. to spill brake fluid on the
hydraulic system. vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 522.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Battery Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive

Refer to the replacement number Transfer Case
shown on the original battery label { WARNING
when a new battery is needed. When to Check and Change
Batteries have acid that can burn Lubricant
See Engine Compartment Overview
you and gas that can explode.
on page 106 for battery location. The transfer case is filled with oil
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on during manufacture, which then
{ DANGER page 1096 for tips on working does not require changing. It is not
necessary to regularly check the
Battery posts, terminals, and around a battery without
transfer case fluid unless there is a
related accessories contain lead getting hurt.
leak suspected or an unusual noise
and lead compounds, chemicals is heard. A fluid loss could indicate
known to the State of California Infrequent Usage: Remove the a problem. It is recommended to
to cause cancer and reproductive black, negative () cable from the have the transfer case serviced
harm. Wash hands after handling. battery to keep the battery from at your dealer by trained service
running down. technicians.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative () cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Starter Switch Check 3. Try to start the engine in each 2. Firmly apply the parking
gear. The vehicle should start brake. See Parking Brake on
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). page 931.
{ WARNING If the vehicle starts in any other Be ready to apply the regular
When you are doing this position, contact your dealer for brake immediately if the vehicle
service. begins to move.
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle 3. With the engine off, turn the
moves, you or others could be Automatic Transmission
ignition on, but do not start the
injured. Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
Function Check regular brake, try to move the
1. Before starting this check, be shift lever out of P (Park) with
sure there is enough room { WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
around the vehicle.
When you are doing this your dealer for service.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
inspection, the vehicle could
brake and the regular brake.
move suddenly. If the vehicle
See Parking Brake on
page 931. moves, you or others could be
injured.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it 1. Before starting this check, be
starts. sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should
be parked on a level surface.
10-32 Vehicle Care
Ignition Transmission Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Lock Check Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set
While parked, and with the parking the parking brake.
brake set, try to turn the ignition { WARNING . To check the parking brake's
to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever holding ability: With the engine
position. When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in
. The ignition should turn to You or others could be injured N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
LOCK/OFF only when the shift pressure from the regular brake
and property could be damaged.
lever is in P (Park). pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Make sure there is room in front
held by the parking brake only.
Contact your dealer if service is of the vehicle in case it begins to
required. roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park)
brake at once should the vehicle mechanism's holding ability:
begin to move. With the engine running, shift
to P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Wiper Blade Replacement Front Wiper Blade 3. Remove the wiper blade.
Replacement 4. Reverse steps 1 through 3 for
Windshield wiper blades should
be inspected for wear or cracking. To replace the wiper blade wiper blade replacement.
See Scheduled Maintenance on assembly: Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
page 112 for more information. 1. Pull the windshield wiper
The rear wiper blade and wiper
It is a good idea to clean or replace assembly away from the
arm have a cover for protection.
the wiper blade assembly on windshield.
The cover must be removed before
a regular basis or when worn. the wiper blade can be replaced.
For proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance To remove the cover:
Replacement Parts on page 119.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield.
Any damage that occurs would
not be covered by your warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm 1. Slide a plastic tool under cover
to touch the windshield. and push upward to unsnap.
2. Press the button in the middle 2. Slide cover towards wiper
of the wiper arm connector, and blade tip to unhook from blade
pull the wiper blade away from assembly.
the arm connector.
10-34 Vehicle Care
3. Remove the cover. 2. Push the release lever (B) to Headlamp Aiming
4. After wiper blade replacement, disengage the hook and push
the wiper arm (A) out of the The headlamp aiming system has
ensure that cover hook slides
blade assembly (C). been preset at the factory.
into slot in blade assembly.
3. Push the new blade assembly If the vehicle is damaged in an
5. Snap cover down to secure.
securely on the wiper arm until accident, the aim of the headlamps
To remove the wiper blade: the release lever clicks into can be affected and adjustment
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the place. could be necessary.
windshield. 4. Replace wiper cover. It is recommended that a dealer
adjust the headlamps. To re-aim
the headlamps yourself, use the
following procedure.
A. Wiper Arm
B. Release Lever
C. Blade Assembly
Vehicle Care 10-35
The vehicle should be properly Headlamp aiming is done with the

prepared as follows: vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
. The vehicle should be placed so The high-beam headlamps will be
the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft) correctly aimed if the low-beam
from a lightcolored wall. headlamps are aimed properly.
. The vehicle must have all four To adjust the vertical aim:
tires on a level surface which is 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
level all the way to the wall. page 105 for more information.
. The vehicle should be placed so
it is perpendicular to the wall.
. The vehicle should not have any
snow, ice, or mud on it. Up-level Vehicle
. The vehicle should be fully 2. Locate the aim point at
assembled and all other work the center inner projector
stopped while headlamp aiming condensing lens of the low-beam
is being performed. headlamp, not the outer lens.
. The vehicle should be normally 3. Measure the distance from the
loaded with a full tank of fuel and ground to the aim dot on the
one person or 75 kg (160 lbs) lowbeam headlamp. Record
sitting on the driver seat. Base Vehicle the distance.
. Tires should be properly inflated.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp

to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece
of cardboard or equivalent in
4. At the wall, measure from front of the headlamp not being
the ground upward (A) to adjusted. This allows only the
the recorded distance from beam of light from the headlamp
Step 3 and mark it. being adjusted to be seen on 7. Locate the vertical headlamp
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the flat surface. adjusters, which are under
on the wall the width of the the hood near each headlamp
vehicle at the height of the assembly.
mark in Step 4. For the vehicle equipped with a
base level lamp (halogen bulb),
there will be one vertical
headlamp adjuster (V1).
Vehicle Care 10-37
8. For the base vehicle, turn the

vertical adjuster (V1) until the
headlamp beam is aimed to
the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise
to raise or lower the angle of
the beam.
For the up-level vehicle, turn the
vertical adjusters (V1 and V2)
simultaneously until the 9. Make sure that the light
headlamp beam is aimed to the from the headlamp is positioned
horizontal tape line. Turn them at the bottom edge of the
For the vehicle equipped with an clockwise or counterclockwise horizontal tape line. The lamp
up-level headlamp (HID), there to raise or lower the angle of on the left (A) shows the correct
will be two vertical headlamp the beam. headlamp aim. The lamp on the
adjusters (V1 and V2). right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
Some vehicles have
funnelshaped caps on the 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
adjusters for easier access of the opposite headlamp.
a Number 2 Phillips screwdriver
to turn the adjusters.
10-38 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge Headlamps

For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 1047. { WARNING
For any bulb changing procedure The low beam high intensity
not listed in this section, contact discharge lighting system
your dealer.
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
Halogen Bulbs system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your
{ WARNING dealer or a qualified technician
service them.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you Base Headlamp Assembly
drop or scratch the bulb. You or After an HID headlamp bulb has (Front View Passenger Side)
others could be injured. Be sure been replaced, the beam might be
a slightly different shade than it was A. LowBeam Headlamp/Daytime
to read and follow the instructions Running Lamp (DRL)
on the bulb package. originally. This is normal.
B. HighBeam Headlamp
C. Turn Signal Lamp
Vehicle Care 10-39
Base Headlamp Assembly UpLevel Headlamp Assembly UpLevel Headlamp Assembly

(Rear View Passenger Side) (Front View Driver Side) (Rear View Driver Side)
A. LowBeam Headlamp/Daytime A. High/LowBeam Headlamp A. High/LowBeam Headlamp
Running Lamp (DRL) (To be replaced at dealer only) (To be replaced at dealer only)
B. HighBeam Headlamp B. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) B. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
C. Turn Signal Lamp C. Turn Signal Lamp C. Turn Signal Lamp
10-40 Vehicle Care
Driver Side
The removal of the underhood
electrical center is required for the
replacement of one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 105.
{ WARNING
Liquids from environment or
spillage and/or tools placed on
top of or used in the underhood 2. Unlatch three clips and lift up A. Air Duct Clamp
electrical center while the cover the underhood electrical center B. Connector Lock
is removed can pose a risk of cover to remove.
electrical shock/burn to anyone in C. Sensor Connectors
the vicinity. These conditions can Passenger Side D. Retaining Clips
also cause damage to electrical The removal of the air filter/cleaner
components on the vehicle. Keep 2. Disconnect the outlet duct by
assembly and base is required for loosening the air duct clamp (A).
liquids and tools away from the the replacement of one of these
underhood electrical center when bulbs: 3. Remove the connector lock (B)
the cover is removed. located at the bottom of the
1. Open the hood. See Hood on sensor connector (C).
page 105.
4. Press on the top and bottom of
the sensor connectors (C) and
remove.
Vehicle Care 10-41
5. Lift the three retaining clips (D) Low-Beam Headlamps/

on the air filter housing. Daytime Running Lamps
6. Turn and tilt cover slightly (DRL), High-Beam
upwards and slide cover away Headlamps (Base)
from outside edge of vehicle.
Lift the cover away from base.
2. From the back side of the

headlamp assembly, remove
the bottom cap to replace the
high-beam headlamp bulb.
3. Disconnect electrical connector.
1. From the back side of the 4. Remove the bulb socket from
headlamp assembly, remove the the headlamp assembly.
7. Lift the air cleaner/filter base to top cap to replace the low-beam
disengage from three pins. headlamp/DRL bulb. 5. Replace the bulb in the bulb
socket.
10-42 Vehicle Care
6. Install the bulb socket in the Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) 3. Remove the DRL bulb socket
headlamp assembly. (Up-Level) from the headlamp assembly.
7. Connect the electrical connector. 4. Replace the bulb in the bulb
8. Install the cap with the down socket.
arrow pointing down in the back 5. Install the bulb socket in the
of the headlamp assembly. headlamp assembly.
9. For driver side, reinstall the 6. Connect the electrical connector.
underhood electrical center 7. Install the cap with the down
cover by latching three clips. arrow pointing down in the back
10. For passenger side, reinstall of the headlamp assembly.
the air filter/cleaner assembly 8. For driver side, reinstall the
base by pushing to seat. Verify underhood electrical center
the base is seated securely, cover by latching three clips.
then install the engine air
filter/cleaner assembly. 1. From the back side of the 9. For passenger side, reinstall
headlamp assembly, remove the air filter/cleaner assembly
High/LowBeam Headlamps the bottom cap to replace the base by pushing to seat. Verify
(Up-Level) DRL bulb. the base is seated securely,
The high/low beam headlamps then install the engine air
2. Disconnect electrical connector. filter/cleaner assembly.
on the up-level are High Intensity
Discharge (HID) and should be
replaced at the dealer.
Vehicle Care 10-43
Front Turn Signal Lamp Fog Lamps Turn Signal Lamps

(Base and Up-Level)
To replace the fog lamp bulb: To replace one of these bulbs:
To replace the Front Turn
1. Locate the bulb assembly under 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
Signal Lamp:
the front fascia. on page 214.
1. Remove the turn signal lamp
2. Disconnect the electrical
bulb socket from the headlamp
connector from the bulb
assembly.
assembly.
2. Remove the turn signal lamp
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
bulb from the socket.
counterclockwise and pulling it
3. Replace the bulb in the bulb straight out of the assembly.
socket.
4. Install the new bulb by turning it
4. Install the bulb socket in the clockwise into the assembly.
headlamp assembly.
5. Reconnect the electrical
5. For driver side, reinstall the connector to the bulb assembly.
underhood electrical center
cover by latching three clips.
A. Push Pin
6. For passenger side, reinstall
the air filter/cleaner assembly B. Taillamp Cover
base by pushing to seat. 2. Pull on push pin (A) to release
Verify the base is seated the taillamp cover (B).
securely, then install the engine
air filter/cleaner assembly.
10-44 Vehicle Care
3. Remove the taillamp cover 5. Pull the taillamp assembly 6. Turn the turn signal lamp (A)
from the lamp assembly by straight back to remove. bulb socket counterclockwise
pulling rearward from the top to remove it from the taillamp
to unfasten from snap tabs. assembly.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from
the socket.
8. Press a new bulb into the
socket, insert it into the taillamp
assembly and turn the bulb
socket clockwise until it clicks.
9. Reinstall the taillamp assembly
and tighten the screws.
10. Reinstall the taillamp cover by
snapping it into place.
A. Turn Signal Lamp
11. Push the push pin to secure
B. Back-Up Bulb/Socket the taillamp cover.
4. Remove the two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-45
Back-Up Lamps 3. Remove the taillamp cover from

the lamp assembly by pulling
To replace one of these bulbs: rearward from the top to
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate unfasten from snap tabs.
on page 214.
A. Turn Signal Lamp

B. BackUp Bulb/Socket
6. Disconnect the wire
harness from the backup
bulb/socket (B).
4. Remove the two screws from the
A. Push Pin taillamp assembly. 7. Turn the backup bulb socket
B. Taillamp Cover counterclockwise to remove it
5. Pull the taillamp assembly
from the taillamp assembly.
2. Pull on push pin (A) to release straight back to remove.
the taillamp cover (B).
10-46 Vehicle Care
8. Press a new bulb/socket into the License Plate Lamp

taillamp assembly and turn the
bulb/socket clockwise until it To replace one of these bulbs:
clicks. 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
9. Reinstall the taillamp assembly on page 214 for more
and tighten the screws. information.
10. Reinstall the taillamp cover by
snapping it into place.
11. Push the push pin to secure
the taillamp cover.
A. Bulb Socket
B. Bulb
C. Lamp Assembly
4. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise to remove
Passenger side shown, from lamp assembly (C).
driver side similar 5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
2. Push the left end of the lamp the bulb socket.
assembly towards the right. 6. Push the replacement bulb
3. Turn the lamp assembly down to straight into the bulb socket and
remove from liftgate. turn the bulb socket clockwise
to install into lamp assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-47
7. Turn the lamp assembly into the Electrical System Fuses and circuit breakers protect
liftgate engaging the clip side the following in the vehicle:
first.
Electrical System . Headlamp Wiring
8. Push on the lamp side opposite
the clip until the lamp assembly
Overload . Windshield Wiper Motor
. Power Windows and Other
snaps into place. The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an Power Accessories
Replacement Bulbs electrical system overload. Replace a bad fuse with a new one
Bulb When the current electrical load is of the identical size and rating.
Exterior Lamp too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
Number If there is a problem on the road
and closes, protecting the circuit and a fuse needs to be replaced,
Daytime until the current load returns to
7443 the same amperage fuse can be
Running Lamp normal or the problem is fixed. borrowed. Choose some feature of
Fog Lamp H10 This greatly reduces the chance the vehicle that is not needed to use
of circuit overload and fire caused and replace it as soon as possible.
Headlamp
9005 by electrical problems.
High-Beam Headlamp Wiring
Headlamp An electrical overload may cause
H10
Low-Beam the lamps to go on and off, or in
License Plate Lamp 194LL some cases to remain off. Have
the headlamp wiring checked right
Turn Signal Front 7440 away if the lamps go on and off or
Tail/Turn remain off.
7440
Signal Rear
For replacement bulbs not listed

here, contact your dealer.
10-48 Vehicle Care
Windshield Wipers Fuses and Circuit To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
If the wiper motor overheats due to Breakers Compartment Fuse Block on
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
The wiring circuits in the vehicle page 1048 and Rear Compartment
wipers will stop until the motor cools
are protected from short circuits by Fuse Block on page 1053.
and will then restart.
a combination of fuses and circuit
Although the circuit is protected breakers. This greatly reduces Engine Compartment
from electrical overload, overload the chance of damage caused by
due to heavy snow or ice may electrical problems.
Fuse Block
cause wiper linkage damage. To remove the fuse block cover,
To check a fuse, look at the
Always clear ice and heavy snow press the clips on the cover and lift
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
from the windshield before using it straight up.
If the band is broken or melted,
the windshield wipers. Notice: Spilling liquid on any
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
If the overload is caused by an a bad fuse with a new one of the electrical component on the
electrical problem and not snow identical size and rating. vehicle may damage it. Always
or ice, be sure to get it fixed. keep the covers on any electrical
Fuses of the same amperage
component.
can be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
Vehicle Care 10-49
J-Case Usage
Fuses
Antilock Brake
24
System Pump
Rear Electrical
25
Center 1
Rear Electrical
26
Center 2
27 Not Used
41 Cooling Fan 2 (LF1)
42 Starter
43 Not Used
44 Not Used
Engine Compartment Fuse Block 45 Cooling Fan 1 (LF1)
Secondary
The vehicle may not be equipped J-Case Usage 59
AIR Pump
with all of the fuses, relays, and Fuses
features shown.
6 Wiper
12 Vacuum Pump
10-50 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

Engine Control Instrument Panel Electronic Brake
1 35
Module Battery Cluster/Malfunction Control Module
16
Indicator Lamp/
Transmission Low-Beam
Ignition 46
2 Control Module HeadlampRight
Battery 17 Air Quality Sensor
Low-Beam
47
Mass Air Flow 18 Headlamp Washer HeadlampLeft
3
Sensor
Transmission 50 Front Fog Lamps
4 Afterboil Pump 19 Control Module Run
51 Horn
Crank
Engine Control
5 Fuel System Control
Module Run Crank Rear Electrical 52
20 Module
Center Run Crank
PostCatalytic
53 Headlamp Level
7 Converter O2 23 Heater Motor
Sensor Sensing Diagnostic
30 Switch Back Light 54
Module Ignition
PreCatalytic
Battery Sense
8 Converter O2 High-Beam
32 (Regulated Voltage 55
Sensor Headlamp-Right
Control)
Engine Control High-Beam
9 Adaptive Forward 56
Module Powertrain Headlamp-Left
Lighting/Adaptive
33
10 Fuel InjectorsEven Headlamp Leveling Ignition Steering
57
Module Column Lock
11 Fuel Injectors-Odd
Body Control Trailer Right
13 Washer 34 65
Module 7 Stoplamp
Vehicle Care 10-51
Mini Fuses Usage Micro Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

66 Trailer Left Stoplamp
Relays Block
2 Vacuum Pump
67 Spare
4 Wiper Control
68 Spare
5 Wiper Speed
69 Spare
10 Starter
70 Spare
12 Cool Fan 3 (LF1)
71 Spare
14 Low Beam/HID
72 Spare
U Micro Usage
Mini Relays Usage
Relays
7 Powertrain
8 Headlamp Washer
9 Cooling Fan 2 (LF1) The instrument panel fuse block
13 Cooling Fan 1 (LF1) is located in the center console
between the driver and passenger
15 Run/Crank seats. To access the fuses, open
Secondary the fuse panel door from the
16 passenger side by pulling it out.
AIR Pump
To reinstall the door, push the door
back into its original location.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays and
features shown.
10-52 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage

DISPLY Display
S/ROOF Sun Roof
Rear Vision
RVC MIRR
Camera Mirror
Universal
UHP
Handsfree Phone
RDO Radio
Auxiliary Power
APO IP Outlet Instrument
Panel
Auxiliary Power
APO CNSL Outlet Floor
Console
Body Control
BCM 3
Module 3
Body Control
BCM 4
Module 4
Body Control
BCM 5
Module 5
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
OnStar System
ONSTAR
(If Equipped)
Vehicle Care 10-53
Mini Fuses Usage JCase Usage Rear Compartment Fuse

RAIN SNSR Rain Sensor
Fuses Block
Body Control
Body Control BCM 8
BCM 6 Module 8
Module 6
FRT BLWR Front Blower
Electronic Steering
ESCL
Column Lock
Relays Usage
Sensing and
AIRBAG LOGIC RLY Logistics Relay
Diagnostic Module
Data Link Retained
DLC RAP/
Connection Accessory Power/
ACCY RLY
Accessory Relay
Instrument Panel
IPC
Cluster
SPARE Not Used The rear compartment fuse block is
Body Control located in the cargo area, on the
BCM 1
Module 1 driver side of the vehicle behind the
lower trim panel. To open, turn the
Body Control
BCM 2 latch with a flat bladed tool and pull
Module 2
the trim panel from the edges to fold
AMP/RDO Amplifier/Radio it down.
Heating Ventilation The vehicle may not be equipped
HVAC with all of the fuses, relays, and
& Air Conditioning
features shown.
10-54 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

SPARE * SEC Security
Spare Fuses
FUSES
INFOTMNT Infotainment
Automatic Occupant
AOS MDL * TRLR EXP Trailer Export
Sensing Module
WPR REAR Rear Wiper
SPARE Not Used
MIR Mirror Window
SPARE Not Used
WDO MDL Module
SPARE Not Used
Vehicle Information
PASS DR Passenger Door VICS Communications
WDO SW Window Switch System (Export)
DRV CNSTR
Driver Power Seat Canister Vent
PWR SEAT VENT
PASS DR Passenge/Driver LGM Lift Gate Module
PWR SEAT Power Seats LOGIC Logic
MDL TRLR Trailer Module CAMERA Rear Vision Camera
Rear Parking Assist FRT Front Ventilated
RPA MDL
Module VENT SEAT Seats
RDM Rear Drive Module TRLR MDL Trailer Module
Rear Compartment Fuse Block PRK Semi Active
Trailer Park Lamps
LPS TRLR SADS MDL Damping System
Module
FUEL
Fuel Pump
PUMP
Vehicle Care 10-55
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage

RR RT WDO Right Window SPARE Not Used
Rear Heated Seats
HTD SEAT
PRK * FUEL
Park Brake Module Fuel Pump
FRT BRK MDL PUMP
Front Heated Seats
HTD SEAT
SPARE Not Used WPR
Wiper Control
THEFT CONTRL
Theft Horn LT WDO Left Window
HORN
* RUN RLY Run Relay
IGN/
* LGATE Liftgate Ignition/Theft 1
THEFT 1 Logistic Relay
LOGIC
SHUNT Shunt (Export)
LGATE
Liftgate Module
REAR MDL DEFOG Rear Window
Rear Defog
DEFOG REAR Defogger
IGN/
Ignition/Theft 2
* BCM Body Control THEFT 2
THEFT Module Theft *Denotes uplevel content.
SPARE Not Used
* TRLR 2 Trailer 2
HTD MIR Heated Mirror
Universal Garage
UGDO Auxiliary Power
Door Opener AUX PWR
Outlet
10-56 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires
same danger as overloaded can cause a crash. Only the
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
a leading tire manufacturer. Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
See the warranty manual maintain the recommended the tires.
for information regarding pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
the tire warranty and where should be checked when excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
to get service. For additional the tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more as snow, mud, ice, etc.
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure. See Tire Pressure for
. Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
High-Speed Operation on
. Worn or old tires can cause
dangerous. page 1065 for inflation pressure
a crash. If the tread is badly adjustment for high-speed
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them.
driving.
cause overheating as a . Replace any tires that have
result of too much flexing. been damaged by impacts
There could be a blowout and with potholes, curbs, etc.
a serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 912. (Continued)
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-57
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the (D) Tire Identification
Tire Size illustration later in this Number (TIN): The letters
Useful information about a section for more detail. and numbers following the DOT
tire is molded into its sidewall. (Department of Transportation)
The examples show a typical (B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria code are the Tire Identification
passenger vehicle tire and a Number (TIN). The TIN shows
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to the manufacturer and plant
GM's specific tire performance code, tire size, and date the tire
criteria have a TPC specification was manufactured. The TIN is
code molded onto the sidewall. molded onto both sides of the
GM's TPC specifications meet tire, although only one side may
or exceed all federal safety have the date of manufacture.
guidelines. (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
(C) DOT (Department of cord and number of plies in
of Transportation): The the sidewall and under the tread.
Department of Transportation (F) Uniform Tire Quality
(DOT) code indicates that Grading (UTQG): Tire
Passenger (PMetric) Tire Example the tire is in compliance manufacturers are required
with the U.S. Department to grade tires based on three
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is of Transportation Motor performance factors: treadwear,
a combination of letters and Vehicle Safety Standards. traction, and temperature
numbers used to define a resistance. For more information
particular tire's width, height, see Uniform Tire Quality
aspect ratio, construction type, Grading on page 1076.
10-58 Vehicle Care
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation (B) Temporary Use Only: The TIN shows the
Load Limit: Maximum load The compact spare tire or manufacturer and plant
that can be carried and the temporary use tire has a tread code, tire size, and date the
maximum pressure needed life of approximately 5 000 km tire was manufactured. The TIN
to support that load. (3,000 mi) and should not be is molded onto both sides of the
driven at speeds over 105 km/h tire, although only one side may
(65 mph). The compact spare have the date of manufacture.
tire is for emergency use when (D) Maximum Cold Inflation
a regular road tire has lost air Load Limit: Maximum load
and gone flat. If the vehicle that can be carried and the
has a compact spare tire, maximum pressure needed
see Compact Spare Tire on to support that load.
page 1096 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 1079. (E) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
(C) Tire Identification Number spare tire should be inflated
(TIN): The letters and numbers to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
Compact Spare Tire Example following the DOT (Department information on tire pressure and
of Transportation) code is the inflation see Tire Pressure on
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
Tire Identification Number (TIN). page 1063.
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
Vehicle Care 10-59
(F) Tire Size: A combination Tire Designations (B) Tire Width: The threedigit
of letters and numbers define a number indicates the tire section
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, Tire Size width in millimeters from
construction type, and service The following is an example sidewall to sidewall.
description. The letter T as the of a typical passenger vehicle (C) Aspect Ratio: A twodigit
first character in the tire size tire size. number that indicates the tire
means the tire is for temporary heighttowidth measurements.
use only. For example, if the tire size
(G) TPC Spec (Tire aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
Performance Criteria item C of the illustration, it would
Specification): Original mean that the tire's sidewall is
equipment tires designed to 60 percent as high as it is wide.
GM's specific tire performance (A) Passenger (PMetric) Tire: (D) Construction Code: A
criteria have a TPC specification The United States version letter code is used to indicate
code molded onto the sidewall. of a metric tire sizing system. the type of ply construction in
GM's TPC specifications meet The letter P as the first the tire. The letter R means
or exceed all federal safety character in the tire size radial ply construction; the
guidelines. means a passenger vehicle letter D means diagonal or
tire engineered to standards bias ply construction; and the
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim letter B means beltedbias ply
Association. construction.
10-60 Vehicle Care
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of Accessory Weight: The Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic
the wheel in inches. combined weight of optional tire in which the plies are laid
(F) Service Description: These accessories. Some examples at alternate angles less than
characters represent the load of optional accessories are 90 degrees to the centerline
index and speed rating of the automatic transmission, power of the tread.
tire. The load index represents steering, power brakes, power Cold Tire Pressure: The
the load carrying capacity a tire windows, power seats, and air amount of air pressure in a tire,
is certified to carry. The speed conditioning. measured in kPa (kilopascal)
rating is the maximum speed a Aspect Ratio: The relationship or psi (pounds per square inch)
tire is certified to carry a load. of a tire's height to its width. before a tire has built up heat
Belt: A rubber coated layer of from driving. See Tire Pressure
Tire Terminology and cords that is located between on page 1063.
Definitions the plies and the tread. Cords Curb Weight: The weight of a
Air Pressure: The amount may be made from steel or motor vehicle with standard and
of air inside the tire pressing other reinforcing materials. optional equipment including
outward on each square inch Bead: The tire bead contains the maximum capacity of fuel,
of the tire. Air pressure is steel wires wrapped by steel oil, and coolant, but without
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) cords that hold the tire onto passengers and cargo.
or psi (pounds per square inch). the rim.
Vehicle Care 10-61
DOT Markings: A code Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle

molded into the sidewall of The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb
a tire signifying that the tire that must always face outward weight, accessory weight,
is in compliance with the U.S. when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and
Department of Transportation Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: The
Standards. The DOT code number of occupants a vehicle
includes the Tire Identification Light Truck (LTMetric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and is designed to seat multiplied
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric by 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
designator which can also some multipurpose passenger
vehicles. Load Limits on page 912.
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and Load Index: An assigned Occupant Distribution :
date of production. number ranging from 1 to 279 Designated seating positions.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight that corresponds to the load Outward Facing Sidewall:
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits carrying capacity of a tire. The side of an asymmetrical tire
on page 912. Maximum Inflation Pressure: that has a particular side that
The maximum air pressure to faces outward when mounted
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle on a vehicle. The side of the
Weight Rating for the front axle. which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is tire that contains a whitewall,
See Vehicle Load Limits on bears white lettering, or bears
page 912. molded onto the sidewall.
manufacturer, brand, and/or
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Maximum Load Rating: model name molding that is
Weight Rating for the rear axle. The load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the
See Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation same moldings on the other
page 912. pressure for that tire. sidewall of the tire.
10-62 Vehicle Care
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Sidewall: The portion of a tire UTQGS (Uniform Tire
A tire used on passenger cars between the tread and the bead. Quality Grading Standards):
and some light duty trucks and Speed Rating: An A tire information system
multipurpose vehicles. alphanumeric code assigned to that provides consumers with
Recommended Inflation a tire indicating the maximum ratings for a tire's traction,
Pressure: Vehicle speed at which a tire can temperature, and treadwear.
manufacturer's recommended operate. Ratings are determined by
tire inflation pressure as tire manufacturers using
Traction: The friction between government testing procedures.
shown on the tire placard. the tire and the road surface.
See Tire Pressure on The ratings are molded into
The amount of grip provided. the sidewall of the tire.
page 1063 and Vehicle
Load Limits on page 912. Tread: The portion of a tire See Uniform Tire Quality
that comes into contact with Grading on page 1076.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic the road.
tire in which the ply cords that Vehicle Capacity Weight:
extend to the beads are laid at Treadwear Indicators: Narrow The number of designated
90 degrees to the centerline of bands, sometimes called wear seating positions multiplied by
the tread. bars, that show across the 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Rim: A metal support for a tire (1/16 in) of tread remains. Limits on page 912.
and upon which the tire beads See When It Is Time for New
are seated. Tires on page 1072.
Vehicle Care 10-63
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Pressure Overinflated tires, or tires

Tire: Load on an individual tire that have too much air, can
due to curb weight, accessory Tires need the correct amount result in:
weight, occupant weight, and of air pressure to operate
effectively. . Unusual wear.
cargo weight.
Notice: Neither tire . Poor handling.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a underinflation nor . Rough ride.
vehicle showing the vehicle overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or
. Needless damage from
capacity weight and the road hazards.
original equipment tire size tires that do not have
and recommended inflation enough air, can result in: The Tire and Loading
pressure. See Tire and Loading . Tire overloading and Information label on the
Information Label under Vehicle over-heating which vehicle indicates the original
Load Limits on page 912. could lead to a blowout. equipment tires and the correct
cold tire inflation pressures.
. Premature or The recommended pressure
irregular wear. is the minimum air pressure
. Poor handling. needed to support the vehicle's
maximum load carrying capacity.
. Reduced fuel economy.
10-64 Vehicle Care
For additional information How to Check matches the recommended

regarding how much weight Use a good quality pocket-type pressure on the Tire and
the vehicle can carry, and an gauge to check tire pressure. Loading Information label, no
example of the Tire and Loading Proper tire inflation cannot be further adjustment is necessary.
Information label, see Vehicle determined by looking at the tire. If the inflation pressure is low,
Load Limits on page 912. Check the tire inflation pressure add air until the recommended
How the vehicle is loaded when the tires are cold, meaning pressure is reached. If the
affects vehicle handling and the vehicle has not been driven inflation pressure is high, press
ride comfort. Never load the for at least three hours or no on the metal stem in the center
vehicle with more weight than more than 1.6 km (1 mi). of the tire valve to release air.
it was designed to carry. Recheck the tire pressure with
Remove the valve cap from the
When to Check tire valve stem. Press the tire the tire gauge.
Check the tires once a month gauge firmly onto the valve to Return the valve caps on the
or more. Do not forget the get a pressure measurement. valve stems to prevent leaks
compact spare tire, if the vehicle If the cold tire inflation pressure and keep out dirt and moisture.
has one. The compact spare
should be at 420 kPa (60 psi).
For additional information
regarding the compact spare
tire, see Compact Spare
Tire on page 1096.
Vehicle Care 10-65
Tire Pressure for Vehicles with P235/65R18, Tire Pressure Monitor

P235/55R20, or 235/55R20 size
High-Speed Operation tires require inflation pressure
System
adjustment when driving the vehicle The Tire Pressure Monitor System
{ WARNING at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
or higher. Set the cold inflation technology to check tire pressure
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h pressure to the maximum inflation levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
(100 mph) or higher, puts pressure shown on the tire sidewall, the air pressure in your tires and
an additional strain on tires. or 260 kPa (38 psi), whichever transmit tire pressure readings to
Sustained high-speed driving is lower. Return the tires to the a receiver located in the vehicle.
causes excessive heat build up recommended cold tire inflation
Each tire, including the spare
and can cause sudden tire failure. pressure when high-speed driving
(if provided), should be checked
You could have a crash and you has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits
monthly when cold and inflated to
or others could be killed. Some on page 912 and Tire Pressure on
the inflation pressure recommended
high-speed rated tires require page 1063.
by the vehicle manufacturer on
inflation pressure adjustment for The maximum load and inflation the vehicle placard or tire inflation
high speed operation. When pressure is molded on the tire pressure label. (If your vehicle has
speed limits and road conditions sidewall, in small letters, near tires of a different size than the size
are such that a vehicle can be the rim flange. It will read indicated on the vehicle placard or
driven at high speeds, make sure something like this: Maximum load tire inflation pressure label, you
the tires are rated for high speed 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) should determine the proper tire
operation, in excellent condition, Max. Press. inflation pressure for those tires.)
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
vehicle load.
10-66 Vehicle Care
As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been Always check the TPMS malfunction
vehicle has been equipped with equipped with a TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
a tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the tires or wheels on your vehicle to
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly. ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale when one or The TPMS malfunction indicator is alternate tires and wheels allow
more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure the TPMS to continue to function
underinflated. telltale. When the system detects a properly.
Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for See Tire Pressure Monitor
pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then Operation on page 1067 for
should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated. additional information.
soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
to the proper pressure. Driving on subsequent vehicle startups as Federal Communications
a significantly underinflated tire long as the malfunction exists. Commission (FCC) and
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator Industry Canada
lead to tire failure. Underinflation is illuminated, the system may See Radio Frequency
also reduces fuel efficiency and not be able to detect or signal low Statement on page 1320 for
tire tread life, and may affect the tire pressure as intended. TPMS information regarding Part 15
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety of the Federal Communications
ability. of reasons, including the installation Commission (FCC) rules and
Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or Industry Canada Standards
not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent RSS-210/220/310.
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Vehicle Care 10-67
Tire Pressure Monitor A message to check the pressure

displays in the Driver Information
Operation Center (DIC). The low tire pressure
This vehicle may have a Tire warning light and the DIC warning
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). message come on at each ignition
The TPMS is designed to warn cycle until the tires are inflated to
the driver when a low tire pressure When a low tire pressure condition the correct inflation pressure. Using
condition exists. TPMS sensors are is detected, the TPMS illuminates the DIC, tire pressure levels can be
mounted onto each tire and wheel the low tire pressure warning light viewed. For additional information
assembly, excluding the spare tire located on the instrument cluster. and details about the DIC operation
and wheel assembly. The TPMS If the warning light comes on, and displays see Driver Information
sensors monitor the air pressure stop as soon as possible and inflate Center (DIC) on page 529.
in the tires and transmit the tire the tires to the recommended The low tire pressure warning light
pressure readings to a receiver pressure shown on the tire loading may come on in cool weather when
located in the vehicle. information label. See Vehicle Load the vehicle is first started, and then
Limits on page 912. turn off as the vehicle is driven.
This could be an early indicator that
the air pressure is getting low and
needs to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
10-68 Vehicle Care
A Tire and Loading Information Notice: Tire sealant TPMS Malfunction Light and
label shows the size of the original materials are not all the same. Message
equipment tires and the correct A non-approved tire sealant
inflation pressure for the tires when could damage the TPMS sensors. The TPMS will not function properly
they are cold. See Vehicle Load TPMS sensor damage caused by if one or more of the TPMS sensors
Limits on page 912, for an example using an incorrect tire sealant are missing or inoperable. When
of the Tire and Loading Information is not covered by the vehicle the system detects a malfunction,
label and its location. Also see Tire warranty. Always use only the low tire pressure warning light
Pressure on page 1063. the GM-approved tire sealant flashes for about one minute and
available through your dealer then stays on for the remainder of
The TPMS can warn about a the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
low tire pressure condition but or included in the vehicle.
message also displays. The
it does not replace normal tire Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits malfunction light and DIC warning
maintenance. See Tire Inspection use a GM approved liquid tire message come on at each ignition
on page 1071, Tire Rotation on sealant. Using non-approved tire cycle until the problem is corrected.
page 1071 and Tires on sealants could damage the TPMS Some of the conditions that can
page 1056. sensors. See Tire Sealant and cause these to come on are:
Compressor Kit on page 1081 for
information regarding the inflator
. One of the road tires has been
kit materials and instructions. replaced with the spare tire.
The spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The malfunction
light and the DIC message
should go off after the road
tire is replaced and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.
Vehicle Care 10-69

. The TPMS sensor matching . Replacement tires or wheels do TPMS Sensor Matching
process was not done or not match the original equipment Process
not completed successfully tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
after rotating the tires. The other than those recommended Each TPMS sensor has a unique
malfunction light and the DIC could prevent the TPMS from identification code. The identification
message should go off after functioning properly. See Buying code needs to be matched to a
successfully completing the New Tires on page 1073. new tire/wheel position after rotating
sensor matching process. the vehicles tires or replacing
. Operating electronic devices or one or more of the TPMS sensors.
See "TPMS Sensor Matching being near facilities using radio
Process" later in this section. Also, the TPMS sensor matching
wave frequencies similar to the process should be performed after
. One or more TPMS sensors TPMS could cause the TPMS replacing a spare tire with a road
are missing or damaged. sensors to malfunction. tire containing the TPMS sensor.
The malfunction light and If the TPMS is not functioning The malfunction light and the DIC
the DIC message should go properly, it cannot detect or signal a message should go off at the next
off when the TPMS sensors low tire condition. See your dealer ignition cycle. The sensors are
are installed and the sensor for service if the TPMS malfunction matched to the tire/wheel positions,
matching process is performed light and DIC message come on using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
successfully. See your dealer and stay on. following order: driver side front tire,
for service. passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service or to
purchase a relearn tool.
10-70 Vehicle Care
There are two minutes to match 6. Press SET to confirm selection. 10. Proceed to the passenger
the first tire/wheel position, and The horn sounds twice to signal side rear tire, and repeat the
five minutes overall to match all the receiver is in relearn mode procedure in Step 8.
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE 11. Proceed to the driver side rear
longer, the matching process stops message displays on the DIC tire, and repeat the procedure
and must be restarted. screen. in Step 8. The horn sounds two
The TPMS sensor matching 7. Start with the driver side times to indicate the sensor
process is: front tire. identification code has been
1. Set the parking brake. 8. Place the relearn tool against matched to the driver side rear
the tire sidewall, near the valve tire, and the TPMS sensor
2. Place the vehicle power mode matching process is no longer
in ON/RUN/START. See Ignition stem. Then press the button
to activate the TPMS sensor. active. The TIRE LEARNING
Positions on page 918. ACTIVE message on the DIC
A horn chirp confirms that the
3. Select the vehicle information sensor identification code has display screen goes off.
menu using the menu button. been matched to this tire and 12. Press STOP to turn the
4. Select the tire pressure screen wheel position. ignition off.
using the up/down thumbwheel. 9. Proceed to the passenger 13. Set all four tires to the
5. Press and hold SET to begin the side front tire, and repeat the recommended air pressure
sensor matching process. procedure in Step 8. level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Vehicle Care 10-71
Tire Inspection
. The tire has a bump, bulge, Any time you notice unusual
or split. wear, rotate the tires as soon
GM recommends that the tires, as possible and check wheel
including the spare tire, if the
. The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot alignment. Also check for
vehicle has one, be inspected damaged tires or wheels.
for signs of wear or damage at be repaired well because of
the size or location of the See When It Is Time for New
least once a month. Tires on page 1072 and Wheel
damage.
Replace the tire if: Replacement on page 1078.
. The indicators at three or Tire Rotation
more places around the tire Tires should be rotated
can be seen. every 12 000 km (7,500 mi).
. There is cord or fabric See Scheduled Maintenance on
showing through the tire's page 112.
rubber. The purpose of a regular tire
. The tread or sidewall is rotation is to achieve a uniform
cracked, cut, or snagged wear for all tires on the vehicle.
deep enough to show cord This will ensure that the vehicle
or fabric. continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Do not include the compact When It Is Time for New

spare tire in the tire rotation. { WARNING Tires
After the tires have been Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Factors such as maintenance,
rotated, adjust the front and parts to which it is fastened, can temperatures, driving speeds,
rear inflation pressures as make wheel nuts become loose vehicle loading, and road conditions
shown on the Tire and Loading after time. The wheel could come affect the wear rate of the tires.
Information label. See Tire off and cause an accident. When
Pressure on page 1063 changing a wheel, remove any
and Vehicle Load Limits on rust or dirt from places where the
page 912. wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor a paper towel to do this; but be
System. See Tire Pressure sure to use a scraper or wire
Monitor Operation on brush later, if needed, to get all
page 1067. the rust or dirt off. See If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 1079.
Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened.
See Wheel Nut Torque under Lightly coat the center of the
Capacities and Specifications on wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change Treadwear indicators are one way
page 122.
to tell when it is time for new tires.
or tire rotation to prevent
Treadwear indicators appear when
corrosion or rust build-up. the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
Do not get grease on the flat or less of tread remaining. See Tire
wheel mounting surface or Inspection on page 1071 and Tire
on the wheel nuts or bolts. Rotation on page 1071 for more
information.
Vehicle Care 10-73
The rubber in tires ages over time. Parking for an extended period designed to give the same
This also applies for the spare tire, can cause flat spots on the tires performance and vehicle safety,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is that may result in vibrations while during normal use, as the
never used. Multiple conditions driving. When storing a vehicle for original tires.
including temperatures, loading at least a month, remove the tires
conditions, and inflation pressure or raise the vehicle to reduce the GM's exclusive TPC Spec
maintenance affect how fast aging weight from the tires. system considers over a
takes place. Tires will typically dozen critical specifications that
need to be replaced due to wear Buying New Tires impact the overall performance
before they may need to be of the vehicle, including brake
replaced due to age. Consult the tire GM has developed and matched
specific tires for the vehicle. system performance, ride and
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced. The original equipment tires handling, traction control,
installed on the vehicle, when and tire pressure monitoring
Vehicle Storage it was new, were designed performance. GM's TPC Spec
Tires age when stored normally to meet General Motors number is molded onto the
mounted on a parked vehicle. Tire Performance Criteria tire's sidewall near the tire size.
Park a vehicle that will be stored Specification (TPC Spec) If the tires have an allseason
for at least a month in a cool, dry, system rating. If you need tread design, the TPC Spec
clean area away from direct sunlight number will be followed by an
to slow aging. This area should be
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get MS for mud and snow. See Tire
free of grease, gasoline, or other Sidewall Labeling on page 1057
substances that can deteriorate tires with the same TPC Spec
rating. This way, the vehicle will for additional information.
rubber.
continue to have tires that are
10-74 Vehicle Care
GM recommends replacing tires

in sets of four. This is because { WARNING { WARNING
uniform tread depth on all Mixing tires could cause you Using bias-ply tires on the
tires will help keep the vehicle to lose control while driving. vehicle may cause the wheel
performing most like it did when If you mix tires of different rim flanges to develop cracks
the tires were new. Replacing sizes, brands, or types after many miles of driving.
less than a full set of tires can (radial and bias-belted tires), A tire and/or wheel could fail
affect the braking and handling the vehicle may not handle suddenly and cause a crash.
performance of the vehicle. See properly, and you could have Use only radial-ply tires with
Tire Inspection on page 1071 a crash. Using tires of different the wheels on the vehicle.
and Tire Rotation on page 1071 sizes, brands, or types may
for information on proper tire also cause damage to the
rotation. If you must replace the vehicle's
vehicle. Be sure to use the tires with those that do not have
correct size, brand, and type a TPC Spec number, make
{ WARNING of tires on all wheels. It is all sure they are the same size,
Tires could explode during
right to drive with the compact load range, speed rating, and
improper service. Attempting to spare temporarily, as it was construction type (radial and
mount or dismount a tire could developed for use on the biasbelted tires) as the vehicle's
cause injury or death. Only your vehicle. See Compact Spare original tires.
dealer or authorized tire service Tire on page 1096.
center should mount or dismount
the tires.
Vehicle Care 10-75
Vehicles that have a tire Different Size Tires and

pressure monitoring system Wheels
{ WARNING
could give an inaccurate If different sized wheels are used,
lowpressure warning if If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original there may not be an acceptable
nonTPC Spec rated tires level of performance and safety
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
are installed on the vehicle. performance, including its braking, if tires not recommended for
NonTPC Spec rated tires may ride and handling characteristics, those wheels are selected. This
give a lowpressure warning stability, and resistance to rollover increases the chance of a crash
that is higher or lower than the may be affected. If the vehicle has and serious injury. Only use GM
proper warning level you would electronic systems such as antilock specific wheel and tire systems
get with TPC Spec rated tires. brakes, rollover airbags, traction developed for the vehicle, and
See Tire Pressure Monitor control, and electronic stability have them properly installed by
System on page 1065. control, the performance of these a GM certified technician.
systems can also be affected.
The vehicle's original equipment
tires are listed on the Tire See Buying New Tires on
and Loading Information label. page 1073 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 103
See Vehicle Load Limits on
for additional information.
page 912 for more information
about the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location
on the vehicle.
10-76 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality Quality Grading (UTQG) Treadwear

Grading system does not apply to deep The treadwear grade is a
tread, winter-type snow tires, comparative rating based
Quality grades can be found space-saver, or temporary use
where applicable on the tire on the wear rate of the tire
spare tires, tires with nominal when tested under controlled
sidewall between tread shoulder rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
and maximum section width. conditions on a specified
(25 to 30 cm), or to some government test course.
For example: limited-production tires. For example, a tire graded 150
Treadwear 200 Traction AA While the tires available on would wear one and a half (1)
Temperature A General Motors passenger times as well on the government
The following information relates cars and light trucks may vary course as a tire graded 100.
to the system developed by the with respect to these grades, The relative performance of
United States National Highway they must also conform to tires depends upon the actual
Traffic Safety Administration federal safety requirements and conditions of their use, however,
(NHTSA), which grades tires additional General Motors Tire and may depart significantly
by treadwear, traction, and Performance Criteria (TPC) from the norm due to variations
temperature performance. standards. in driving habits, service
This applies only to vehicles All Passenger Car Tires Must practices and differences in
sold in the United States. Conform to Federal Safety road characteristics and climate.
The grades are molded on the Requirements In Addition To
sidewalls of most passenger These Grades.
car tires. The Uniform Tire
Vehicle Care 10-77
Traction AA, A, B, C Temperature A, B, C passenger car tires must meet

The traction grades, from The temperature grades under the Federal Motor Safety
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, are A (the highest), B, and C, Standard No. 109. Grades B
and C. Those grades represent representing the tire's resistance and A represent higher levels of
the tire's ability to stop on to the generation of heat and performance on the laboratory
wet pavement as measured its ability to dissipate heat test wheel than the minimum
under controlled conditions when tested under controlled required by law. Warning: The
on specified government conditions on a specified temperature grade for this tire
test surfaces of asphalt and indoor laboratory test wheel. is established for a tire that
concrete. A tire marked C may Sustained high temperature can is properly inflated and not
have poor traction performance. cause the material of the tire overloaded. Excessive speed,
Warning: The traction grade to degenerate and reduce tire underinflation, or excessive
assigned to this tire is based life, and excessive temperature loading, either separately or in
on straight-ahead braking can lead to sudden tire failure. combination, can cause heat
traction tests, and does not The grade C corresponds to a buildup and possible tire failure.
include acceleration, cornering, level of performance which all
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
10-78 Vehicle Care
Wheel Alignment and Tire Wheel Replacement

Balance
{ WARNING
Replace any wheel that is bent,
The tires and wheels were aligned cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement
and balanced at the factory to corroded. If wheel nuts keep wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
provide the longest tire life and best coming loose, the wheel, wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could
overall performance. Adjustments to bolts, and wheel nuts should be affect the braking and handling
wheel alignment and tire balancing replaced. If the wheel leaks air, of the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
will not be necessary on a regular replace it. Some aluminum wheels and cause loss of control, causing
basis. However, check the can be repaired. See your dealer a crash. Always use the correct
alignment if there is unusual tire if any of these conditions exist. wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to Your dealer will know the kind of nuts for replacement.
one side or the other. If the vehicle wheel that is needed.
vibrates when driving on a smooth
Each new wheel should have Notice: The wrong wheel can
road, the tires and wheels might
the same load-carrying capacity, also cause problems with
need to be rebalanced. See your bearing life, brake cooling,
diameter, width, offset, and be
dealer for proper diagnosis.
mounted the same way as the speedometer or odometer
one it replaces. calibration, headlamp aim,
bumper height, vehicle ground
Replace wheels, wheel bolts,
clearance, and tire or tire chain
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
clearance to the body and
System (TPMS) sensors with new
chassis.
GM original equipment parts.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
Vehicle Care 10-79
Used Replacement Wheels

WARNING (Continued)
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout,
{ WARNING suspension, or other vehicle especially if the tires are maintained
parts. The area damaged by the properly. See Tires. If air goes out of
Replacing a wheel with a used
tire chains could cause loss of a tire, it is much more likely to leak
one is dangerous. How it has
control and a crash. out slowly. But if there is ever a
been used or how far it has been blowout, here are a few tips about
driven may be unknown. It could Use another type of traction what to expect and what to do:
fail suddenly and cause a crash. device only if its manufacturer
When replacing wheels, use a If a front tire fails, the flat tire
recommends it for the vehicle's
new GM original equipment creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
tire size combination and
wheel. toward that side. Take your foot
road conditions. Follow that off the accelerator pedal and grip
manufacturer's instructions. the steering wheel firmly. Steer to
Tire Chains To avoid vehicle damage, drive maintain lane position, and then
slow and readjust or remove the gently brake to a stop, well off the
traction device if it contacts the road, if possible.
{ WARNING vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
Do not use tire chains. There is If traction devices are used, install
not enough clearance. Tire chains them on the front tires.
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
(Continued)
10-80 Vehicle Care
A rear blowout, particularly on a

curve, acts much like a skid and { WARNING { WARNING
may require the same correction
as used in a skid. Stop pressing Lifting a vehicle and getting Changing a tire can be
the accelerator pedal and steer under it to do maintenance or dangerous. The vehicle can
to straighten the vehicle. It may repairs is dangerous without the slip off the jack and roll over
be very bumpy and noisy. Gently appropriate safety equipment and or fall causing injury or death.
brake to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with Find a level place to change the
if possible. the vehicle, it is designed only for tire. To help prevent the vehicle
changing a flat tire. If it is used for from moving:
{ WARNING anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
Driving on a flat tire will cause vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 2. Put an automatic
permanent damage to the tire. is provided with the vehicle, only transmission shift lever in
Re-inflating a tire after it has use it for changing a flat tire. P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
been driven on while severely
R (Reverse).
underinflated or flat may cause If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
a blowout and a serious crash. 3. Turn off the engine and do
and wheel damage by driving slowly
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire not restart while the vehicle
to a level place, well off the road,
that has been driven on while is raised.
if possible. Turn on the hazard
severely underinflated or flat. warning flashers. See Hazard 4. Do not allow passengers to
Have your dealer or an authorized Warning Flashers on page 65. remain in the vehicle.
tire service center repair or 5. Place wheel blocks on
replace the flat tire as soon both sides of the tire at the
as possible. opposite corner of the tire
being changed.
Vehicle Care 10-81
This vehicle may come with a jack Tire Sealant and

and spare tire or a tire sealant
and compressor kit. To use the
Compressor Kit
jacking equipment to change
a spare tire safely, follow the { WARNING
instructions below. Then see Tire
Changing on page 1089. To use Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
the tire sealant and compressor kit, area with poor ventilation is
see Tire Sealant and Compressor dangerous. Engine exhaust may
Kit on page 1081. A. Wheel Block enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
B. Flat Tire contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
which cannot be seen or smelled.
use the following example as a The following information explains
guide to assist you in the placement It can cause unconsciousness
how to repair or change a tire. and even death. Never run the
of wheel blocks (A).
engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation.
For more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 924.
10-82 Vehicle Care
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and The kit includes:

{ WARNING compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
Overinflating a tire could cause and on some vehicles there may not
the tire to rupture and you be a place to store a tire.
or others could be injured.
Be sure to read and follow the The tire sealant and compressor
tire sealant and compressor kit can be used to temporarily seal
instructions and inflate the tire punctures up to 6 mm ( in) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be
to its recommended pressure.
used to inflate an under inflated tire.
Do not exceed the recommended
pressure. If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
{ WARNING sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Service
Storing the tire sealant and (U.S. and Canada) on page 138
compressor kit or other or Roadside Service (Mexico) on
equipment in the passenger page 1311.
compartment of the vehicle could
Read and follow all of the tire
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
sealant and compressor kit
collision, loose equipment could instructions.
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in
its original location.
Vehicle Care 10-83
A. Selector Switch Replacement sealant canisters

(Sealant/Air or Air Only) are available at your local dealer.
B. On/Off Button See Removal and Installation of
the Sealant Canister following.
C. Pressure Gauge
There is only enough sealant to
D. Pressure Deflation Button seal one tire. After usage, the
E. Tire Sealant Canister sealant canister and sealant/air
hose assembly must be replaced.
F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) See Removal and Installation
G. Air Only Hose (Black) of the Sealant Canister following.
H. Power Plug Using the Tire Sealant
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to
Temporarily Seal and Inflate
Read and follow the safe handling a Punctured Tire
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister. Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
When using the tire sealant

and compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
10-84 Vehicle Care
heated environment for five minutes. 3. Place the kit on the ground. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
This will help to inflate the tire Make sure the tire valve stem is must be running while using the
faster. positioned close to the ground air compressor.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire so the hose will reach it. 8. Turn the selector switch (A)
and wheel damage by driving slowly 4. Remove the valve stem cap counterclockwise to the
to a level place. Turn on the hazard from the flat tire by turning it Sealant + Air position.
warning flashers. See Hazard counterclockwise. 9. Press the on/off (B) button to
Warning Flashers on page 65. turn the tire sealant and
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)
See If a Tire Goes Flat on onto the tire valve stem. Turn it compressor kit on.
page 1079 for other important clockwise until it is tight. The compressor will inject
safety warnings. sealant and air into the tire.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
Do not remove any objects that accessory power outlet in the The pressure gauge (C) will
have penetrated the tire. vehicle. Unplug all items from initially show a high pressure
1. Remove the tire sealant and other accessory power outlets. while the compressor pushes the
compressor kit from its storage See Power Outlets on page 58. sealant into the tire. Once the
location. See Storing the Tire If the vehicle has an accessory sealant is completely dispersed
Sealant and Compressor Kit on power outlet, do not use the into the tire, the pressure will
page 1089. cigarette lighter. quickly drop and start to rise
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) again as the tire inflates with
If the vehicle only has a cigarette air only.
and the power plug (H). lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
Vehicle Care 10-85
10. Inflate the tire to the the accessory power outlet and 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)
recommended inflation unscrew the inflating hose from counterclockwise to remove it
pressure using the pressure the tire valve. See Roadside from the tire valve stem.
gauge (C). The recommended Service (U.S. and Canada) on 14. Replace the tire valve
inflation pressure can be page 138 or Roadside Service stem cap.
found on the Tire and Loading (Mexico) on page 1311.
Information label. See Tire 15. Replace the sealant/air
11. Press the on/off button (B) hose (F), and the power
Pressure on page 1063. to turn the tire sealant and plug (H) back in their original
The pressure gauge (C) may compressor kit off. location.
read higher than the actual tire The tire is not sealed and
pressure while the compressor will continue to leak air until
is on. Turn the compressor the vehicle is driven and the
off to get an accurate pressure sealant is distributed in the tire,
reading. The compressor therefore, Steps 12 through 18
may be turned on/off until the must be done immediately after
correct pressure is reached. Step 11.
Notice: If the recommended Be careful while handling the 16. If the flat tire was able to
pressure cannot be reached tire sealant and compressor inflate to the recommended
after approximately 25 minutes, kit as it could be warm after inflation pressure, remove the
the vehicle should not be driven usage. maximum speed label from the
farther. The tire is too severely sealant canister (E) and place
damaged and the tire sealant and 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
it in a highly visible location.
compressor kit cannot inflate the the accessory power outlet in
Do not exceed the speed on
tire. Remove the power plug from the vehicle.
this label until the damaged tire
is repaired or replaced.
10-86 Vehicle Care
17. Return the equipment to its inflation pressure, stop driving 21. Dispose of the used sealant
original storage location in the the vehicle. The tire is too canister (E) and sealant/air
vehicle. severely damaged and the tire hose (F) assembly at a local
18. Immediately drive the vehicle sealant cannot seal the tire. dealer or in accordance with
8 km (5 miles) to distribute the See Roadside Service (U.S. local state codes and practices.
sealant in the tire. and Canada) on page 138 or 22. Replace it with a new canister
Roadside Service (Mexico) on available from your dealer.
19. Stop at a safe location and page 1311.
check the tire pressure. 23. After temporarily sealing the
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 If the tire pressure has not tire using the tire sealant
under Using the Tire Sealant dropped more than 68 kPa and compressor kit, take the
and Compressor Kit without (10 psi) from the recommended vehicle to an authorized dealer
Sealant to Inflate a Tire inflation pressure, inflate the within 161 km (100 miles) of
(Not Punctured). tire to the recommended driving to have the tire repaired
inflation pressure. or replaced.
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi) 20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle. Using the Tire Sealant and
below the recommended Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
Vehicle Care 10-87
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
and wheel damage by driving slowly accessory power outlet in the
to a level place. Turn on the hazard vehicle. Unplug all items from
warning flashers. See Hazard other accessory power outlets.
Warning Flashers on page 65. See Power Outlets on page 58.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on If the vehicle has an accessory
page 1079 for other important power outlet, do not use the
safety warnings. cigarette lighter.
1. Remove the tire sealant and If the vehicle only has a cigarette
compressor kit from its storage lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
location. See Storing the Tire Do not pinch the power plug
Sealant and Compressor Kit on cord in the door or window.
page 1089.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) must be running while using the
and the power plug (H). air compressor.
3. Place the kit on the ground. 8. Turn the selector switch (A)
Make sure the tire valve stem is clockwise to the Air Only
positioned close to the ground position.
so the hose will reach it. 9. Press the on/off (B) button to
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap turn the compressor on.
from the flat tire by turning it The compressor will inflate the
counterclockwise. tire with air only.
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
10-88 Vehicle Care
10. Inflate the tire to the 11. Press the on/off button (B)
recommended inflation to turn the tire sealant and
pressure using the pressure compressor kit off.
gauge (C). The recommended Be careful while handling the
inflation pressure can be tire sealant and compressor
found on the Tire and Loading kit as it could be warm after
Information label. See Tire usage.
Pressure on page 1063.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
The pressure gauge (C) may the accessory power outlet in
read higher than the actual tire the vehicle.
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off 13. Disconnect the air only
to get an accurate reading. hose (G) from the tire The tire sealant and compressor kit
The compressor may be turned valve stem, by turning it has an accessory adapter located in
on/off until the correct pressure counterclockwise, and replace a compartment on the bottom of its
is reached. the tire valve stem cap. housing that may be used to inflate
If you inflate the tire higher 14. Replace the air only hose (G) air mattresses, balls, etc.
than the recommended and the power plug (H) and
pressure you can adjust cord back in its original
the excess pressure by location.
pressing the pressure deflation 15. Place the equipment in the
button (D) until the proper original storage location in the
pressure reading is reached. vehicle.
This option is only functional
when using the air only
hose (G).
Vehicle Care 10-89
Removal and Installation of the Storing the Tire Sealant Tire Changing
Sealant Canister and Compressor Kit Removing the Spare Tire and
To remove the sealant canister: Tools
1. Unwrap the sealant hose. To access the spare tire and tools:
2. Press the canister release 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
button.
on page 214.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
5. Push the new canister into
place.
This vehicle may have a tire

sealant and compressor kit in
place of a jack or spare tire. It is
located in a foam container in the
rear compartment storage area.
If the vehicle has a cargo cover, 2. Press on the bottom of the
see Cargo Management System on handle assembly to unlatch it
page 44 for instructions on how and lift up on the handle.
to access the tire sealant and
compressor kit. The prop rod locks into place
when open.
10-90 Vehicle Care
3. Remove the spare tire cover. 4. Remove the nut retaining the 6. Remove the wing nut (D).
spare tire. 7. Remove the extension (A),
5. Remove the spare tire and place jack (B) and wheel wrench (C)
it next to the tire being changed. and place them near the tire
being changed.
Vehicle Care 10-91
Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
Take off the wheel cover or center
cap, if the vehicle has one, to reach
the wheel bolts.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 1079 for more
information.
2. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen
and remove the wheel nut caps. 4. Turn the wheel wrench 6. Position the jack lift head at the
Do not try to remove plastic caps counterclockwise to loosen jack location nearest the flat tire.
from the cover or center cap. all the wheel nuts, but do not The jacking location is indicated
remove them yet. by a V-shaped notch in the
3. Pull the cover or center cap
away from the wheel. Store 5. Place the jack near the flat tire. plastic molding. The jack
the wheel cover in the cargo Notice: Make sure that the jack must not be used in any other
area until you have the flat tire lift head is in the correct position position.
repaired or replaced. or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
10-92 Vehicle Care
8. Turn the extension with the

{ WARNING wheel wrench clockwise to raise
the jack lift head until the jack
Raising the vehicle with the just fits under the vehicle.
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
7. Insert the hooked end of the

extension handle through the { WARNING
jack and the flat end through
the wheel wrench. Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
{ WARNING repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until the
Getting under a vehicle when it training. If a jack is provided with slots in the jack head fit into the
is jacked up is dangerous. If the the vehicle, it is designed only for metal flange located behind the
vehicle slips off the jack, you changing a flat tire. If it is used for triangle on the plastic moulding.
could be badly injured or killed. anything else, you or others could
Never get under a vehicle when be badly injured or killed if the
it is supported only by a jack. vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
Vehicle Care 10-93
Notice: Using a jack to raise the

vehicle without positioning it { WARNING
correctly could damage your
vehicle. When raising your Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
vehicle on a jack, be sure to parts to which it is fastened, can
position it correctly under the make wheel nuts become loose
frame and avoid contact with after time. The wheel could come
the plastic molding. off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
10. Put the compact spare tire
rust or dirt from places where the
near you.
wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
12. Remove any rust or dirt from
to use a scraper or wire brush
the wheel bolts, mounting
later, if needed, to get all the rust surfaces, and spare wheel.
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 1079. 13. Place the compact spare tire
on the wheel-mounting surface.
{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
Remove all of the wheel nuts. could fall off, causing a crash.
11. Remove the flat tire.
10-94 Vehicle Care
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Notice: Improperly tightened 17. Lower the jack all the way and
Tighten each nut by hand wheel nuts can lead to brake remove the jack from under the
until the wheel is held against pulsation and rotor damage. vehicle.
the hub. To avoid expensive brake repairs, 18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
15. Lower the vehicle by evenly tighten the wheel nuts with the wheel wrench.
turning the jack handle in the proper sequence and to
the proper torque specification. When reinstalling the wheel cover
counterclockwise. or center cap on the full-size tire,
See Capacities and Specifications
on page 122 for the wheel nut tighten all five plastic caps hand
{ WARNING torque specification. snug with the aid of the wheel
wrench and tighten them with
Wheel nuts that are improperly the wheel wrench an additional
or incorrectly tightened can onequarter of a turn.
cause the wheels to become
loose or come off. The wheel Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
nuts should be tightened with on the vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
a torque wrench to the proper
the compact spare, the cover or
torque specification after
the spare could be damaged.
replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 122 for
16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
original equipment wheel nut in a crisscross sequence,
torque specifications. as shown.
Vehicle Care 10-95
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire 3. Install the cargo cover.

and Tools For more information, see
Cargo Management System on
page 44.
{ WARNING
4. Place the tire, lying flat, in the
Storing a jack, a tire, or other rear storage compartment.
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
6. Route the strap through the
wheel, as shown.
To store the flat or spare tire and
tools: 7. Attach the strap to the other
cargo tie-down in the rear of
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
the vehicle.
on page 214 for more
information. 8. Tighten the strap.
2. Put back all tools as they 5. Attach the strap to the cargo The compact spare is for temporary
were stored in the rear storage tie-down in the rear of the use only. Replace the compact
compartment and put the vehicle. spare tire with a full-size tire as
compartment cover back on. soon as you can.
For more information, see
Storing the Compact Spare Tire
and Tools next in this section.
10-96 Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire tire repaired or replaced at your Jump Starting

convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size For more information about the
{ WARNING tire as soon as possible. The spare vehicle battery, see Battery on
tire will last longer and be in good page 1030.
Driving with more than one
shape in case it is needed again. If the vehicle battery has run down,
compact spare tire at a time
could result in loss of braking Notice: When the compact you may want to use another
and handling. This could lead to a spare is installed, do not take vehicle and some jumper cables to
crash and you or others could be the vehicle through an automatic start your vehicle. Be sure to use
injured. Use only one compact car wash with guide rails. The the following steps to do it safely.
spare tire at a time. compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
{ WARNING
If this vehicle has a compact vehicle. Batteries can hurt you. They can
spare tire, it was fully inflated when be dangerous because:
the vehicle was new; however, it Do not use the compact spare on
can lose air after a time. Check the other vehicles. . They contain acid that can
inflation pressure regularly. It should Do not mix the compact spare tire burn you.
be 420 kPa (60 psi). or wheel with other wheels or tires. . They contain gas that can
After installing the compact spare They will not fit. Keep the spare tire explode or ignite.
on the vehicle, stop as soon and its wheel together. . They contain enough
as possible and make sure the Notice: Tire chains will not fit electricity to burn you.
spare tire is correctly inflated. the compact spare. Using them
The compact spare is made to can damage the vehicle and can If you do not follow these steps
perform well at speeds up to damage the chains too. Do not exactly, some or all of these
105 km/h (65 mph) for distances up use tire chains on the compact things can hurt you.
to 5 000 km (3,000 mi), so you can spare.
finish your trip and have the full-size
Vehicle Care 10-97
Notice: Ignoring these steps 2. Get the vehicles close enough 3. Turn off the ignition on both
could result in costly damage so the jumper cables can reach, vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
to the vehicle that would not be but be sure the vehicles are accessories plugged into the
covered by the warranty. not touching each other. If they cigarette lighter or the accessory
Trying to start the vehicle by are, it could cause a ground power outlet. Turn off the radio
pushing or pulling it will not connection you do not want. and all lamps that are not
work, and it could damage the You would not be able to start needed. This will avoid sparks,
vehicle. your vehicle, and the bad helping save both batteries and
grounding could damage the the radio.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must electrical systems.
have a 12-volt battery with a 4. Open the hood on the
negative ground system. To avoid the possibility of the other vehicle and locate the
vehicles rolling, set the parking positive (+) and negative ()
Notice: Only use a vehicle brake firmly on both vehicles terminal locations on that
that has a 12-volt system with involved in the jump start vehicle.
a negative ground for jump procedure. Put the transmission
starting. If the other vehicle does Open the hood on your vehicle
in P (Park) before setting the and find the remote positive (+)
not have a 12-volt system with a parking brake.
negative ground, both vehicles and remote negative () jump
can be damaged. Notice: If the radio or other starting terminals.
accessories are left on during
the jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories
when jump starting the vehicle.
10-98 Vehicle Care
To uncover the remote

positive (+) terminal, lift open WARNING (Continued)
the access panel on the battery
cover indicated by the (+) sign. your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
{ WARNING add water to take care of that
An electric fan can start up even first. If you do not, explosive gas
when the engine is not running could be present.
and can injure you. Keep hands, Battery fluid contains acid that
clothing and tools away from any can burn you. Do not get it on
underhood electric fan. you. If you accidentally get it in
Your vehicle is equipped with a your eyes or on your skin, flush
remote positive (+) terminal (A) the place with water and get
and a remote negative () medical help immediately.
terminal (B). The remote
{ WARNING
positive (+) terminal is located Using an open flame near a
in the engine compartment on
the driver side of the vehicle,
battery can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
{ WARNING
above the rear of the battery. doing this, and some have been
The remote negative () terminal Fans or other moving engine
blinded. Use a flashlight if you parts can injure you badly. Keep
is a stud located in the engine
compartment on the driver side need more light. your hands away from moving
of the vehicle, on the front tie Be sure the battery has enough parts once the engine is running.
bar. See Engine Compartment water. You do not need to add
Overview on page 106 for more water to the battery installed in
information on location. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-99
5. Check that the jumper cables 6. Connect the red positive (+) 9. Connect the other end of the
do not have loose or missing cable to the positive (+) terminal negative () cable away from
insulation. If they do, you could on the vehicle with the dead the dead battery, but not near
get a shock. The vehicles could battery. Use a remote engine parts that move. The
also be damaged. positive (+) terminal if the electrical connection is just as
Before you connect the cables, vehicle has one. good there, and the chance
here are some basic things you 7. Do not let the other end of sparks getting back to the
should know. Positive (+) will go touch metal. Connect it to battery is much less.
to positive (+) or to a remote the positive (+) terminal of the Your vehicle has a remote ()
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle good battery. Use a remote terminal for this purpose.
has one. Negative () will go to a positive (+) terminal if the 10. Now start the vehicle with
heavy, unpainted metal engine vehicle has one. the good battery and run the
part or to a remote negative () 8. Now connect the black engine for a while.
terminal if the vehicle has one. negative () cable to the 11. Try to start the vehicle that
Do not connect positive (+) to negative () terminal of the had the dead battery. If it will
negative () or you will get a good battery. Use a remote not start after a few tries, it
short that would damage the negative () terminal if the probably needs service.
battery and maybe other parts. vehicle has one.
Do not connect the negative () Do not let the other end touch
cable to the negative () terminal anything until the next step.
on the dead battery because this The other end of the negative ()
can cause sparks. cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative () terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
10-100 Vehicle Care
Notice: If the jumper cables are To disconnect the jumper cables

connected or removed in the from both vehicles, do the following:
wrong order, electrical shorting 1. Disconnect the black
may occur and damage the negative () cable from the
vehicle. The repairs would not be vehicle that had the dead
covered by the vehicle warranty. battery.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct 2. Disconnect the black
order, making sure that the negative () cable from the
cables do not touch each other vehicle with the good battery.
or other metal. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
Jumper Cable Removal good battery.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
Part or Remote Negative () cable from the other vehicle.
Terminal 5. Close the access panel on the
B. Good Battery or Remote battery cover, if applicable.
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative () Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Vehicle Care 10-101

. What is the distance that will be
Towing Recreational Vehicle travelled? Some vehicles have
Towing restrictions on how far and how
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means long they can tow.
Notice: To avoid damage, towing the vehicle behind another . Is the proper towing equipment
the disabled vehicle should vehicle such as behind a motor going to be used? See your
be towed with all four wheels home. The two most common types dealer or trailering professional
off the ground. Care must be of recreational vehicle towing are for additional advice and
taken with vehicles that have known as dinghy towing and dolly equipment recommendations.
low ground clearance and/or towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
. Is the vehicle ready to be
special equipment. Always
ground. Dolly towing is towing the towed? Just as preparing the
flatbed on a car carrier.
vehicle with two wheels on the vehicle for a long trip, make sure
Consult your dealer or a the vehicle is prepared to be
ground and two wheels up on a
professional towing service if the towed.
device known as a dolly.
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Service (U.S. and Here are some important things to
Canada) on page 138 or Roadside consider before recreational vehicle
Service (Mexico) on page 1311. towing:
To tow the vehicle behind another . What is the towing capacity
vehicle for recreational purposes, of the towing vehicle?
such as behind a motor home, see Be sure to read the tow
Recreational Vehicle Towing in this vehicle manufacturer's
section. recommendations.
10-102 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing For vehicles being dinghy towed,

the vehicle should be run at the
Front-wheeldrive and
beginning of each day and at each
all-wheel-drive vehicles may
RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
be dinghy towed from the front.
This will ensure proper lubrication
These vehicles can also be towed
of transmission components.
by placing them on a platform
trailer with all four wheels off of
the ground. For other towing
options, see Dolly Towing
following in this section.
Vehicles with an 2.8 L V 6 engine
can be dinghy towed only for
service and are restricted to a 2. Remove the shift lever boot by
maximum distance of 100 km pulling up on the rear of the trim
(60 miles) and not to exceed plate.
80 km/h (50 mph).
Vehicles with the 3.0 L V 6 engine
can be dinghy towed without
distance restrictions. To tow the vehicle from the front
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) with all four wheels on the ground:
is exceeded while towing the 1. Position the vehicle that will
vehicle, it could be damaged. be towed and secure it to the
Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) towing vehicle.
while towing the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-103
Once the destination has been Notice: Do not tow a vehicle

reached: with the front drive wheels on
1. Shift the vehicle to P (Park). the ground if one of the front tires
is a compact spare tire. Towing
2. Reinstall the shift lever boot by with two different tire sizes on
inserting the front edge and the front of the vehicle can
pressing the rear of the trim cause severe damage to the
plate until it snaps into place. transmission.
3. Start the engine and let it idle for Dolly Towing (All-WheelDrive
more than three minutes before
Vehicles)
driving the vehicle.
All-wheeldrive vehicles should not
Notice: Too much or too
3. Use a small screw driver or tool be towed with two wheels on the
little fluid can damage the
to press and hold the manual ground. To properly tow these
transmission. Be sure that
release button on the front right. vehicles, they should be placed on
the transmission fluid is at the
a platform trailer with all four wheels
4. Put the vehicle in N (Neutral). proper level before towing with
off of the ground or dinghy towed
all four wheels on the ground.
Notice: If the vehicle is from the front. See Dinghy Towing
towed without performing earlier in this section.
each of the steps listed under
Dinghy Towing, the automatic
transmission could be damaged.
Be sure to follow all steps of the
dinghy towing procedure prior to
and after towing the vehicle.
10-104 Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing 3. Set the parking brake.

(Front-WheelDrive Vehicles) 4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
5. Follow the dolly manufacturer's
instructions for preparing the
vehicle and dolly for towing.
6. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle From
the Rear
Notice: Towing the vehicle from

the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
To tow the vehicle from the front
the vehicle towed from the rear.
with the rear wheels on the ground,
do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
page 923.
Vehicle Care 10-105
Appearance Care waxes and polishes that are

non-abrasive and made for a
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather, and
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. chemical fallout that can take their
Exterior Care toll over a period of years. To keep
Notice: Machine compounding
Cleaning Exterior or aggressive polishing on a the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
Lamps/Lenses basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only whenever possible.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
non-abrasive waxes and polishes Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
that are made for a basecoat/ Parts
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
clearcoat paint finish on the
Follow instructions under Washing Bright metal parts should be
vehicle.
the Vehicle later in this section. cleaned regularly to keep their
Foreign materials such as calcium luster. Wash with water or use
Finish Care chloride and other salts, ice melting chrome polish on chrome or
Occasional waxing or mild polishing agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, stainless steel trim, if necessary.
of the vehicle by hand may be bird droppings, chemicals from
Use special care with aluminum
necessary to remove residue from industrial chimneys, etc., can
trim. To avoid damaging protective
the paint finish. Approved cleaning damage the vehicle's finish if they
trim, never use auto or chrome
products can be obtained from your remain on painted surfaces. Wash
polish, steam, or caustic soap
dealer. the vehicle as soon as possible.
to clean aluminum. A coating
If necessary, use non-abrasive
If the vehicle has a basecoat/ of wax, rubbed to high polish,
cleaners that are marked safe for
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat is recommended for all bright
painted surfaces to remove foreign
gives more depth and gloss to the metal parts.
matter.
colored basecoat. Always use
10-106 Vehicle Care
Washing the Vehicle should not be used on plastic Notice: Conveyor systems on
parts, do not use it on the vehicle some automatic car washes could
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
or damage may occur and it damage the vehicle. There may
keep it clean by washing it often.
would not be covered by the not be enough clearance for the
Do not wash the vehicle in warranty. undercarriage. Check with the car
direct sunlight and use a car wash manager before using the
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing soap. automatic car wash.
washing and after, to remove all
Notice: Do not use cleaning cleaning agents completely. If they Weatherstrips
agents that are petroleum based are allowed to dry on the surface,
or that contain acid or abrasives, they could stain. Silicone grease on weatherstrips
as they can damage the paint, will make them last longer, seal
Dry the finish with a soft, clean better, and not stick or squeak.
metal, or plastic on the vehicle.
chamois or an all-cotton towel to Apply silicone grease with a clean
Approved cleaning products
avoid surface scratches and water cloth. During very cold, damp
can be obtained from your
spotting. weather frequent application may
dealer. Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct High pressure car washes could be required. See Recommended
product usage, necessary safety cause water to enter the vehicle. Fluids and Lubricants on page 117.
precautions, and appropriate Avoid using high pressure washes
disposal of any vehicle care closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
product. Certain cleaners contain surface of the vehicle. Use of power
chemicals that can damage the washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
emblems or nameplates on the (1,200 psi) can result in damage
vehicle. Check the cleaning or removal of paint and decals.
product label. If it states that it
Vehicle Care 10-107
Wheels and Trim Aluminum chrome-plated wheels, because Windshield and Wiper Blades
or Chrome the surface could be damaged.
Clean the outside of the windshield
The repairs would not be covered
The vehicle may have either with glass cleaner.
by the vehicle warranty. Use only
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. approved cleaners on aluminum Clean the rubber blades using
Keep the wheels clean using a or chrome-plated wheels. a lintfree cloth or paper towel
soft, clean cloth with mild soap soaked with windshield washer
Notice: Never drive a vehicle that
and water. Rinse with clean water. fluid or a mild detergent. Wash
has aluminum or chrome-plated
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a the windshield thoroughly when
wheels through an automatic car
soft, clean towel. A wax may then cleaning the blades. Bugs, road
wash that uses silicone carbide
be applied. grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle
tire cleaning brushes, as this
wash/wax treatments may cause
Notice: Chrome wheels and could cause damage. The repairs
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper
other chrome trim may be would not be covered by the
blades if they are worn or damaged.
damaged if the vehicle is not vehicle warranty.
washed after driving on roads Wipers can be damaged by:
Notice: Driving the vehicle
that have been sprayed with through an automatic car wash . Extreme dusty conditions
magnesium, calcium or sodium that has silicone carbide tire
chloride. These chlorides are
. Sand and salt
cleaning brushes, could damage
used on roads for conditions the aluminum or chrome-plated . Heat and sun
such as ice and dust. Always wheels. The repairs would not be .
wash the chrome with soap and Snow and ice, without proper
covered by the vehicle warranty. removal
water after exposure. Never drive a vehicle that has
Notice: Do not use strong soaps, aluminum or chrome-plated
chemicals, abrasive polishes, wheels through an automatic
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners car wash that uses silicone
that contain acid on aluminum or carbide tire cleaning brushes.
10-108 Vehicle Care
Tires Finish Damage At least every spring, flush these

materials from the underbody
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
with plain water. Clean any areas
clean the tires. scratches in the finish should be
where mud and debris can collect.
Notice: Using petroleum-based repaired right away. Bare metal will
Dirt packed in close areas of the
tire dressing products on the corrode quickly and may develop
frame should be loosened before
vehicle may damage the paint into major repair expense.
being flushed. Your dealer or an
finish and/or tires. When applying Minor chips and scratches can be underbody car washing system
a tire dressing, always wipe off repaired with touch-up materials can do this.
any overspray from all painted available from your dealer. Larger
surfaces on the vehicle. areas of finish damage can be Chemical Paint Spotting
corrected in your dealer's body Some weather and atmospheric
Sheet Metal Damage and paint shop. conditions can create a chemical
If the vehicle is damaged and fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
requires sheet metal repair or
Underbody Maintenance
upon and attack painted surfaces
replacement, make sure the body Chemicals used for ice and snow on the vehicle. This damage can
repair shop applies anti-corrosion removal and dust control can collect take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
material to parts repaired or on the underbody. If these are not discolorations, and small, irregular
replaced to restore corrosion removed, corrosion and rust can dark spots etched into the paint
protection. develop on the underbody parts surface.
Original manufacturer replacement such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
parts will provide the corrosion and exhaust system even though
protection while maintaining the they have corrosion protection.
vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Care 10-109
Interior Care Your dealer has products for Cleaners can contain solvents that
cleaning the interior. When cleaning can become concentrated in the
The interior will continue to look the interior, only use cleaners interior. Before using cleaners,
its best if it is cleaned often. Dust specifically designed for the read and adhere to all safety
and dirt can accumulate on the surfaces that are being cleaned. instructions on the label. While
upholstery and cause damage Permanent damage can result cleaning the interior, maintain
to the carpet, fabric, leather, and from using cleaners on surfaces adequate ventilation by opening
plastic surfaces. Stains should be for which they were not intended. the doors and windows.
removed quickly as extreme heat Apply the cleaner directly to the
could cause them to set rapidly. Do not clean the interior using the
cleaning cloth to prevent over-spray. following cleaners or techniques:
Lighter colored interiors may Remove any accidental over-spray
require more frequent cleaning. from other surfaces immediately. . Never use a knife or any other
Newspapers and garments that can sharp object to remove a soil
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners from any interior surface.
transfer color to home furnishings when cleaning glass surfaces
can also transfer color to the on the vehicle, could scratch the . Never use a stiff brush. It can
interior. glass and/or cause damage to cause damage.
Remove dust from small buttons the rear window defogger. When . Never apply heavy pressure or
and knobs with a small brush with cleaning the glass on the vehicle, rub aggressively with a cleaning
soft bristles. use only a soft cloth and glass cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
cleaner. damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
10-110 Vehicle Care

. Avoid laundry detergents Fabric/Carpet To clean:
or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
soap will leave a residue that brush attachment to remove dust cloth with water or club soda.
leaves streaks and attracts and loose dirt. A canister vacuum 2. Remove excess moisture.
dirt. For liquid cleaners, about with rotating brushes in the nozzle
may only be used on floor carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
and carpeted floor mats. For soils, soil and gently rub toward the
water is a good guide. Use only
always try to remove them first with center. Continue cleaning, using
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
plain water or club soda. Before a clean area of the cloth each
. Do not heavily saturate the cleaning, gently remove as much of time it becomes soiled.
upholstery while cleaning. the soil as possible using one of the 4. Continue to gently rub the
. Cleaners that contain solvents following techniques: soiled area.
can damage the interior. . For liquids: gently blot the 5. If the soil is not completely
remaining soil with a paper removed, use a mild soap
towel. Allow the soil to absorb solution and repeat the cleaning
into the paper towel until no process with plain water.
more can be removed.
. For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
Vehicle Care 10-111
If any of the soil remains, a To remove dust, a soft cloth Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
commercial fabric cleaner or dampened with water can be Other Plastic Surfaces
spot lifter may be necessary. used. If a more thorough cleaning
Test a small hidden area for is necessary, a soft cloth dampened To remove dust, a soft cloth
colorfastness before using a with a mild soap solution can dampened with water can be
commercial upholstery cleaner be used. Your dealer has a GM used. If a more thorough cleaning
or spot lifter. If the locally cleaned approved leather cleaner available is necessary, a clean soft cloth
area gives any impression that a that provides superior cleaning dampened with a mild soap solution
ring formation may result, clean performance when used regularly can be used to gently remove
the entire surface. on finished automotive leathers. dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
Allow the leather to dry naturally. or removers on plastic surfaces.
A paper towel can be used to blot Many commercial cleaners and
excess moisture from the fabric or Do not use heat, steam, spot lifters
or spot removers, or shoe polish coatings that are sold to preserve
carpet after the cleaning process. and protect soft plastic surfaces
on leather. Many commercial leather
Leather cleaners and coatings that are may permanently change the
sold to preserve and protect leather appearance and feel of the interior
Leather, and lighter colored leather and are not recommended. Do not
may permanently change the
in particular, will need more frequent use silicone or wax-based products,
appearance and feel of the leather
cleaning to prevent the buildup of or those containing organic solvents
and are not recommended. Do not
dust, dirt, and colors transferred to clean the interior because they
use silicone or wax-based products,
from other items so that these do can alter the appearance by
or those containing organic solvents
not become permanent stains. increasing the gloss in a
to clean the interior because they
can alter the appearance by non-uniform manner.
increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
10-112 Vehicle Care
Some commercial products may Care of Safety Belts Floor Mats

increase gloss on the instrument
Keep belts clean and dry.
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the { WARNING
windshield and even make it difficult { WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size
to see through the windshield under
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. or is not properly installed, it can
certain conditions.
It may severely weaken them. interfere with the accelerator
Notice: Air fresheners contain In a crash, they might not be able pedal and/or brake pedal.
solvents that may cause damage to provide adequate protection. Interference with the pedals can
to plastics and painted surfaces. Clean safety belts only with mild cause unintended acceleration
Follow the manufacturers and/or increased stopping
soap and lukewarm water.
instructions when using air distance which can cause a crash
fresheners in the vehicle. If air and injury. Make sure the floor
freshener comes in contact with mat does not interfere with the
paint or a plastic surface, blot
accelerator or brake pedal.
immediately with a soft cloth.
Damage caused by using air
fresheners would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Care 10-113
Use the following guidelines for Removing and Replacing the 2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
proper floor mat usage: Floor Mats mat retainer openings over the
. The original equipment floor carpet retainers and snapping
The drivers side floor mat is held in into position.
mats were designed for your place by two button-type retainers.
vehicle. If the floor mats need The passenger side floor mat is held 3. Make sure the floor mat is
replacing, it is recommended in place by one button-type retainer. properly secured and verify that
that GM certified floor mats be it does not interfere with the
purchased. Non-GM floor mats accelerator or brake pedal.
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
. Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on 1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
the driver side. mat to unlock each retainer and
. Do not place one floor mat on remove.
top of another.
10-114 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance Notice: Maintenance
intervals, checks, inspections,
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
recommended fluids, and Please read the information under
General Information lubricants are necessary to Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 keep this vehicle in good the vehicle in good condition,
working condition. Damage see your dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance caused by failure to follow
The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 scheduled maintenance might
vehicles that:
not be covered by the vehicle
Recommended Fluids, warranty. . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and As the vehicle owner, you are
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 responsible for the scheduled
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement maintenance in this section.
on page 912.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 We recommend having your
. Are driven on reasonable road
dealer perform these services.
Maintenance Records Proper vehicle maintenance helps surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10 to keep the vehicle in good working limits.
condition, improves fuel economy, . Use the recommended fuel.
and reduces vehicle emissions for See Recommended Fuel on
better air quality. page 948.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts, Scheduled

{ WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are
Performing maintenance work can
listed in Recommended Fluids Maintenance
and Lubricants on page 117 and
be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil
cause serious injury. Perform page 119. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays
maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer. Change engine oil and filter.
have the required know-how and See Engine Oil on page 1010.
the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires
An Emission Control Service.
If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling,
have a qualified technician do and performance of the vehicle, When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
the work. See Doing Your Own it is important that the first SOON message displays, service
Service Work on page 104. rotation service for new tires is required for the vehicle as
be performed. Tires should be soon as possible, within the next
rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
At your dealer, you can be See Tire Rotation on page 1071. the best conditions, the engine oil
certain that you will receive the life system might not indicate the
highest level of service available. need for vehicle service for more
Your dealer has specially trained than a year. The engine oil and filter
service technicians, uses genuine must be changed at least once a
replacement parts, as well as, year and the oil life system must
uptodate tools and equipment be reset. Your dealer has trained
to ensure fast and accurate service technicians who will perform
diagnostics. this work and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is reset

. Windshield washer fluid level . Fluids visual leak check
accidentally, service the vehicle check. See Washer Fluid on (or every 12 months, whichever
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since page 1026. occurs first). A leak in any
the last service. Reset the oil life . Windshield wiper blade system must be repaired
system whenever the oil is changed. inspection for wear, cracking, and the fluid level checked.
See Engine Oil Life System on or contamination and windshield . Engine air cleaner filter
page 1014. and wiper blade cleaning, inspection. See Engine Air
if contaminated. See Exterior Cleaner/Filter on page 1016.
Every Engine Oil Change
Care on page 10105. Worn . Brake system inspection
. Change engine oil and or damaged wiper blade (or every 12 months, whichever
filter. Reset oil life system. replacement. See Wiper Blade occurs first).
See Engine Oil on page 1010 Replacement on page 1033.
and Engine Oil Life System on . Steering and suspension
. Tire inflation pressures inspection. Visual inspection
page 1014. An Emission
check. See Tire Pressure on for damaged, loose, or missing
Control Service.
page 1063. parts or signs of wear.
. Engine coolant level check. . Tire wear inspection. See Tire
See Engine Coolant on
Inspection on page 1071.
page 1020.
. Rotate tires if necessary.
. Engine cooling system
See Tire Rotation on
inspection. Visual inspection
page 1071.
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.

. Body hinges and latches, Additional Required Services Once a Year
key lock cylinders, folding
seat hardware, and sunroof Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
. See Starter Switch Check on
(if equipped) lubrication. page 1031.
. Rotate tires. Tires should
See Recommended Fluids be rotated every 12 000 km/
. See Automatic Transmission
and Lubricants on page 117. 7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation Shift Lock Control Function
More frequent lubrication may on page 1071. Check on page 1031.
be required when the vehicle .
At Each Fuel Stop See Ignition Transmission Lock
is exposed to a corrosive
Check on page 1032.
environment. Applying silicone . Engine oil level check.
grease on weatherstrips with See Engine Oil on page 1010.
. See Park Brake and P (Park)
a clean cloth makes them last Mechanism Check on
longer, seal better, and not
. Engine coolant level check. page 1032.
stick or squeak. See Engine Coolant on
page 1020.
. Accelerator pedal check for
. Restraint system component damage, high effort, or binding.
check. See Safety System
. Windshield washer fluid level Replace if needed.
Check on page 329. check. See Washer Fluid on
page 1026.
. If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant
. Fuel system inspection for and Compressor Kit, check the
damage or leaks. Once a Month sealant expiration date printed
. Tire inflation check. See Tire on the instruction label of
. Exhaust system and nearby heat
Pressure on page 1063. the kit. See Tire Sealant and
shields inspection for loose or
Compressor Kit on page 1081.
damaged components. . Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 1071.
. Sunroof track and seal
inspection, if equipped.
See Sunroof on page 227.

. Underbody flushing service. First Engine Oil Change After
. Allwheel drive only: Transfer
. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles case fluid change (severe
Support Gas Strut Service: service) for vehicles mainly
. Engine air cleaner filter driven when frequently towing
Visually inspect gas strut, replacement. See Engine Air
if equipped, for signs of wear, a trailer, or used for taxi, police,
Cleaner/Filter on page 1016. or delivery service. Check
cracks, or other damage.
Check the hold open ability
. Automatic transmission fluid vent hose at transfer case for
of the gas strut. Contact your change (severe service) for kinks and proper installation.
dealer if service is required. vehicles mainly driven in Check to be sure vent hose is
heavy city traffic in hot weather, unobstructed, clear, and free of
First Engine Oil Change After in hilly or mountainous terrain, debris. During any maintenance,
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles when frequently towing a if a power washer is used to
. Passenger compartment trailer, or used for taxi, clean mud and dirt from the
air filter replacement (or every police, or delivery service. underbody, care should be taken
24 months, whichever occurs See Automatic Transmission to not directly spray the transfer
first). More frequent replacement Fluid on page 1016. case output seals. High pressure
may be needed if you drive water can overcome the seals
in areas with heavy traffic, and contaminate the transfer
areas with poor air quality, case fluid. Contaminated fluid
or areas with high dust levels. will decrease the life of the
Replacement may also be transfer case and should be
needed if you notice reduced replaced.
air flow, windows fogging up,
or odors. Your dealer can help
you determine when it is the
right time to replace the filter.

. Evaporative control system First Engine Oil Change After
. Spark plug replacement and
inspection. Check all fuel and Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles spark plug wires inspection.
vapor lines and hoses for proper An Emission Control Service.
hookup, routing, and condition.
. Automatic transmission fluid
Check that the purge valve, change (normal service). First Engine Oil Change After
See Automatic Transmission Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
if the vehicle has one, works
properly. Replace as needed. Fluid on page 1016. . Engine cooling system drain,
An Emission Control Service. . Allwheel drive only: Transfer flush, and refill (or every
The U.S. Environmental case fluid change (normal five years, whichever occurs
Protection Agency or the service). Check vent hose at first). See Cooling System on
California Air Resources Board transfer case for kinks and page 1019. An Emission
has determined that the failure proper installation. Check to be Control Service.
to perform this maintenance sure vent hose is unobstructed, . Engine drive belts inspection
item will not nullify the emission clear, and free of debris. During for fraying, excessive cracks,
warranty or limit recall liability any maintenance, if a power or obvious damage (or every
prior to the completion of washer is used to clean mud 10 years, whichever occurs
the vehicle's useful life. and dirt from the underbody, first). Replace, if needed.
We, however, urge that all care should be taken to not
recommended maintenance directly spray the transfer case
services be performed at the output seals. High pressure
indicated intervals and the water can overcome the seals
maintenance be recorded. and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification.
Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 1010.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 1020.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461,
Hydraulic Brake System
in Canada 88863462).
Windshield Washer Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission
DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
(3.0L V6 Engine)
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic Transmission AW1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19256039,
(2.8L V6 Engine) in Canada 19256040).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Chassis Lubrication
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Key Lock Cylinders
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 20897358 A3147C
Engine Oil Filter
2.8L V6 Engine 12593333 PF457G
3.0L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176
Spark Plugs
2.8L V6 Engine 12622561 41109
3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side 65.0 cm (25.6 in) 25979378
Passenger Side 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 25979379
Rear 30.0 cm (11.8 in) 20825882
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont.)

Odometer
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont.)

Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the
Vehicle Identification VIN is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See Engine Specifications
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 122 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the rear
side cargo management cover, has
the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
This legal identifier is in the front
. Model designation.
corner of the instrument panel, on . Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
. Production options and special
outside. The VIN also appears on equipment.
the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from the
Parts labels and certificates of title vehicle.
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
2.8L V6 Engine 12.4 L 13.1 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 11.9 L 12.6 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.8L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank 79.5 L 21.0 gal
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transmission Fluid
2.8L V6 6Speed Automatic

(Transmission Requires No Fluid Replacement)
3.0L V6 6Speed Automatic* (Drain and Refill) 9.0 L 9.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 150 Y 110 ft lb
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 1016 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.8L V6 (LAU) 6 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)
3.0L V6 (LF1) Y Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.8L, 3.0L V6 Engines

Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-13 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-16
Your satisfaction and goodwill
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects are important to the dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by the dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-7 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-18 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Service (U.S. and OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 can be quickly resolved at that
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-19 level. If the matter has already been
Roadside Service Radio Frequency reviewed with the sales, service or
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20 parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency of the dealership or the general
Appointments (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 manager.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting When contacting Cadillac, case will generally be heard within
a member of dealership remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with
management, it appears your likely be resolved at a dealer's the decision given in your case,
concern cannot be resolved by facility. That is why we suggest you may reject it and proceed with
the dealership without further following Step One first. any other venue for relief available
help, in the U.S., call the Cadillac STEP THREE U.S. Owners: to you.
Customer Assistance Center at Both General Motors and the You may contact the BBB Auto
18004588006. In Canada, call dealer are committed to making Line Program using the toll-free
the Canadian Cadillac Customer sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them
Communication Centre at with the new vehicle. However, at the following address:
1-888-446-2000. if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business
toll-free number in order to give outlined in Steps One and Two, Bureaus, Inc.
your inquiry prompt attention. you can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard
Have the following information Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program Suite 800
available to give the Customer to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Assistance representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or all 50 states and the District of
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may vehicle age, mileage and other
be required to resort to this informal factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
dispute resolution program prior
. Vehicle delivery date and to filing a court action, use of the limitations and/or discontinue
present mileage. program is free of charge and your its participation in this program.
STEP THREE Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you eligibility in the Canadian Motor
do not feel your concerns have Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
been addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or
procedure outlined in Steps One call the General Motors Customer
and Two, General Motors of Canada Communication Centre,
Limited wants you to be aware 1-800-263-3777 (English),
of its participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French),
mediation/arbitration program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Centre Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 warranty included with the new
the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive vehicle purchase.
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
may include an informal hearing See your dealer for details.
before the arbiter. The program is The inquiry should be accompanied
designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification
settlement process, from the time Number (VIN).
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
Customer Assistance Make sure that they have all

. Brand
Procedure necessary information. They are . Vehicle Identification
interested in your continual Number (VIN)
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are satisfaction.
very important to your dealer and . Mileage
General Motors. STEP TWO . Delivery date
Normally, any problem with the If you are not satisfied, please . Description of the problem
transaction, sale, or usage of contact the general manager or the
the vehicle must be handled dealership owner to ask for their . Dealership name
by your dealer sales or service help. If they are not able to resolve . Dealership address
departments. However, we your case, ask them to contact the
recognize that despite the good right people at General Motors for See Customer Assistance Offices
intentions of all parties involved, support, if needed. (U.S. and Canada) on page 135
sometimes a misunderstanding or Customer Assistance Offices
STEP THREE (Mexico) on page 136 for more
may occur.
If your case is not resolved in a information.
If you have a problem that has not
reasonable amount of time by your
been satisfactorily handled through
dealer, please call the General
the normal means, we suggest the
Motors Customer Assistance
following steps:
Center (CAC) and provide the
STEP ONE following information:
Explain your case to the dealer . Name
service agent, service manager, . Address
dealer sales agent, or sales
manager, depending on your case. . Phone number
. Model year
Customer Assistance From Puerto Rico: Overseas

Offices (U.S. and Canada) 1-800-496-9992 (English) Please contact the local
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) General Motors Business Unit.
Cadillac encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for From U.S. Virgin Islands: Mexico, Central America and
assistance. However, if a customer 1-800-496-9994 Caribbean Islands/Countries
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, (Except Puerto Rico and
the letter should be addressed to: Canada
U.S. Virgin Islands)
United States General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer General Motors de Mexico,
Cadillac Customer Assistance S. de R.L. de C.V.
Communication Centre, Mail Code:
Center Customer Assistance Center
CA1-163-005
Cadillac Motor Car Division 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
P.O. Box 33169 Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Col. Granada
Detroit, MI 48232-5169 C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
www.gm.ca
www.Cadillac.com 01-800-466-0805
1-888-446-2000
1-800-458-8006 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0805
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance:
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
1-800-882-1112
Customer Assistance United States and Canada Customer Assistance for

Offices (Mexico) 1-866-466-8195 Text Telephone (TTY)
To contact the Customer Assistance Costa Rica Users (U.S. and Canada)
Center (CAC), use the phone To assist customers who are deaf,
numbers listed in this section. 00-800-052-1005
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
Customer assistance is available Guatemala and who use Text Telephones
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from 1-800-999-5252
available at its Customer Assistance
08:00 to 15:00 hours. Panama Center. Any TTY user can
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer 00-800-052-0001 communicate with Cadillac by
Assistance Center (CAC) should be dialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY users
sent to: cac.cadillac@gm.com. Dominican Republic in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Mexico 1-888-751-5301
From Mexico City El Salvador
5329-0816 800-6273
From Other Mexico Locations Honduras
01-800-466-0816 800-0122-6101
Online Owner Center Other Helpful Links: Here are a few of the valuable
Cadillac www.cadillac.com tools and services you will have
Cadillac Owner Center (U.S.) access to:
www.cadillacownercenter.com Cadillac Merchandise
www.cadillaccollection.com
. My Showroom: Find and save
Information and services information on vehicles and
customized for your specific Help Center www.cadillac.com/ current offers in your area.
vehicle all in one convenient pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do . My Dealers: Save details such
place. . FAQ (Frequently Asked as address and phone number
. Digital owner manual, warranty Questions) for each of your preferred GM
information, and more. . Contact Us dealers.
. Storage for online service and . My Driveway: Access quick
My GM Canada www.gm.ca
maintenance records. links to parts and service
My GM Canada is a estimates, check trade-in
. Cadillac dealer locator for password-protected section of values, or schedule a service
service nationwide. www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the
. Exclusive privileges and offers. information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your
. Recall notices for your specific personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile.
vehicle. tools and forms with greater ease. . My Preferences: Manage your
. OnStar and GM Cardmember profile and use tools and forms
Services Earnings summaries. with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
section within www.gm.ca.
GM Mobility For more information on the limited Calling for Service

offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
Reimbursement Program call the GM Mobility Assistance
When calling Roadside Service,
(U.S. and Canada) have the following information
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
ready:
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935. . Your name, home address, and
home telephone number.
General Motors of Canada
also has a Mobility Program. . Telephone number of your
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) location.
for details. TTY users call . Location of the vehicle.
1-800-263-3830.
This program is available to
. Model, year, color, and license
qualified applicants for cost Roadside Service plate number of the vehicle.
reimbursement of eligible (U.S. and Canada) . Odometer reading, Vehicle
aftermarket adaptive equipment Identification Number (VIN),
required for the vehicle, such as In the United States or Canada, and delivery date of the vehicle.
hand controls or a wheelchair/ call 1-800-882-1112.
. Description of the problem.
scooter lift for the vehicle. Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only,
call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Coverage Cadillac Owner Privileges responsibility for the repair or

replacement of the tire if it is not
Services are provided up to . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
covered by the warranty.
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi), Delivery of enough fuel for the
whichever comes first. vehicle to get to the nearest . Battery Jump Start: Service to
service station. jump start a dead battery.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . LockOut Service: Service . Trip Routing Service: Detailed
person driving the vehicle without to unlock the vehicle if you are maps of North America are
permission from the owner is not locked out. A remote unlock may provided when requested
covered. be available if you have OnStar. either with the most direct
For security reasons, the driver route or the most scenic route.
Roadside Service is not a part of
must present identification Additional travel information
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
before this service is given. is also available. Allow three
Cadillac and General Motors of
weeks for delivery.
Canada Limited reserve the right to . Emergency Tow From a Public
make any changes or discontinue Road or Highway: Tow to . Trip Interruption Benefits
the Roadside Service program at the nearest Cadillac dealer for and Service: If your trip is
any time without notification. warranty service, or if the vehicle interrupted due to a warranty
was in a crash and cannot be failure, incidental expenses
Cadillac and General Motors of
driven. Assistance is also given may be reimbursed during the
Canada Limited reserve the right
when the vehicle is stuck in the 5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi)
to limit services or payment to an
sand, mud, or snow. Powertrain warranty period.
owner or driver if they decide the
Items considered are hotel,
claims are made too often, or the . Flat Tire Change: Service to
meals, and rental car.
same type of claim is made many change a flat tire with spare
times. tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is your
Cadillac Technician Roadside Services Not Included in

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Service (U.S. only) Roadside Service Service: Pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and
Cadillac's exceptional Roadside . Impound towing caused by a copy of the repair orders are
Service is more than an auto club violation of any laws. required. Once authorization
or towing service. It provides every . Legal fines. has been received, the
Cadillac owner in the United States Roadside Service advisor will
with the advantage of contacting . Mounting, dismounting, help you make arrangements
a Cadillac advisor and, where or changing of snow tires, and explain how to receive
available, a Cadillac trained dealer chains, or other traction payment.
technician who can provide on-site devices.
service.
. Alternative Service: If
. Towing or services for vehicles assistance cannot be provided
A dealer technician will travel driven on a non-public road or right away, the Roadside
to your location within a 30 mile highway. Service advisor may give
radius of a participating Cadillac you permission to get local
Services Specific to
dealership. If beyond this radius, we emergency road service.
will arrange to have your car towed CanadianPurchased Vehicles
You will receive payment, up to
to the nearest Cadillac dealership. . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement $100, after sending the original
Each technician travels with a is approximately $5 Canadian. receipt to Roadside Service.
specially equipped service vehicle Diesel fuel delivery may be Mechanical failures may be
complete with the necessary restricted. Propane and other covered, however any cost for
Cadillac parts and tools required fuels are not provided through parts and labor for repairs not
to handle most roadside repairs. this service. covered by the warranty are
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle the owner responsibility.
registration is required.
. Trip Routing Service: Limit of
six requests per year.
Roadside Service Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation

(Mexico) Appointments Program (U.S. and
Roadside Service is available (U.S. and Canada) Canada)
24 hours a day, 365 days of When the vehicle requires warranty To enhance your ownership
the year. service, contact the dealer and experience, we and our participating
For detailed information about request an appointment. By dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Roadside Service, please see scheduling a service appointment Transportation, a customer support
the brochure provided with your and advising the service consultant program for vehicles with the
new vehicle or visit our website of your transportation needs, the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
at: www.cadillac.com.mx. dealer can help minimize your Coverage period in Canada),
Navigate the site and click on inconvenience. extended powertrain, and/or
Asistencia en el Camino. E-mail If the vehicle cannot be scheduled hybridspecific warranties in
correspondence should be sent into the service department both the U.S. and Canada.
to: asistencia.cadillac@gm.com. immediately, keep driving it until Several Courtesy Transportation
To contact Roadside Service by it can be scheduled for service, options are available to assist in
phone, use the following numbers: unless, of course, the problem is reducing inconvenience when
safety related. If it is, please call warranty repairs are required.
Mexico the dealership, let them know this, Courtesy Transportation is not a
01-800-466-0805 and ask for instructions. part of the New Vehicle Limited
United States If the dealer requests you to bring Warranty. A separate booklet
the vehicle for service, you are entitled Warranty and Owner
1-866-466-8906 urged to do so as early in the work Assistance Information furnished
Canada day as possible to allow for the with each new vehicle provides
same day-repair. detailed warranty coverage
1-800-268-6800 information.
Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Reimbursement The dealer may arrange to provide
Warranty service can generally
be completed while you wait. If the vehicle requires overnight you with a courtesy rental vehicle
However, if you are unable warranty repairs, and public or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
to wait, GM helps to minimize transportation is used instead that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
inconvenience by providing several of the dealer's shuttle service, for an overnight warranty repair.
transportation options. Depending the expense must be supported Rental reimbursement will be limited
on the circumstances, the dealer by original receipts and can only and must be supported by original
can offer one of the following: be up to the maximum amount receipts. This requires that you sign
allowed by GM for shuttle service. and complete a rental agreement
Shuttle Service In addition, for U.S. customers, and meet state/provincial, local,
Shuttle service is the preferred should you arrange transportation and rental vehicle provider
means of offering Courtesy through a friend or relative, limited requirements. Requirements vary
Transportation. Dealers may provide reimbursement for reasonable and may include minimum age
shuttle service to get you to your fuel expenses may be available. requirements, insurance coverage,
destination with minimal interruption Claim amounts should reflect credit card, etc. You are responsible
of your daily schedule. This includes actual costs and be supported by for fuel usage charges and may
oneway or roundtrip shuttle service original receipts. See the dealer for also be responsible for taxes, levies,
within reasonable time and distance information regarding the allowance usage fees, excessive mileage,
parameters of the dealer's area. amounts for reimbursement of fuel or rental usage beyond the
or other transportation costs. completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Collision Damage Repair appearance, durability, and safety

Information are preserved. The use of Genuine
(U.S. and Canada) GM parts can help maintain the
All program options, such as shuttle If the vehicle is involved in a GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
service, may not be available at collision and it is damaged,
every dealer. Please contact the Recycled original equipment
have the damage repaired by a parts may also be used for repair.
dealer for specific information qualified technician using the proper
about availability. All Courtesy These parts are typically removed
equipment and quality replacement from vehicles that were total losses
Transportation arrangements parts. Poorly performed collision
will be administered by appropriate in prior crashes. In most cases,
repairs diminish the vehicle resale the parts being recycled are from
dealer personnel. value, and safety performance can undamaged sections of the vehicle.
General Motors reserves the be compromised in subsequent A recycled original equipment GM
right to unilaterally modify, collisions. part may be an acceptable choice
change, or discontinue Courtesy to maintain the vehicle's originally
Transportation at any time and Collision Parts
designed appearance and safety
to resolve all questions of claim Genuine GM Collision parts are performance; however, the history
eligibility pursuant to the terms and new parts made with the same of these parts is not known. Such
conditions described herein at its materials and construction methods parts are not covered by the GM
sole discretion. as the parts with which the vehicle New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
was originally built. Genuine GM any related failures are not covered
Collision parts are the best choice to by that warranty.
ensure that the vehicle's designed
Aftermarket collision parts are Insuring The Vehicle If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
also available. These are made company may require you to have
Protect your investment in the
by companies other than GM and insurance that ensures repairs with
GM vehicle with comprehensive
may not have been tested for the Genuine GM Original Equipment
and collision insurance coverage.
vehicle. As a result, these parts Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
There are significant differences
may fit poorly, exhibit premature Genuine Manufacturer replacement
in the quality of coverage afforded
durability/corrosion problems, parts. Read the lease carefully, as
by various insurance policy terms.
and may not perform properly in you may be charged at the end of
Many insurance policies provide
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket the lease for poor quality repairs.
reduced protection to the GM
parts are not covered by the GM
vehicle by limiting compensation If a Crash Occurs
New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
for damage repairs by using
and any vehicle failure related to If there has been an injury, call
aftermarket collision parts. Some
such parts is not covered by that emergency services for help. Do not
insurance companies will not
warranty. leave the scene of a crash until all
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, matters have been taken care of.
Repair Facility Move the vehicle only if its position
we recommend that you ensure
GM also recommends that you that the vehicle will be repaired puts you in danger, or you are
choose a collision repair facility that with GM original equipment collision instructed to move it by a police
meets your needs before you ever parts. If such insurance coverage officer.
need collision repairs. The dealer is not available from your current Give only the necessary information
may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching to police and other parties involved
with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier. in the crash.
stateoftheart equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision
repair center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
For emergency towing see Choose a reputable repair facility Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
Roadside Service (U.S. and that uses quality replacement parts. but you must live with the repair.
Canada) on page 138 or Roadside See Collision Parts earlier in this Depending on your policy limits,
Service (Mexico) on page 1311. section. your insurance company may
Gather the following information: If the airbag has inflated, see initially value the repair using
What Will You See After an Airbag aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
. Driver name, address, and the repair professional, and insist
telephone number. Inflates? on page 337.
on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
. Driver license number. Managing the Vehicle Damage if the vehicle is leased, you may
Repair Process be obligated to have the vehicle
. Owner name, address, and repaired with Genuine GM parts,
telephone number. In the event that the vehicle requires even if your insurance coverage
damage repairs, GM recommends does not pay the full cost.
. Vehicle license plate number.
that you take an active role in its
. Vehicle make, model, and repair. If you have a pre-determined If another party's insurance
model year. repair facility of choice, take the company is paying for the repairs,
vehicle there, or have it towed you are not obligated to accept
. Vehicle Identification a repair valuation based on that
Number (VIN). there. Specify to the facility that any
required replacement collision parts insurance company's collision
. Insurance company and policy policy repair limits, as you have no
be original equipment parts, either
number. new Genuine GM parts or recycled contractual limits with that company.
. General description of the original GM parts. Remember, In such cases, you can have control
damage to the other vehicle. recycled parts will not be covered of the repair and parts choices as
by the GM vehicle warranty. long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Service Publications Owner Information Current and Past Models

Ordering Information Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
Service Manuals to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
Service Manuals have the information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the ORDER TOLL FREE:
diagnosis and repair information 1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
on the engines, transmission, axle, Maintenance Schedule for all
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
suspension, brakes, electrical, models.
steering, body, etc. For Credit Card Orders Only
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Service Bulletins Owner Manual, and Warranty
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Booklet.
Service Bulletins give additional Or write to:
technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Helm, Incorporated
needed to knowledgeably service
shipping fees. P.O. Box 07130
General Motors cars and trucks.
Detroit, MI 48207
Each bulletin contains instructions Without Portfolio: Owner
to assist in the diagnosis and Manual only. Prices are subject to change
service of the vehicle. without notice and without incurring
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
obligation. Allow ample time for
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
delivery.
shipping fees.
All listed prices are quoted in
U.S. funds. Make checks payable in
U.S. funds.
Reporting Safety group of vehicles, it may order Reporting Safety Defects

a recall and remedy campaign. to the Canadian
Defects However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
Government
Reporting Safety Defects problems between you, your If you live in Canada, and you
to the United States dealer, or General Motors. believe that the vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Government To contact NHTSA, you may Canada immediately, and notify
If you believe that your vehicle call the Vehicle Safety Hotline General Motors of Canada Limited.
has a defect which could cause toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
a crash or could cause injury or (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go write to:
death, you should immediately to http://www.safercar.gov; Transport Canada
inform the National Highway or write to: Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration Administrator, NHTSA 2780 Sheffield Road
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
General Motors. Washington, D.C. 20590
If NHTSA receives similar You can also obtain other
complaints, it may open an information about motor
investigation, and if it finds vehicle safety from
that a safety defect exists in a http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data
In addition to notifying NHTSA Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain
like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations,
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write: hitting a road obstacle, data that
information about the vehicles
Cadillac Customer Assistance performance and how it is driven. will assist in understanding how
Center For example, the vehicle uses a vehicle's systems performed.
Cadillac Motor Car Division computer modules to monitor and The EDR is designed to record
P.O. Box 33169 control engine and transmission data related to vehicle dynamics
Detroit, MI 48232-5169 performance, to monitor the and safety systems for a short
conditions for airbag deployment period of time, typically 30 seconds
In Canada, call 18884462000, or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
or write: and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock designed to record such data as:
Canadian Cadillac Customer braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
Communication Centre, Mail Code: vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating.
CA1-163-005 data to help the dealer technician
General Motors of Canada Limited service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened.
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or
owners personal preferences, such brake pedal.
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, . How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings. traveling.
This data can help provide a better manufacturer, other parties, such OnStar
understanding of the circumstances as law enforcement, that have the
in which crashes and injuries occur. special equipment, can read the If the vehicle is equipped with
information if they have access to an active OnStar system, that
Important: EDR data is recorded system may also record data in
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial the vehicle or the EDR.
crash or near crashlike situations.
crash situation occurs; no data is GM will not access this data or The OnStar Terms and Conditions
recorded by the EDR under normal share it with others except: with provides information on data
driving conditions and no personal the consent of the vehicle owner collection and use and is available
data (e.g., name, gender, age, or, if the vehicle is leased, with the in the OnStar glove box kit,
and crash location) is recorded. consent of the lessee; in response at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
However, other parties, such as to an official request by police or www.onstar.ca (Canada), or
law enforcement, could combine similar government office; as part
by pressing the Q button and
the EDR data with the type of of GM's defense of litigation through
personally identifying data the discovery process; or, as speaking to an advisor.
routinely acquired during a required by law. Data that GM
crash investigation. collects or receives may also be Navigation System
To read data recorded by an EDR, used for GM research needs or If the vehicle has a navigation
special equipment is required, and may be made available to others for system, use of the system may
access to the vehicle or the EDR is research purposes, where a need is result in the storage of destinations,
needed. In addition to the vehicle shown and the data is not tied to a addresses, telephone numbers, and
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) Statement
RFID technology is used in This vehicle has systems that
some vehicles for functions such operate on a radio frequency that
as tire pressure monitoring and comply with Part 15 of the Federal
ignition system security, as well as Communications Commission (FCC)
in connection with conveniences rules and with Industry Canada
such as key fobs for remote door Standards RSS210/220/310.
locking/unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
personal information or link with interference.
any other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any
personal information. interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any
of these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45 Antenna
Accessories and
How Does an Airbag Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Anti-Theft
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Passenger Sensing Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Adaptive Forward
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39 Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-40
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
What Makes an Airbag Antilock Brake
Adaptive Forward
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Lighting (AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
What Will You See After Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Add-On Electrical
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Appearance Care
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
When Should an Airbag Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
Adjustable Throttle and
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-33 Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Adjustments
Airbags Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16
Servicing Airbag-Equipped CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Air Filter, Passenger
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 Audio System
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Alarm System Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Airbag
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Adding Equipment to the
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-30, 9-30
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
i-2 INDEX
Automatic Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-22 C

Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-26 Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
California
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Perchlorate Materials
Shift Lock Control Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 7-29, 7-35 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
B Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Capacities and
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Carbon Monoxide
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Voltage and Charging Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-33 High Intensity Discharge
Cargo
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-50, 7-52, 7-56 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Brake License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-46
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Pedal and Adjustable Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
INDEX i-3
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Cautions, Danger, and Cleaning Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105 Courtesy Transportation
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Climate Control Systems Cover
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2 Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-18 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Check Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-13 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Ignition Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-96 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-32 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Child Restraints Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5, 13-6
Infants and Young Compressor Kit, Tire Text Telephone (TTY)
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48 Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Lower Anchors and Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Customer Information
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-55 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Service Publications
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-16
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63, 3-66 Coolant Customer Satisfaction
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
i-4 INDEX
D Driving E
Characteristics and
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-13 E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Danger, Warnings, and ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Economy Mode
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-18 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Daytime Running Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-22
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Electrical Equipment,
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 7-29, 7-35 Electrical System
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Engine Compartment
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Door Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Fuses and Circuit
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Driving for Better Fuel
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Instrument Panel Fuse
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . .3-14 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Dual Automatic Climate
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Drive Systems Rear Compartment Fuse
DVD
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-30, 9-30 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Driver Information
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
INDEX i-5
Engine Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Fog Lamps

Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Check and Service Engine Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-18 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Front Fog Lamp
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Coolant Temperature Front Seats
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 F Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Features Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Cooling System Messages . . .5-36 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . 3-11
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Filter, Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Gasoline Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5 E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 Filling a Portable Fuel
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Fluid Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-25 Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-16 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-49
Engine Oil Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-48
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
i-6 INDEX
Fuel (cont.) G General Information

Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-27 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Requirements, California . . . . .9-49 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Gasoline
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Fuel Economy GM Mobility Reimbursement
Gasoline Engine, Starting . . . . . . 9-20
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Gauge
Fuel Economy Gauge . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Gauges H
Fuses Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Coolant
Engine Compartment Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Fuses and Circuit Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Adaptive Forward
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Instrument Panel Fuse Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Rear Compartment Fuse Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Warning Lights and
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Daytime Running
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
INDEX i-7
Headlamps (cont.) I L
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-57
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Ignition Transmission Lock Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-29
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Lamps
Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Infants and Young Children, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3
Heated
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Heated and Ventilated Front
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 J Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Heater
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 K LATCH System
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-65 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-38 Replacing Parts After a
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Keyless Entry Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8 Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-4 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
i-8 INDEX
Liftgate Lights (cont.) M

Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Maintenance
Light High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Adaptive Forward Lighting High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Maintenance Schedule
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Recommended Fluids and
StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Lighting Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-19
Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Traction Control System
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 (TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 7-25
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Messages
Lights Locks
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-40
Antilock Brake System Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Battery Voltage and
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-22 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-27
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Lower Anchors and
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-22 Tethers for Children
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-36
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-26 (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
INDEX i-9
Messages (cont.) N Ordering

Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-16
Navigation
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Outlets
Vehicle Data Recording
Object Detection System . . . . .5-39 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Net
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Overview, Infotainment
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 P
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 O Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Object Detection System
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Parking
Mirrors Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Off-Road
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Automatic Dimming Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Brake and P (Park)
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Oil
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-32
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-24
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14
Passenger Airbag Status
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Passenger Compartment Air
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-46
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-39
Monitor System, OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Perchlorate Materials
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Operation, Infotainment
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
i-10 INDEX
Personalization R Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Radio Frequency
Phone Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-43
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-50, 7-52, 7-56 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Power Rearview Mirror
Radios
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-22 Recommended
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Recommended Fluids and
Rear Axle
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Pregnancy, Using Safety Records
Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-5
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Privacy Recreational Vehicle
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Radio Frequency Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-101
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20 Reimbursement Program,
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Program GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-48
Courtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11 Remote Keyless Entry
Rear Seat
Proposition 65 Warning, (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-4
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
INDEX i-11
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Roadside Service . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-11 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Roof Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Replacement Parts Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-11
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-45 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Replacing LATCH System Running the Vehicle While Seats
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Replacing Safety Belt Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
System Parts After a S Heated and Ventilated
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Reporting Safety Defects Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-17 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 How to Wear Safety Belts Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-7
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Restraints Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Retained Accessory Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Securing Child
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-30 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63, 3-66
Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-28 Security
Ride Control Systems Safety Defects Reporting Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-37 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-17 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Roads
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
i-12 INDEX
Service Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Storing the Tire Sealant

Accessories and StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24 and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Maintenance, General Starting the Gasoline System
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Starting the Vehicle Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Publications Ordering Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 T
Scheduling Appointments . . . .13-11 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-19
Shift Lock Control Function Storage Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Check, Automatic Mass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .7-25 Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 3-7
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Storage Areas Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Shifting Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Tires
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Cargo Management System . . . 4-4 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Signals, Turn and Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Spare Tire Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Specifications and Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
INDEX i-13
Tires (cont.) Towing (cont.) U

Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-67 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-40
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-62
Uniform Tire Quality
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Traction
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-48
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-34
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-65 Control System (TCS)/
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Sealant and Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-37
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Sealant and Compressor Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .9-37 V
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 Trailer Vehicle
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-62 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Terminology and Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Transmission Identification
Uniform Tire Quality Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Wheel Alignment and Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Transportation Program, Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-78 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-42
When It Is Time for New Turbo Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Turn and Lane-Change Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Towing Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-54 Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . 10-101
i-14 INDEX
Vehicle Care Washer, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Storing the Tire Sealant Wheels
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-89 Alignment and Tire
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Vehicle Identification Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Service Parts Identification Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 When It Is Time for New
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-53
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
W Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Warning Windshield
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Warning Lights, Gauges, Winter
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-33
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv Wipers
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-42

Cadillac 2011 Cadillac SRX Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cadillac 2011 Cadillac SRX Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cadillac SRX Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2011 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

This manual describes features Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart . : Fuel Gauge

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Initial Drive Remote Keyless Q: Press to lock all doors.

Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start

Liftgate Power Liftgate Operation Windows

Seat Adjustment 3. Release the handle to stop the Power Seats

A. Seat Position Control

Heated and Ventilated Press C or {, if available, Safety Belts

Power Folding Mirrors To fold the mirrors: Steering Wheel

Throttle and Brake Pedal Interior Lighting Reading Lamps

Exterior Lighting AUTO: Turns the headlamps on Windshield Wiper/Washer

G: Turn the 3 band up for Rainsense

Climate Controls See Dual Automatic Climate

Vehicle Features Buttons 1 6: Press to save and Setting the Clock

Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth Steering Wheel Controls

Press z to select the previous Cruise Control Navigation System

Driver Information B. w x: Use the thumbwheel Vehicle Personalization

Rear Vision Ultrasonic Parking Assist The system can be disabled by

Power Outlets Universal Remote System Performance and

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

Notice: If the keys get locked If there is a decrease in the RKE

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Keyless Unlocking removed from the interior of the

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Lock Sensor Keyless Liftgate Opening Programming with a Recognized

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

4. Press the ignition. When the Programming without a

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Starting the Vehicle with a Low 3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or

2. Place the transmitter in the

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

Extending Engine Run Time Shutting the Engine Off After a

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING . Young children who get into

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

Lockout Deterrent Delayed Locking Safety Locks

2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

Doors Manual Liftgate

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

Power Liftgate OFF: The liftgate only operates

2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Do not force the liftgate open or Obstacle Detection Features

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Vehicle Security 3. After 30 seconds, the alarm Disarming the System

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

How to Detect a Tamper Immobilizer Operation

2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows